Home

24i & 96i user and feature guide

1. Default Setting One Touch Line Access enabled 256 Handsfree Speaker amp Microphone Cont d Options None Programming gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 6 Pre select One touch Enable 1 or disable 0 One Touch Line access If enabled user can press a line or line appearance key without first lifting the handset Related Features None Operation lt Key Telephone gt To enable Handsfree Answer back for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 821 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Press SPK to hang up This disable Forced Intercom Ringing To talk Handsfree 1 Press SPK CL key or line key 2 Place call 3 Speak toward phone when called party answers To change a handset call into a Handsfree call 1 Press SPK 2 Press SPK to hang up Handsfree mode when MIC LED is off Monitor mode when MIC LED is light on Press MIC key when you change the mode To change a Handsfree call into a handset call 1 Lift handset 257 Headset Operation Description A keyset user can utilize a customer provided headset in place of the handset Like using Handsfree using the handset frees up the user s hands for other work However Headset Operation provides privacy not available from Handsfree An extension in the headset mode has two options for when it appears busy to incoming callers The headset extension can be
2. Disconnect To set DISA operation mode to disconnect in Set Transfer destination 1802 Items 1 3 enter 0 Ring Group in 1803 Continued on following page 174 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page i In 0517 assign a Should DISA caller s Yes BERCI Bade allow Trunk to Trunk Transfer features for continue and disconnect In 0405 Item 74 enter the waiting time for DISA Control Code dialing In 0405 Item 73 set how long Line to Line conversation In 0905 assign Trunk to Trunk Line Group Should DISA caller s No Class of Service allow dialing 9 for Trunk Line Group Routing In 0412 Item 2 enter 1 to allow dial 9 access to Trunk lines In 0412 Item 2 enter 0 to allow dial 9 access to Trunk lines In 1811 assign DISA class to routes set up in 0906 for each Night Service mode Should DISA caller s Class of Service allow dialing enter 0 to prevent enter 1 to allow dialing Trunk lines Service Code 804 and a dialing Trunk lines via Service Code 804 Trunk Line Group for via Service Code 804 outside calls In 0412 Item 3 In 0412 Item 3 Continued Continued on following on following page page B A 175 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming Cont d Continued Continued from from previous p
3. Assign the DUD or DISA Feature Do you finish the setting for DUD or DISA setup Programming Mh In Program Does VAU send VAU fixed 0401 Item 31 Message enter 1 In Program 0401 Item 31 enter 0 In 1804 Item 1 enter 0 In 1804 Item 1 enter 4 automated attendant need VAU for DUD DISA automated attendant message Talkie message by VAU In 0405 Item 10 enter the Intercom calling set inter digit time Go to Programming flowchart on the following page 52 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Does the all VAU Yes In 2201 enter 2 all VAU message clear mi Message clear No After the system answers does the system allow the automated attendant and error message for an adequate duration In 2202 Item 1 change the message length Yes When the system answer does the system In 2205 assign the VAU allow the automated message number at the attendant message each night for each For DUD DISA caller by DUD DISA line VAU When the system answer does the system In 2209 assign the VAU allow the automated message number at the attendant error message each night for each For DUD DISA caller by DUD DISA line VAU No Go to Programming flowchart on the following page 53 Automated Atten
4. 3 Dial the Password 4 Dial the extension No which is set Dial Block 5 Dial 1 to accept Confirmation Tone shall be sent 6 Press SPK to hang up To release Dial Block from the other extension 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 701 3 Dial the Password 4 Dial the extension No which has been set Dial Block 5 Dial 0 to release Confirmation Tone shall be sent 6 Press SPK to hang up 151 Dial Block Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To set the Dial Block 1 Off hook 2 Dial 700 3 Dial personal password 4 digit 4 Dial 1 Confirmation tone is heard 5 On hook To release the Dial Block 1 Off hook 2 Dial 700 3 Dial personal password 4 digit 4 Dial 0 Confirmation tone is heard 5 On hook To set Dial Block from the other extension 1 Off hook 2 Dial 701 3 Dial the Password 4 Dial the extension No which is set Dial Block 5 Dial 1 to accept Confirmation Tone shall be sent 6 On hook To release Dial Block from the other extension 1 Off hook 2 Dial 701 3 Dial the Password 4 Dial the extension No which has been set Dial Block 5 Dial 0 to release Confirmation Tone shall be sent 6 On hook 152 DID Capability DDI Capability Description The system supports DID DDI feature that the outside party dials as same digits as loca
5. 265 Hold Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page If an extension puts a In 0911 for each Access Trunk line call on Hold Map select the access should they be able to options for each Trunk retrieve from Hold line 3 4 5 or 7 In 0912 assign extensions to Access Maps In 1006 do not assign a function key for Exclusive Hold code 1044 In 1006 assign a function key for Exclusive Hold code 1044 Does extension need one button Exclusive Hold access You may need to do this if you have reassigned Hold keys in 0402 Item 4 In 1006 do not assign a function Does extension need Yes ME ADO Sigma one button function key System Hold access function key for System Hold code 1043 key for System Hold coda 1043 Do you change the l Refer to Flexible Service Code for Yes i System Numbering Group Hold and Answer feature for Group Hold 266 Hold Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0402 System Options Part B Item 4 Hold key operating mode Set the function of the extension s HOLD key System 0 or Exclusive 1 Hold 0405 System Timers Item 2 Exclusive Hold Recall Time Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval 0405 System Timers Item 3 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time Set the H
6. An extension s Class of Service allows the placing of Intercom calls An extension s Class of service allows setting Intercom Talkback or Forced Intercom Ringing An extension s Class of Service allows setting Intercom Talkback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls One Digit Service Code for Switching of voice signal call is dial 1 The operator s extension is 200 port 1 Options None Programming gt 0405 System Timers Item 10 Intercom Interdigit Time Set the Intercom Interdigit Time 0 64800 seconds When placing Intercom calls users must dial each digit within this interval gt 0405 System Timers Item 28 Extension Dial Tone Sending Time Set the Intercom Interdigit Time 0 64800 seconds After getting Intercom dial tone a keyset user has this interval to dial the first digit of the Intercom call gt 0406 COS Options Item 61 Intrusion Tone In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to place Intercom calls gt 0406 COS Options Item 68 Setting of signal voice called In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or an extension s ability to set Handsfree Answerback Service Code 821 and Forced Intercom Ringing Service Code 823 293 Intercom Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 72 Switching of signal voice call In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an exten
7. Busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy 1 e Override prevented OR Busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy i e Override allowed Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy No headset keys defined Service Code of Head set mode switching is dial 834 Service Code of Common canceling service code is dial 720 Options Headset Agreed headset type is Profile 1861 00 1862 00 and 1863 00 made by GN Netcom Connecting cable code number is 8800 01 01 and 8800 00 01 258 Headset Operation Cont d Programming Cont d Should headset extension be Both One In 0401 Item 22 aPPearances busy when one appearance appearance In 0401 Item 22 enter 1 is busy or when both enter 0 appearances are busy In 1006 assign function key for Headset Operation code 1028 Do you change the i Refer to Flexible Service Code For Head set System Numbering mode switching and Common feature Canceling Service Code Pied VMs E 3a eb Ne J 259 Headset Operation Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 22 Headset mode judge of busy service setting Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers The Headset extension is busy to inc
8. Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code Press SPK to hang up When you cancel of alarm clock by dial 720 these features are cancelled at same time DND Call Forward Repeat Dial Message Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message 473 Time and Date Description The system uses Time and Date for Central Office Calls Access Maps Ring Groups Class of Service Class Station Message Detail Recording Direct Inward Lines System Reports Display Telephones System Reports FAX Machine Compatibility Toll Restriction Class Night Service Automatic Trunk Line Group Routing Programmable Trunk Line Parameters Conditions This feature available for key telephone with display The system returns the Time and Date after a power failure or system reset Default Setting In anew system Time and Date is initially 00 00 00 00 00 00 The default Time and Date display mode is Month Day of Month Day of Week Hours Minutes AM PM i e 3 10 TUE 3 15 PM User Time and Date password is 0000 An extension s Class of Service allows it to set the Time and Date Service Code for time and date setting is dial 828 Options None Programming gt 0003 Time and Date Set the system Time and Date from your administrator s telephone gt 0103 Time and Date Display Made Select the display mode type 1 8 for Time and Date 1 e Time and Date format gt 0202 Setting the User Passwords Set the password u
9. This feature only available for key telephone To answer a call if you are another extension s Hot Line Call destination 1 Off hook 276 Incoming Queue Message VAU Description 1 For an unanswered normal incoming call VAU will send a Message if no telephone answers within the pre programmed time It is also possible that the Message can be sent manually by VAU for an unanswered normal incoming call 2 For a DDI incoming call which has been in waiting state because of ALL BUSY in station group address VAU will send a message if there is no idle telephone occurred within the pre programmed time It is possible to switch the Incoming Queue Message VAU from the Ist message to the 2nd messages 2 types of messages A message used for Incoming Queue Message VAU is recorded to VAU message 1 16 Recording playback and elimination of a message is done by using Service code 716 Command 0514 Item_6 A sending interval of the VAU message follows a time setting of Command 0414 Timer_4 If the Fixed Message is prohibited by the Command 0401 Item_31 VAU does not send the Fixed Message If the pre programmed time Command 2213 2214 2nd message sending time has passed after sending 2nd message the Queue Message process will finish and the external line will be cut Conditions Incoming Queue Message VAU will be sent in the following cases Case 1 When Normal trunk line Command 0901 Item_14 17
10. Default Setting Meet Me Paging Time is 90 seconds An extension s Class of Service Permits initiating Meet Me Paging No Paging keys assigned Options DX2E 4PGDU S1 When you use External Paging Programming Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page Note For additional programming information on Paging refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features gt 0406 COS Options Item 14 Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate a Meet Me Paging Transfer gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for External Zone Paging code 1004 External all Call Paging code 1005 and Internal Paging Zone Answer code 1006 336 Meet Me Paging Transfer Cont d Programming Cont d Refer to the External Paging feature Do you want to have Yes Meet Me Internal bees a Paging Transfer T ging Refer to the Internal Paging feature Do you want to have Yes Meet Me Internal E Eaa Paging Transfer T ging Be sure Meet Me Paging Time Program 0405 Item 11 allows adequate time for the transfers to complete In COS enable disable Meet Me Conference and Paging Program 0406 Item 14 Assign COS in Program 1005 In Program 1006 assign function keys for Paging Ext
11. For Rest Mode switching in 1006 assign a function key code 1042 plus password The system requires the password for function keys 1039 1042 and Service code 818 Night Service Manual Auto Cont d Options None Programming Cont d gt 0202 Setting the User Password Item 2 Switching of Night Mode Set the password an extension user must dial before activating Night Service four digits 0401 System Options Part A Item 1 Manual Night Service Enable Allow 1 or prevent 0 from activating Night Service 0401 System Options Part A Item 2 Automatic Night service Enable Enable 1 or disable 0 Automatic Night Mode switching 0406 COS Options Item 2 Manual Night Service Switching In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an ability to manually switch the Night Mode Service Code 818 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 5 Night mode switching Assign a service code for night mode switching 0801 Automatic Night Service Patterns Configure the Automatic Night Service patterns 0802 Weekly Night Service Switching Assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns programmed in 0801 to each day of the week 0803 Holding Night Service Switching Assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns to holidays 0909 Extension Ring Group Assignment To have Trunk lines ring extension during the different Night Service modes for ANA assig
12. Intercom Cont d Related Features Line Preference Ringing Line Preference can automatically answer ringing Intercom or Trunk Line calls when the user lifts the handset Name Storing Trunk amp Station An extension can have a name assigned that identifies the extension to callers Operator Calling Operator access can be dial normal operator s extension number or operator calling number Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place an Intercom call 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial extension number Your call may voice announce or ring the called extension To force your Intercom call to ring dial 1 or dial 812 after the extension number If the extension you call is busy or doesn t answer you can dial another extension without hanging up To answer an Intercom call 1 If you hear two beeps speak toward phone Your telephone picks up your voice OR If your telephone rings lift handset To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 821 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Press SPK to hang up This disable Forced Intercom Ringing 297 Intercom Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 823 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Press SPK to hang up This disables Handsfree Answerback To check your extension s data 1 Press CHE
13. 4 Dial number To answer an incoming Trunk Line group call 1 Off hook 505 Trunk Outgoing Call Description The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls This lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individual s needs A user can place a call by Pressing a line key Dialing a Specified Trunk Line Access Service Code Pressing a Trunk Group Access key Dialing a Trunk Line Group Access Service Code Pressing an Outgoing Line Access key Dialing a Trunk Line Group Routing Code Dialing an Individual Trunk Line Group Routing Code Off hook automatic Trunk Line Group Routing access Individual Trunk Line Group Routing sets different outbound call routing options for each extension user that dial Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code for Trunk Line calls Individual Trunk Line Group Routing routes calls in the order specified by system programming If a user dials Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code and all calls in the first group are busy the system may route the calls to another group When you re setting up your system Individual Trunk Line Group Routing will help you minimize the expense of toll calls For example if your system has normal Trunk lines behind PBX lines DISA lines use Individual Trunk Line Group Routing to route calls to the behind PBX lines first Route 1 Behind PBX Normal DISA lines Trunk lines
14. Dialing PREVIEV Sever NAMBER Number Dialing key to preview your stored aigis number Saved Last Number CHECK LINE KEY nn You press CHECK and the Saved Last Number Dialing SAVE NUMBER REDIAL Dialing key while on hook ee ae Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 13 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Text Messaging TEXT MESSAGE You dialed Service Code 836 to choose a Text DIAL MESSAGE No Message Selectable Ring SET INCOM RING You dial Service Code 820 to set Selectable Tone TINT 2 EXT Ring Tones Selectable Ring at i eas RING You dial Service Code 820 plus 1 to Set Tone Intercom Selectable Ring Tones Selectable Ring a N ont RING You dial Service Code 820 plus 2 to Set trunk Tone Selectable Ring Tones Selectable Ring nee i INCOM RING You set the incoming ring type where type is Tone n SET INT or EXT and nis the range H M or L Selectable Ring CONFIRM INCOM RIN G You dial Service Code 811 to listen to your Tone TINT 2 EXT Selectable Ring Tone Settings Selectable Ring CONFIRM INT INCOM You dial Service Code 811 plus 1 to listen to Tone 1 H 2 M 3 L the Intercom ring settings Selectable Ring CONFIRM EXT INCOM You dial Service Code 811 plus 2 to listen to Tone 1 H 2 M 3 L TN1 4 the trunk ring settings Serial Call You press the Serial Call key to set up a Serial trk name Call where trk name is the trunk transferred WAIT TRF ext name l NE and
15. Do you change the Refer to Flexible Service Code for i System Numbering Camp On Callback feature 98 Camp On Cont d Programming for Callback Trunk Cont d In 0406 Item 25 enter 0 In 1006 do not assign a function key for Camp On code 1020 Should extension be allowed to use Camp On Callback Trunk Service Code 850 In 0406 Item 25 enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 0401 Item 14 No Should users be able to Yes 0401 Item 14 enter 0 just lift the handset to anter d f a answer the Callback ring _ i In 0405 Item 6 set how long Callback rings an extension Should extension have In 1006 assign one button Camp On a function key Callback Trunk for Camp On operation code 1020 When Callback Trunk an extension callback does it ring for an adequate time In 0405 Item 26 change Callback Trunk Callback Time Does the system wait an adequate time before canceling Callbacks Camp On that cannot go through In 0405 Item 29 change the Callback Trunk Cancel Time Yes 99 Camp On Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 14 Call Back automatic answer Enable 1 or disable 0 callback Automatic Answer 0405 System Timers Item 6 callback ring duration timer Set the duration of the callback ring 0 64800 seconds 0405 System Timers Item 26 Camp o
16. Options DX2E CDHF A Related Features Call Waiting Camp On and Callback An extension user cannot Camp On to a busy extension or leave a Callback if Override has already gone through Handsfree Speaker amp Microphone You cannot send override to an extension busy on a Handsfree Speakerphone call The called extension s idle CL key flashes fast with no ringing 536 Voice Over Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place Voice Over to an extension busy on a handset call 2 Call to busy keyphone You hear busy tone 2 Dial 809 OR Press Override key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1018 OR Dial one digit service code for override You hear ring back tone To change your call to signal dial 1 To set Off hook Signaling mode at your extension with CDHF A 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 893 to set To set Voice Over mode at your extension with CDHF A 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 892 to set lt Single Line Telephone gt To place Voice Over to an extension busy on a handset call 1 Call to busy keyphone You hear busy tone 2 Dial 809 OR Dial one digit service code for override J You hear ring back tone Dial 1 to change the mode to signal To set Off hook Signaling mode at your extension To set Voice Over mode at your extension These features are only available for key telephone 537 Volume Control Description The volume buttons A W are prov
17. 0 receives an external incoming call Case 2 When DDI trunk line Command 0901 Item_14 17 3 receives a DDI call which be transferred to a Incoming Ring Group by Command 1809 1814 1815 Incoming Queue Message VAU will be sent automatically by Programmed Command 2213 Also the Incoming Queue Message VAU will be sent by pressing a flashing line key i e receiving an incoming call after pressing the Incoming Queue Message VAU key code 1082 Incoming Queue Message VAU key is effective for the pre programmed time Command 0405 Timer_15 after pressing the key If the pre programmed time Command 0405 Timer_43 has passed after sending Incoming Queue Message VAU the Queue Message process will finish and the external line will be cut If the pre programmed time Command 0405 Timer_62 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 0919 277 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Conditions Cont d Case 3 When DDI trunk line Command 0901 Item_14 17 3 receives a station group DDI call in All busy Incoming Queue Message VAU will be automatically sent by the Command 2214 If there will be one idle station in the accessed Station Group during the Incoming Queue Message VAU process the Queue Message process will finish If the pre programmed time Command 0414 Timer_9 has passed after received an incoming cal
18. 1 Off hook 2 Dial 715 and specified extension number To operate the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message 1 Off hook 2 Dial 713 3 Hear To re record dial 7 to listen dial 5 to erase dial 3 4 a Dial 3 erase 5 a Press SPK to hang Finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c 352 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message Cont d 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 b 4 c 6 c 7T c 8 c 9 c 10 c 11 c Dial 5 listen Listen the recorded Personal Message for caller Listen the recorded Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c Dial 7 re record Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for caller Dial 801 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b 353 Memo Dial Description While on an outside call Memo Dial lets an extension user store an important number for easy redialing later on The telephone can be like a notepad For example a user could dial Directory Assistance and ask for
19. 2 Dial 711 3 Listen General Message 4 On hook To operate the General Message 1 Off hook 2 Dial 712 3 a Dial 3 erase 4 a On hook Finish OR Dial 5 cancel and listen go to 4 b OR Dial 7 cancel and re record go to 4 c 3 b Dial 5 listen 4 b Listen General Message 5 b On hook Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 242 General Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To operate the General Message Cont d 3 c Dial 7 re record 4 c Hear Please start recording lt beep gt OR Hear three times of beep tone 5 c On hook Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b 243 Group Hunt Description With Group Hunt an extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department group by dialing the group s pilot number The call would ring the first available extension in the group For example this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department s pilot number The caller would not have to know any of the Sales department s extension numbers There are two types of routing available with Group Hunt Priority Routing and Circular Routing With Priority Routing an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first Lower priority extensions ring only if all high priority extensions are busy With Circula
20. 529 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Cont d Operation lt Note gt Hereafter the functions described are only available by using of slot type voice mail Basic functionality are referred to HOW TO USE VOICE MAIL BOX Concise User Guide To set cancel the Recording Restriction lt Key Telephone amp Single Line Telephone gt 1 Access to the Voice Mail Service 2 Dial 66 to set cancel 3 Hang up lt Large Display Key Telephone gt VOICE SRV 1 Access to the Voice Mail Service EXT 200 Press Mail Box and dial Password REPLAY MSG REC 2 Press SET key MEMO REC ATTEN MSG INCOM INF SET VOICE SRV 3 Press RESTRICT key EXT 200 RESTRICT REPLAY VOICE SRV 4 Press SET or CANCEL key EXT 200 Confirmation Message shall be displayed SET CANCEL 530 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Cont d Operation Cont d To set displaying order VOICE SRV REPLAY ATTEN MSG INCOM INF SET VOICE SRV RESTRICT REPLAY VOICE SRV PLAY MODE FIRST MESSAGE LAST MSG EXT 200 MSG REC MEMO REC EXT 200 FIRST MSG SKIP TIME 1 Access to the Voice Mail Service Press Mail Box and dial Password 2 Press SET key 3 Press REPLAY key 4 Press FIRST MSG or LAST MSG key Confirmation Message shall be displayed 531 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Cont d Operation Cont
21. Placing a call using Trunk Line Group Trunk Outgoing Call 1011 Routing 700 Change toll restriction class of Dial Block extension by Dial Block 701 Set Dial Block by Supervisor Dial Block by Supervisor 711 Listen General Message VAU General Message Play Back 712 Record and Erase General Message General Message VAU Erase and Record Set Call Forward with personal greeting Call Forward with VAU Personal Greeting Leave telephone number from Leave Telephone DUD DISA caller VAU Number from DUD DISA 715 Pick up extension s ring Direct Extension Pickup 716 Control VAU Message VAU Operation for VAU Message 717 Access voice mail NVM series Voice Mail Access 720 Canceling of several features 721 Output accumulated data per extension Printout Accumulated base SMDR Extension Data 722 Output accumulated data per station Printout Accumulated group base SMDR STG Data 713 ree 714 723 Output accumulated data per account Printout Accumulated code base SMDR Account Code Data 724 Forced disconnecting of busy trunk Forced Trunk Disconnect 725 Answer machine emulation NVM Answer Machine series Emulation 726 Set Message Waiting 2 Set MW2 743 Check the number left VAU Check Leave Number Note 1 Alarm Clock Call Forward DND Headset Operation Message Waiting Automatic Repeat Dialing and Text Message Introduction Cont d T
22. Programming Cont d Refer to the Programming Flowchart an the Following Page gt 0104 DP to DTMF Conversion Options Set the DP to DTMF conversion timing auto 0 or auto and manual 1 or manual 2 par each Trunk 0405 System Timers Item 30 Inter digits timer Set the inter digit timer 0 64800 seconds 0406 COS Options Item 57 DTMF signal sending while talking on extension In an extension s Class of Service enables 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Continued Dialing for Intercom calls to SLT 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 3 Dial Number Length Limit for Local Call Assign Program 0702 Item 3 entries to each Toll Restriction class 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 4 Maximum Dial Number Length Limit Assign Program 0702 Item 4 entries to each Toll Restriction class 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 3 Dial Number Length Limit for Local Call If enabled in 0701 Item 3 user cannot dial a local call longer than this number of digits 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 4 Maximum Dial Number Length Limit If enabled in 0701 Item 4 user cannot dial a long distance call longer than this number of digits 1001 Basic Extension Port Setup Part A lt Single Line Telephone gt Item 5 Terminal type Set the SLT ports for Continued Dialing possible to receive 1004 Toll Restriction Class Assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 8 to an extension 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assi
23. System Timers Part A Item 79 DUD DISA answer delay timer Setup the interval time from the system receive the DUD DISA incoming Call until the system automatically answer 0405 System Timers Part A Item 80 DUD DISA Group Hunt no answer time Setup the calling time for department groups pilot number 0414 System Timers part B Item 3 DUD DISA busy tome timer Setup the busy tone sending time when outside caller dial the busy extension 0414 System Timers part B Item 7 Delayed DUD answer timer Assign the delay time from normal incoming status to DUD mode If this time is set to 0 sec this call will switch to DUD mode immediately 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 14 17 Service Type For DISA operation set the Trunk Line service type to 02 You can have a different service type for each Night Service mode Type 6 defines the Delayed DUD on trunk line for Day Night Mid Night Rest mode 0921 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part B Item 2 DUD DISA transfer alarm When DUD DISA call is transferred to ring group according to the setting at Command 1802 and 1803 alarm signal shall be generated if the data is set to 1 1802 DUD DISA Operation Made Setup Set the operating mode of each DUD Trunk line This sets what happens to the call when the DUD caller calls a busy or unanswered extension The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination 1 Set the al
24. 1101 DSS Console Extension Assignment Designate the DSS Console installations i e the extensions that have DSS Consoles connected to them 1103 DSS Console Key Assignment Assign an Extension number to each DSS key 1104 DSS Console Alternate Answering If the console should have Alternate Answering use this program to assign the Alternate Answering Destination 1106 DLS Console Key Assignments Assign trunk line to each DSS keys Related Features Doorphone The DSS Console provides one touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Doorphones Refer to the Doorphone Box Feature when programming Doorphones Trunk Line Calls Answering and Outgoing A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls Night Service The DSS Console provides one touch Night Service switching Refer to the Night Service feature when programming Night Service options One Touch Calling Like a One Touch Key a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station Selection Trunk Line Calling and Service code access Paging External and Internal The DSS Console provides one touch External and Infernal Page zone access Refer the External Paging and Internal Paging features when programming Paging 204 DSS Console Cont d Operation Calling an extension from your DSS Console 1 Press EXT 1 to select DSS appearance in case of two DSS Consoles are connected then use Ist Console for extension access 2
25. Assign routes to extensions in 0907 In Program 1008 Item 2 enter 1 For additional interaction between Program 1008 Item 2 and 3 see the chart below In Program 0911 set up the Trunk line access map In Program 0912 assign Trunk line access maps to extensions Refer to Flexible System Numbering Do you change the Service Code for Answer of non ringing line feature 318 Line Preference Cont d Programming Cont d Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines Is the Trunk line In Programs 0909 and 0910 you want to be set Trunk line to not non ringing currently ring extension Refer to ringing the Ring Group feature In Programs 0911 and 0912 make sure extension has incoming access to non ringing Trunk In odra ee Is Trunk Line Group trunks to groups Refer to F 9 the Trunk Group feature ROUEN Rrcgrammed Yes Does extension have access to non ringing Trunk line In Program 0906 program Choose from the routes you the Trunk Line Group In Program 1015 select programmed in Trunk Line Routing table Refer to the routing sequence for Group Routing Program 0906 the Trunk Line Group auto answer of non ringing Make one entry for each lines Night Service mode Routing feature 319 Line Preference Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 94 Answer of non ringing lines Assign a service code of answer of non ringi
26. Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message Cont d 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 b 4 c 5 c 6 c 7T c 8 c 9 c 10 c 11 c Dial 5 listen Listen the recorded Personal Message for caller Listen the recorded Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c Dial 7 re record Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for caller Dial 803 Dial the Internal Paging Group code 1 8 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b 351 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message Off hook Dial 713 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for caller Dial 801 Dial the Internal Paging Group code 1 8 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for paging On hook Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a of To operate OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b of To operate OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c of To operate CON DMHAARWN HE To answer Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message
27. Dial 1 to setup 4 Dial 813 for Common Abbreviated dial access instead of extension No entering 5 Dial target abbreviated No Confirmation Tone will be heard 6 Hang up to finish To cancel External Call Forward 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 848 for Call Forward 3 Dial 0 to cancel Confirmation Tone will be heard 4 Hang up to finish 222 External Music On Hold Description A customer provided music source i e tape CD player radio can be connected to the system through 32CPRU for Music On Hold MOH purpose instead of internal synthesized melody Or 3ACI module provides the connectivity of the above music sources as well For the details of switch setting or the connections refer to Hardware manual Condition The feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting All Trunk Lines use the internal Music on Hold source ACI port type is no setting Options Music Device or DX2E 3ACI A Programming Should MOH use In 0914 assign ACI external or ACI for software port 1 6 to source selected Trunk line External on CRPU In 0914 enter option In 1301 set ACI 255 for selected software port assigned Check short pin setting Trunk line above to input 1 on 32CPRU unit In 0302 Item 1 No need to change 0302 enter 1 or 2 for entering an ACI software not No tone port in 0914 overrides it 223 External Music On Ho
28. Item 9 Privacy Release timer Set the join permission time of the Privacy Release 0406 COS Options Item 17 Privacy Release In an extension s Class of Service enables 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate a Privacy Release 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to extension 1006 Programming Function keys Assign a function key for Privacy Release code 1017 Related Features Conference Set up multiple party telephone meeting without leaving the office Operation To set up a Privacy Release with a co worker in your immediate work area 1 Place or answer Trunk Line call 2 Press Meet Me Conference key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1017 3 Announce Conference Just tell your co worker about the call Do not use telephone system features to announce it To join a Meet Me Conference if invited 1 After Conference request press indicated line key To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties 1 Press HOLD 434 Private Line Description A Private Line is a Trunk Line reserved for an extension for placing and answering calls A user with a Private Line always knows when important calls are for them Additionally the user has their own Trunk Line for placing calls that is not available to others in the system Incoming only The extension has a Private Line only for incoming calls The user cannot place calls on the P
29. Item 97 enter 1 No Do you change the Service Code for Yes Refer to Flexible General Message System numbering feature operation and using 240 General Message VAU Cont d Related Features Dial Number Preview When you use VAU Adaptor you can use Dial Number Preview feature after dial Operation lt Key Telephone gt To listen the General Message 1 Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key 2 Dial 4 OR 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 711 3 Listen General Message 4 Press SPK to hang up OR Press idle CL key Dial 712 Dial 5 Listen General Message A a ce Press SPK to hang up To operate the General Message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 712 3 a Dial 3 erase 4 a Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 5 cancel and listen go to 4 b OR Dial 7 cancel and re record go to 4 c 3 b Dial 5 listen 4 b listen General Message 5 b Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 241 General Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To operate the General Message Cont d 3 c Dial 7 re record 4 c Hear Please start recording lt beep gt OR Hear three times of beep tone 5 c Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b lt Single Line Telephone gt To listen the General Message 1 Off hook
30. Service to extensions In 0901 Item 18 enter 0 No Are outgoing calls allowed Yes In 0901 Item 18 enter 1 to allow outgoing calls on specific Trunk lines Ta to allow outgoing calls In 0501 Select 1 and 2 digits you want to assign and Then enter to digits and type 6 Trunk line access In 0510 select tenant you want to assign and then enter to Trunk line group routing code Build an outgoing restriction matrix Do you need to restrict certain extensions from placing calls on certain trunks In 0911 for each Access Map select the access options for each trunk In 0912 assign extensions to Access Maps Do you want system 0901 Item 11 enter to detect dial tone for 1 to enable dial manually dialed calls tone detection on Trunk line In the default program extensions have full access to all trunks In 0901 Item 11 enter 0 to disable dial tone detection Continued on next page 508 Trunk Outgoing Call Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page If a user preselects a line does it remember the system that preselected it for an adequate time No In 0405 Item 15 enter the preselection interval Yes In 1006 do not assign No Should extension users have yes In 1006 assign functions function keys as line keys one button placing of keys as line keys codes 0001 0052 5 outside calls Z codes 0001
31. Speech mode it is programmable either to send the intrusion tone or not CAUTION Unauthorized intrusion on calls using this feature may be interpretted as an invasion of privacy Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting Intrusion warning tone is provided Break In Speech Mode enabled Break In Monitor Mode disabled Class of Service allows extensions to initiate and receive Break In Service Code of Break In is dial 810 Options None 68 Break In Cont d Programming In Program No Sh Y In Program ould an extension be es 0406 Item 65 allowed to initiate Break In 0406 Item 65 enter 0 enter 1 In Program No Sh Yes In Program ould an extension be 0406 Item 66 allowed to receive Break In 0406 Item 66 enter 0 enter 1 In Program Speech Monitor In Program p Should Break In use Speech 0406 Item 44 0406 Item 44 Mode or Monitor Mode enter 0 enter 1 In Program 0401 Item 5 enter 1 In Program 0401 Item 5 enter 0 Should extension being Brea In on hear warning tones In Program 1005 Assign a Class of Service to an extension In Program 1006 Should extension have one Yes assign a function key button access to Break In as a Break In key code 1019 Refer to Flexible System Numbering Do you change the Service Code for Break In setting and cancel f
32. Tone XXXNN individually or concatenated with pauses Receive Dial and dial tone detection between status Tone updates XXXNN 9 Remote Log ROTTT Play welcome greeting and connect user to On prompting routine for unknown user Internal call to voice mail system from extension XXX dialling master extension number of voice mail system User has not indicated intent to enter a voice mail box and must be queried as to which voice mail box he wishes to enter External call with user keying XXX or internal call to voice mail system from extension XXX by dialling a pre programmed voice mail key hereafter called MESSAGE key User desires to enter voice mail box for extension XXX User is transferring a trunk call to voice mail system to leave a message for voice mail box of extension YYY May be activated in DX2E by key sequence Transfer Message YYY User has placed a call from extension XXX to extension YYY which is busy or does not answer and wishes to leave a message in the mail box of extension YYY Extension or trunk UUU called extension ZZZ and was forwarded by the DX2E to the voice mail box of extension ZZZ Extension or trunk UUU called extension ZZZ which is busy and was forwarded by the DX2E to the voice mail box of extension ZZZ Extension or trunk UUU called extension ZZZ which does not answer and was forwarded by the DX2E to the voice mail box of extension ZZZ Voice Mail System is updatin
33. display When a user answers an Intercom call should their display show the calling extension s name and TALKING TO answer display When a user receives an Intercom call should their display show the callers name and CALL FROM pre answer display When a user receives a transferred call should their display show the TRANSFER lt lt transfer pre answer display When a user employs Call Pickup to intercept a call should their display show the CALL P U display In Program 1005 assign a class of Service to an extension 43 In Program 0406 Item 37 enter 1 In Program 0406 Item 38 enter 1 In Program 0406 Item 39 enter 1 In Program 0406 Item 40 enter 1 In Program 0406 Item 42 enter 1 In Program 0406 Item 51 enter 1 Alphanumeric Display Cont d Programming Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page gt 0406 COS Options Item 34 Non Hold transfer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 for the Non Hold Transfer Caution If Busy Status Displaying for Trunk feature is to be used then this item should be set to 0 gt 0406 COS Options Item 37 Trunk No and Name Display Seizing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying of a Trunk s name number when the user seizes the Trunk gt 0406 COS Options Item 38 Trunk No and Name Display Incoming In an extension s C
34. ext name is destination extension Transfer A transferred trunk is ringing your phone where trk name trk name is the trunk s name and ext name is TRANSFER lt extname the name of the extension that transferred the call Transfer A trunk you transferred is recalling your phone trk name where trk name is the recalling trunk and ext TRF RECALL ext name name is extension from which the call is recalling 24 Introduction Cont d Table 1 5 System Ring Rates SECONDS 0 1 2 3 Ringback ICM Ring voice Cae aa Callbacks gt ee rnn mm Sensor Alami LJ LP LOLOL LE LS Sensor Alarm 2 Sensor Alarm 3 Sensor Alarm 4 Cal4 7 25 Introduction Cont d Table 1 6 System Flash Rates 0 1 t Slow Flash e a ee Exclusive _ LI U Hold Hold i _ E Flutter LU UU UA SECONDS 26 t i a 1 300 IPM 60 IPM 120 IPM 120 IPM 180 IPM Abbreviated Dialing Description Abbreviated Dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers This saves time for example when calling a client with whom they dial often Instead of dialing a long telephone number the extension user just dials the Abbreviated Dialing code The system has 560 Abbreviated Dialing bins that you can allocate for Common 400 and Group 160 lt 20 x 8 groups gt Abbrevia
35. features they use most often Instead of dialing a series of codes the user needs only press the One Touch Key An extension user can have One Touch Keys programmed for Direct Station Selection one button access to extensions Trunk Line Calling one button access to Trunk Lines or Trunk Line groups Abbreviated Dialing one button access to stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers Service Code one button access to specific Service Code An extension user can chain dial with One Touch Keys For example a user can store their bank s automated number in one key and their security code in another After the bank answers the user just presses the second key to enter their security code The digits output exactly as entered i e Service Code 818 outputs as digits 818 One Touch Dialing is the first level of operation of One Touch Keys In other words One Touch Dialing occurs when the user just presses the key There is a second level of One Touch Key operation called One Touch Serial Calling The user access these functions by first pressing the Serial Operation key Refer to the One Touch Serial Operation feature Conditions This feature available for key telephone except DSLT One Touch Keys do not provide a Busy Lamp Field BLF Default Setting One Touch Keys have no assigned functions Service Code of one touch dial number saving is dial 855 377 One Touch Dialing Cont d Options N
36. for each trunk enter 0 to include information for include trunk on SMDR 1 to all trunks or just exclude trunk from SMDR selected trunks In Program 0901 Item 13 for all trunks enter 0 In Program 1008 Item 1 Selected for each extension enter 1 to include extension on SMDR 0 to exclude extension from SMDR Should SMDR record include information for all extensions or just selected extensions In Program 1008 Item 1 for all extensions enter 1 Go to Programming Flowchart on the next page 465 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page In Program 0404 Item 3 assign the SMDR To check a keyset s DCI port DCI port number press CHECK then DND In Program 0404 Item 4 enter minimum duration Should calls of any Yes of call that will print duration print on on the SMDR report the SMDR report 1 65535 seconds In Program 0404 Item 4 enter 0 In Program 0404 Item 5 enter how long an Should all unanswered unanswered call must i e NO ANSWER ring 1 65535 seconds calls print on the before SMDR logs it as SMDR report NO ANSWER In Program 0404 Item 5 enter 0 To have only long distance calls print for example enter 8 In Program 0404 Item 2 enter the minimum number _of digits a user must SMDR report regardless dial 1 24 before system of the number of will include
37. gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 3 Call forward with personal Message VAU Assign a service code of call forward with personal message gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 5 direct extension call pickup Assign a service code of direct extension call pickup gt 2201 VAU Reset Erase the VAU personal message and VAU message gt 2202 Message length Assignment for VAU Assign the maximum message length for VAU message and Personal message gt 2204 Transfer ring group Setup when VAU No Answer Assign a transfer ring group number when all VAU path are busy for DUD DISA caller 344 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Meet Me External Paging Transfer lt Key Telephone gt To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message Press idle CL key Dial 713 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for caller Dial 803 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for All Call Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a of To operate OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b of To operate OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c of To operate Oe O CR ee a a 345 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To answer Meet Me Paging T
38. just calls placed over PBX Trunk Lines The SMDR record can include all PBX calls including calls to PBX extensions or just calls that include the PBX Trunk Line access code Usage Summaries SMDR can automatically print daily weekly and monthly call activity summaries Each summary includes the total number of regular Trunk Line calls and ISDN Trunk Line calls and the costs for each type The daily report prints every day at midnight The weekly report prints every Sunday night at midnight The monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month ALB Output Control The system provides additional option on SMDR whether ALB All Line Busy information is output or not Conversion Table Name Output Control In case that the system receives MSN DDI call on ISDN the Conversion Table Name Command 1806 can be output to the LINE area on SMDR Date Information Output Control The system provides additional option on SMDR whether Date information Day Month is output or not Conditions A The SMDR report does not include voice Intercom calls B SMDR requires the installation of a DCI Data Communications Interface Once you designate a DCI for SMDR you cannot use that extension for placing and answering other data calls C The SMDR call buffer stores 300 calls The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable When the buffer fills each new call in causes an o
39. lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To operate the Call forward with personal message Cont d 4 c Dial 7 re record 5 c Hear Please start recording lt beep gt 6 c Recording Personal Message 7 c Dials destination extension number 8 c Dial Call Forward condition 1 Busy 2 No answer 3 Busy No answer 4 Always 9 c Dial forwarding type 1 All incoming calls 2 Trunk incoming calls only 3 Extension incoming calls only 10 c On hook Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b 86 Call Pickup Description Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in a Pickup Group This permits co workers in the same work area to easily answer each other s calls The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed Call Pickup key With Call Pickup a user can intercept the following types of calls Feature SVC ICM NORMAL TRK Description CODE DIAL CFWD TRK CFWD TRFR RING Call eee Call Pickup for another group SVC CODE Service Code ICM CFWD Intercom Call Forward TRK RING Trunk Ring TRK CFWD Trunk Call Forward TRER Transfer GR Group Number EX Extension Number Conditions This feature available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone 87 Call Pickup Cont d Default Setting An extension s Class of Service permits using Service Codes 715 867 868 869 and 856 A
40. on privacy at their extension Call pink up On off Call Pickup for calls ringing an Call Pickup 1 on extension s own Pickup Group Service Code 867 Call pick up for On off Call Pickup for calls ringing Call Pickup another group outside a group Service Code 869 10 Call pick up for On off Call Pickup for ringing a specified Call Pickup specified group group Service Code 868 11 Ring inward transfer On off an extension s ability to use Ring Transfer inward transfer Note on gt Enable off Disable 106 Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 2 of 8 This option Is used with Default 12 Do not disturb On off an extension s ability to use Do Do Not Disturb Not Disturb Intercom On off an extension s Intercom Intercom abandoned call Abandoned Call Display Abandoned Call display Display Meet me answer On off an extension s ability to use Meet Conference Meet Me Answer Me Paging Conference Message waiting On off an extension s ability to leave Message Waiting Message Waiting 16 Conference On off an extension s ability to initiatea Conference Meet Conference or Meet Me Paging Me Paging Conference Conference Privacy Release On off an extension s ability to initiate a Privacy Release Privacy Release Common group On off an extension s ability to store abbreviated abbreviated dial Abbreviated Dialing numbers Dialing registration 19 Common O
41. or prevent 0 an extension from turning Background Music on and off gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 52 BGM Assign service code of BGM gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension BGM Background Music Cont d Programming Cont d Is your system In 0108 Tone18 dX Z24 change Time Slot No from 29 to 28 In Program Should extension be allowed In Program 0406 Item 53 to turn Background Music 0406 Item 53 enter 0 on and off enter 1 In Program 1005 assign a Class of Service to an extension Do you change the Yes Refer to Flexible Service Code for l System Numbering Background Music feature setting and cancel ET ARRES 3 BGM Background Music Cont d Related Features Music on Hold The system can broadcast music to callers on Hold Operation To turn Background Music on or off 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 825 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Press SPK to hang up 67 Break In Description Break In permits an extension user to break into another extension user s call on the handset or speaker in case of handsfree verbally There are two Break In modes Monitor Mode and Speech Mode With Monitor Mode the caller Break In can listen to another user s conversation but cannot participate With Speech Mode the caller Break In can listen and join to the conversation established For the
42. set the report date format 0 American Do you change the Service Code for DCI Auto Answer Mode Setting Data Call Disconnect and DCI Initial Yes No 140 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Refer to the Station Message Detail Recording feature In 0007 enter the DCI software port number as the system report port number In 0008 enter the DCI software port number as the system report port number Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0007 System Report Print Out Port Setup If the device connected to the DCI will also be for system reports enter the DCI software port number as the system report port number 0008 System Alarm Report Setup If the device connected to the DCI will also be for alarm reports enter the DCI software port number as the alarm report port number 0130 Date Format for SMDR and System Reports Set the date format for SMDR 0 American 1 European or 2 Japanese 0406 COS Options Item 70 DCI auto answer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to set the DCI auto answer mode Service Code 883 0503 DCI Extension Number Assign an unused extension number e g 500 to the DCI port This allows other users to place data calls to the DCI 0507 DCI poolin
43. ta outgoing and Outgoing lines incoming lines lines Individual Trunk Line Group Routing can be given different Trunk Line Group Routing for each extension If your system gives different route of Trunk Line Group Routing for every extension each Trunk line will have similar toll Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone 506 Trunk Outgoing Call Cont d Default Setting Preselection interval is 5 seconds An extension s Class of Service enables Trunk line calls All Trunk lines allow outgoing calls Trunk 1 is named LINE 001 trunk 2 is named LINE 002 etc All extensions uses Access Map 1 all trunks have incoming access outgoing access and access when on Hold All function keys are line keys key 1 trunk 1 etc Off hook automatic Trunk Line Group Routing access is no setting Service Code of Specified Trunk Line Access is dial 805 Service Code of Trunk Line Group Access is dial 804 Trunk Line Group Routing code is Dial 9 Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code is no setting All extension has no route for the Individual Trunk line Group Routing Options None 507 Trunk Outgoing Call Cont d Programming Should system users be Yes In 0406 Item 62 enter able to place outgoing calls on Trunk lines In 0406 Item 62 enter 0 to enable outgoing calls 1 to enable outgoing calls In 1005 assign Class of
44. 1 from DUD callers cause ltem 1 Timeout Transfer or disconnect Item 2 RNA busy Item 3 Mistake in dialing No In 0901 Items 14 17 set the circuit type for DUD trunks type 1 or Delayed DUD trunk type 6 Type 1 In Program 0921 Item 2 enter 0 Disconnect To set DUD operation mode to disconnect in Set Transfer destination 1802 Items l 3 enter 0 Ring Group in 1803 Which DISA Talkie does DISA caller need better VAU Automatic Answering Telephone or ACI A A T In 1804 Item 1 enter 1 to allow using A A T In 1804 Item 1 enter 2 ACI to allow using ACI In 1804 Item 2 enter a DISA Talkie extension group for each Trunk line In 1804 Item 2 enter a DISA Talkie ACI group In 1804 Item 1 enter 4 for each Trunk line to allow using VAU In 1303 assign ACI Group for DISA Talkie In 1003 assign Extension Group for A A T In 2205 assign VAU message In 0405 Item 53 enter the In 0405 Item 55 enter A A T set no answer interval the Talkie ACI disconnect interval Continued In 0405 Item 54 enter on following the A A T set disconnect page interval 212 DUD Direct Universal Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page After the system answers does DUD caller have adequate time to dial their number Yes Check the settings of 0405
45. 10 seconds The DISA Dial Tone Time is seconds The DISA No Answer Time is 10 seconds The DISA Internal Paging Time is 30 seconds The DISA External Paging Time is 30 seconds DISA Trunk Line not programmed No DISA password set All DISA password have not Class of Service All DISA class disabled all features No assigned DISA Continued Code No assigned DISA Disconnect Code The DISA Trunk to Trunk Conversation duration is 30 seconds The DISA Trunk to Trunk Conversation Disconnect duration is 15 seconds DUD DISA Talkie no assigned Options DX2E 4DTDU S1 DX2E 3ACI A1 or DX2E 4ASTU S1 If you use DUD DISA Talkie DX2E VAU A If you use 1 digit Access on DUD DISA VAU with Talkie DX2E VAU B to be used to expand the talk path 173 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming In 0901 Items 14 17 set the circuit type for DISA trunks type 2 The system can have up to 15 users There is one DISA Class of Service and one password per user In 1801 set up the 6 digit DISA password and Class of Service for each user Assign data In program 2210 Should dialing mistakes To set DISA operation from DISA callers cause mode to Transfer in Transfer or disconnect 1802 Items 1 3 enter 1 Item 1 Timeout Item 2 RNA busy Item 3 Mistake in dialing Do you wish to set any extension or extension group to be called by one digit from outside
46. 2 3 2nd message only MSG1 0 or MSG1_ TIME 0 MSG2 1 17 MSG2_TIME 1 64800 gt MSG2 gt MSG2 MSG2 _ gt gt CMD_0414 ama itEMm4 ITEM4 MSG2_TIME DISC_TIME CMD_0405 DUD DISA ITEM35 DIL ITEM62 CMD_0414 DDI ITEM 9 291 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Appendix Cont d Notel If the preprogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_35 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 1802 and 1803 respectively Note2 If the preprogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_62 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 0919 Note3 If the preprogrammed time Command 0414 Timer_9 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 1809 1810 1814 and 1815 respectively 292 Intercom Description Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions This provides the system with complete internal calling capability Intercom calls can ring or be voice announced at the called extension Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting Intercom Interdigit Time 10 seconds Extension Dial Tone Time is 10 seconds
47. 3 is not necessary 3 Dial the Group Abbreviated Dialing code The stored number dials out To place an outgoing call by using specified ABB key for single operation This feature is only available for key telephone except OT TEL 1 Press a specified ABB key a eee Abbreviated Dialing Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To assign the Specified ABB key for single operation This feature is only available for key telephone except OT TEL 1 Press SPK key and dial 851 Press one of unused Programmable key Dial Function code 1037 or 1038 Dial the desired ABB No Press SPK key to finish Oe te Note If HOLD key is pressed instead of dialing ABB No at Step 4 then the key shall be defined as Common Group ABB access key To check your stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers This feature is only available for key telephone with display 1 Press CHECK 2 Press DC key 3 Dial the Abbreviated Dialing Code e g common code 001 If the entire stored number is too long for your phone s display press to see the rest of it 4 Press CLEAR To display additional numbers repeat from step 2 lt Single Line Telephone gt To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number 1 Off hook 2 Dial 813 3 Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code The stored number dials out To dial Group Abbreviated Dialing number 1 Off hook 2 Dial 814 3 Dial the Group Abbreviated Dialin
48. 325 Meet Me Paging Answer ccccceeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 328 Meet Me Paging Conference ccceceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 332 Table of Contents Cont d Features Page Meet Me Paging Transfer ccceeeeeesseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeaeees 336 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU 0000 341 Memo Diah ssnin uiian iiiaae ii 354 Message VV ENING sch on ea ae oe ened akeh ea ety ce utuaeed enue ct 357 Music On ONG as oss hee chee rSotesexrtet beaeedatesanedtd many ateenses oo ooepenctenan needs 363 Name Storing Trunk amp Station eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 366 Night Service Manual Auto ceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 370 One Touch Dialling ccccecceeeeeesssececeeeeeeeeeeeesesneeeeeeeeeeseeesssseeeaeeeeeees 377 One Touch Serial Operation cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneeeeeeeees 381 PONG Fever et ees ies es eae a he oe es aca beet 384 Ec ld Gn 6 ooo ee Te ee er ee rt 393 PBX Compatlbityie ce techie telat ect eebs easel tsetse bse tee 398 PO Attendant eee ae ee err ere er en er ret er ere 404 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Serie S ceeeeeeeeeeeees 406 PC Programming Remote Maintenance cccccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 419 Preamble Message VAU cccccceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
49. 411 for example put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Tables Restrict Code Table When you want Toll Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls use the Restrict Code Table If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables the system restricts that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table Calls entered in both tables are not restricted The system has four tables with 60 enters restricted codes in each table A restricted code is 12 digits maximum using 0 9 and FLSH as wild card Permit Code Table The Permit Code Table lets you set up Toll Restriction so that users can dial only selected permitted telephone numbers Use this table when you want to restrict most calls To allow all users to dial only area code 203 for example enter 1203 in the Permit Code Table 1 203 NNX nnnn are the only numbers users can dial If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables the system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table Calls entered in both tables are not restricted The system has four tables with 60 entries permitted codes in each table A permitted code is 12 digits maximum using 0 9 and FLSH as a wild card 477 Toll Restriction Cont d International Call Restriction International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial You can build a restr
50. 419 Preamble Message VAU Description Preamble Message assists operator to answer the Trunk line incoming When operator answers the Trunk line VAU automatically answers the incoming Trunk line with Preamble Message and then VAU transfers the answered Trunk line to operator For example Incoming Trunk line comes Operator answers the Trunk line by pressing the C O key Trunk line caller hears the Preamble Message from VAU This is NITSUKO Japan May I help you Operator starts to talk to Trunk line caller Conditions This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone Options DX2E VAU A Related Features None 420 Preamble Message VAU Programming In 0401 Item 31 enter 0 No Yes Does VAU send VAU fixed In 0401 Item 31 message English enter 0 Does the all VAU message Yes In 2201 enter 2 a Clear VAU message clear No Does the system allow the Preamble Message for an adequate duration No In 2201 Item 1 change the message length Yes When the operator answers to caller does the In 2207 assign the system allow the Preamble VAU message number Message for caller at the each night No i Refer to Flexible i System Numbering feature Do you change the Service Yes Code for Operation for VAU message No 421 Preamble Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 S
51. 5 Override In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automatically send override call 0406 COS Options Item 6 Automatic Override In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automatically send override call to an extension busy on a handset call 0511 Service Code Setup Item 15 Override Assign a service code for Override 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 83 Setting of signal called for override Assign a service code for setting of signal called override 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 82 Setting of Voice Over called for override Assign a service code for setting of voice announce called for override 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Service No 4 Override Assign a one digit service code for override 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for override code 1018 1008 Basic Extension Port Setup Part B Item 5 Override Call For each extension set Override type 0 muted 1 no tone or 2 normal Options None 303 Intercom Off Hook Signaling Cont d Related Features Call Waiting Camp On and Callback An extension user cannot Camp On to a busy extension or leave a Callback if Override has already gone through Handsfree Speaker amp Microphone You cannot send override to an
52. Abbreviated Dialing 1 Press idle CL key and dial 855 2 Press One Touch Key you want to program 3 Dial 813 to store a Common Abbreviated Dialing number OR Dial 814 to store a group Abbreviated Dialing number 4 Dial Abbreviated Dialing number storage code e g 001 5 Press SPK to hang up To assign a Service Code to a One touch Key This lets you make your own set of one touch feature keys 1 Press idle CL key and dial 855 2 Press One Touch Key you want to program 3 Dial Service Code you want stored For example if you want a One Touch Key to automatically clear your Last Number Dialing enter 876 4 Press SPK to hang up To use a One Touch Key 1 Press One Touch Key If you press a line key before pressing a One Touch Key for Trunk Line calling the system automatically strips the Trunk Line code before dialing the number 379 One Touch Dialing Cont d Operation Cont d To chain One Touch Keys 1 Press first One Touch Key Last the stored function dial out 2 Press another One Touch Key The stored digits dial out To check the function of a One Touch Key 1 Press CHECK 2 Press One Touch Key The stored function displays Repeat this step to check other keys If you cannot see the entire number stored dial ok 3 Press CLEAR 380 One Touch Serial Operation Description An extension user have One Touch Serial Operation store a series of feature steps u
53. After the connected DTE receives a packet 0 65535 mS 1000 mS from the DCE it must respond within the T2 interval T2 must be less than T1 N1 The maximum number of bits in an 0 65535 mS 2080 bits Information Transfer frame After T1 expires N2 is the maximum number of 0 65535 mS 7 times transmissions and retransmissions of a packet allowed The maximum number of I Information 0 7 frames 7 frames Transfer frames a connected device may have unacknowledged outstanding 131 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 3 DCI RS 232 C Connector Pin Besignation Function Breeton re Pavec CTS Clear to Send To DCI els DSR Data Set Ready To DCI 7 SG Signal Ground La ae ae Carrier Detect To DCI 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready To Terminal 22 om Ring Indicator To DCI 132 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 4 Result Codes Result Result Code Set Set Definition a Returned when command entered without error CONNECT Connection is established any speed with TAN A Bol e code set 0 2 RING Displays at destination terminal while call is ringing NO CARRIER No carrier received from destination call disconnected 4 ERROR Incorrect command entered Incorrect command entere sd tt ft s CONNECT 1200 Cat connected at 200baus CEET z Busy Destination extensionbusy CF e NOANSW
54. Alarm Clock lets a key telephone and SLT extension work like an alarm clock An extension user have Alarm shall be reminded by the ring for a meeting or an appointment There are two types of Alarm Clocks Alarm Clock 1 sounds only once at the preset time Alarm Clock 2 sounds every day at the preset time Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default setting The Alarm Clock duration is 30 seconds An extension s Class of Service allows alarm clock setting Service Code of Clock Alarm is dial 827 Service Code of Common Canceling Code is dial 720 Options None Programming Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page gt 0405 System Timers Item 23 Alarm Clock Duration Set the duration of the Alarm Clock signal 0 64800 seconds gt 0406 COS Options Item 27 Alarm Clock In an extension s Class of Service allow 1 or prevent 0 Alarm clock setting gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 22 Alarm Clock Assign service code of Alarm Clock gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 10 Common Canceling Code Assign service code of Common Canceling Code gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 38 Alarm Clock Cont d Programming Cont d In Program Should an extension In Program 0406 Item 27 be allowed to use 0406 Item 27 enter 0 Alarm enter 1 In Progra
55. Answer Assign a transfer ring group number when VAU path are busy for DUD DISA caller Related Features Preview Dial When you use VAU Adaptor you can use Preview Dial feature after dial 82 Call Forward with Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate the Call forward with personal message Press idle CL key Dial 713 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Greeting Message Dials the destination extension number Dial Call Forward condition 1 Busy 2 No answer 3 Busy No answer 4 Always 7 Dial forwarding type 1 All incoming calls 2 Trunk incoming calls only 3 Extension incoming calls only 8 Press SPK to hang up finish OR Dial 3 erase 5 a of To operate OR Dial 5 listen 5 b of To operate OR Dial 7 re record 5 c of To operate Call forward with personal message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt lt Cont d gt To operate the Call forward with personal message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 713 3 Hear To re record dial 7 to listen dial 5 to erase dial 3 4 a 5 a 4 b 5 b 6 b 4 c 6 c 7 c 8 c 10 c Dial 3 erase Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c Dial 5 listen Hear recorded Personal Greeting Message Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 7 re r
56. Call Transfer code 1003 Call Forward code 1055 76 Call Forward Cont d Related Features Group Hunt An extension user cannot forward their calls to a Department number Do Not Disturb If an extension user activates DND option 4 the system prevents other extensions from forwarding calls to them If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4 callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone Programmable Function Key Function keys simplify Call Forward operation Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate or cancel Call Forward 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial Call Forward code 842 for Call Forward with Dual Ringing Transfers ring destination immediately Intercom calls ring both extensions Calls do not forward when extension busy 843 845 for unanswered Call Transfer 848 for Call Forward for Busy Transfer OR Press Call Forward key PCM 1006 or 851 code 1000 for Forward with Dual Ringing PGM 1006 or 851 code 1002 for Busy Transfer PGM 1006 or 851 code 1003 for Unanswered transfer PCM 1006 or 851 code 1055 for Forward All Calls Immediately When you enable Call Forward your Call Forward key flashes slowly 3 Dial 1 plus extension to enable dial 0 to disable Your Call Forward destination must be an installed extension It cannot be a Department Group pilot number Once you activate Call Forward only your Call Forward destination can place an Intercom c
57. Class of Service 1 10 to extension Related Features Night Service An extension can have a different Class of Service for each service mode Service mode Day Night Midnight or Rest Operation Refer to the individual features on the next page 104 Class of Service Cont d Programming Cont d D 7 Refer to the COS o youi want o cange a Options chart on the Class of Service option following page Find the COS Option Item In 0406 change the on the chart and review the data for the option associated feature as required In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions 105 Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 1 of 8 This option Is used with Default Hook Flash On off Hook flash for S L T Hook Flash 2 Manual night On off an extension s ability to use Night Service 0 off service switching manual Night Service Switching Long conversation On off the Warning Tone for Long Warning Tone for Alarm Conversation Long Conversation DND Call Forward On off an extension s ability to use Call Call Forward DND override Bypass Forward DND Override Override call Override Allows prevents an Intercom caller from Override 1 on sending off Hook signaling tones to a busy extension Automatic override Allows prevents an extension busy ona Override call from receiving override 7 Data privacy On off an extension s ability to switch Privacy Data 1
58. Conditions None Default Setting Trunk Line group keys set for incoming and outgoing access All Trunk Lines assigned to Trunk Line group 1 All Trunk Lines and extensions use access map 1 No Trunk Line group access key assigned Service Code for Line Group Access is dial 804 Options None 502 Trunk Line Group Cont d Programming Should extension users have one button access to Trunk Line Group loop key of specified Trunk line access Yes In 0905 assign Trunk to Trunk Line Group Build an outgoing restriction matrix mune die iat In 0911 for each Access ae Aex i a S nat Map select the access pacing apne oe options for each trunk In 0912 assign extensions to Access Maps Should extension users In 1006 assign Line have one button access to Group Access loop keys Trunk Line Group T 1012 group number At extension operation porn In 0402 Item 1 enter 0 for both mode of the Trunk Line Group Loop keys outgoing incoming or both In 0402 Item 1 preoming enter 2 for incoming outgoing In 0402 Item 1 enter 1 for outgoing Do you change the Service Code for Line Group Access Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature 503 Trunk Line Group Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0402 System Options Part B Item 1 Line group access key operation mode Set the operating mode
59. Continued from previous page Does the system allow the Call forward with personal message for an adequate duration In 2202 Item 2 change the message length Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature Do you change the Service Code for Call Forward with Personal Greeting Message Yes 31 Call Forward with Personal Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 31 VAU fixed message Set the use 0 or not use 1 VAU fixed message for VAU feature gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 63 VAU no answer time VAU Set the waiting time 0 64800 seconds of automatic answer for incoming call when All VAU paths are busy If all VAU paths are busy while waiting time incoming call transfer to transferring ring group CMD 2204 gt 0406 COS Options Item 99 Personal greeting message VAU In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use the Call forward with personal message gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 3 Call Forward with personal greeting VAU Assign a service code for Call Forward with personal greeting VAU gt 2201 VAU Reset When you use to erase the VAU Personal Message and VAU Message gt 2202 Message Length Assignment for VAU Set the maximum length of message length for VAU Message and Personal Message gt 2204 Transfer Ring Group Setup When VAU No
60. Dial 811 Dial 1 to check ringing for Intercom calls OR Dial 2 to check ringing for Trunk Line calls For Intercom calls select the pitch 1 High 2 Medium 3 Low and the range 1 4 you want to check Refer to Table 1 6 for the four Trunk Line Ringing Tone Ranges and the selections within each range Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press SPK to hang up To change the pitch of your incoming ring 1 pa 3 Press idle CL key Dial 820 Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls OR Dial 2 to change ringing for Trunk Line calls 4 Select the pitch 1 High 2 Medium 3 Low 5 Press SPK to hang up lt Single Line Telephone gt This feature only available for Key Telephone 170 DISA Direct Inward System Access Description DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions or to place Trunk line calls through the system or other few features The system allows 10 classes of Service for DISA and 15 passwords for DISA A DISA password can have a different Class at Service for DISA for each of the Night Service modes This helps outside callers that know the extension numbers of the people and each feature access code they want to reach For example a salesperson can call their in house assistant directly without going through a company operator To use DISA the outside caller Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line
61. In 0405 Item 27 set ee the Hold Recall extension ring the extension Callback Time for an acceptable interval Do calls left on Exclusive In 0405 Item 2 set Hold too long recall after the Exclusive Hold an acceptable interval Recall Time sts Do Coens se a In 0405 Item 3 set xclusive Hold recalling an the Exclusive Hold extension ring the extension Recall Callback Time for an acceptable interval Yes Continued on following page 264 Hold Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page In 0901 Item 20 enter 0 to disable Should calls left on Forced Release of Hold too long Held Call for automatically disconnect Trunk line In 0901 Item 20 enter 1 to enable Forced Release of Held Call for Trunk line In 0405 Item 40 set the Forced Release of Held Calls Interval iin Group Hols anotier shoud enensiorenave Yes 1 100 assign ility can pick up the call Group Hole Capen iiityt Department Groups No Should an extension in a Department Group be able to put a call on Group Hold Service Code 832 In 0406 Item 35 enter 1 In 0406 Item 35 enter 0 Should an extension in a Department Group be able to pick up a call on Group Hold Service Code 862 In 0406 Item 36 enter 1 In 0406 Item 36 enter 0 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Continued on the next page
62. In 1006 do not program No Do you want line Yes In 1006 program function No Do you want to off Hook access to each Ringing Trunk line group loop keys for Trunk Line Group function keys as loop keys code 1012 trunk group keys as line keys code 1012 Trunk line group Non ringing line group access loop keys require access programming Ringing line group access loop keys require Ring Group programming 499 Trunk Incoming Call Cont d Programming Cont d gt Note For incoming calls Ring Group programming 0909 0910 overrides Access Map programming 0911 0912 Use the charts below to program the following example For this extension Line 2 lashes Line 3 flashes Trunk line ring the same in the day as at night Program 0910 Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment mee T S o e X Trunk Line assigned to indicated Ring Group Make the same 0910 entry for all Night modes Program 0909 Extension Ring Group Assignment Ring Group gt EXT 200 EXT 201 EXT 202 1 Extension rings 0 Extension doesn t ring To allow extension user to answer flashing line be sure to give extension incoming access to the Trunk line program 0911 and 0912 500 Trunk Incoming Call Cont d Related Features Direct Inward Line Direct inward Lines ring an extension directly without Ring Group or Access Map programming Programmable Function Key Line keys
63. Intercom Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions Operation To display the list of Intercom calls you did not answer 1 Press CHECK 2 Press CL2 Repeatedly press CL2 until no more calls display 3 Press CLEAR to return to the normal Time and Date display 299 Intercom Abandoned Call Display Cont d Programming Cont d Should extension user be able to display list of Intercom calls they did not answer In 0406 Item 13 In 0406 Item 13 enter 0 enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions 300 Intercom Off Hook Signaling When a user calls to an extension busy on a call he she can send an off hook signal indicating he she is trying to get through This is one of Override functionality that is not cut in to the established conversation but to send the ring to the speaker of keyphone or to send short beep tone to the handset of single line telephone lt Note gt By the same operation procedure but it may go to the speaker of keyphone verbally This is due to the CDHF A installation in the keyphone at the called side The functionality is described as Voice Over in this issue The system provides the following Intercom Off hook Signaling options Called Extension Block The called extension s Class of Service may block incoming off hook signaling attempts This is beneficial to users that don t want to have interruptions while on a cal
64. Me 1 SET 0 CANCEL Follow Me SET FOLLOW ME You dial 1 to set Follow Me after dialing ICM DIAL Service Code 846 Follow Me CANCEL FOLLOW ME You dial 0 to cancel Follow Me ICM DIAL O ALL CLR _ after dialing Service Code 846 Follow Me SET FOLLOW ME You have cancelled Follow Me CANCEL Follow Me SET FOLLOW ME You enable Follow Me where ext name is FLW ME lt lt ext name extension you want to intercept ee meias ee FLW ME gt gt ext name ee ping extension Headset Operation Time and Date You dial Service Code 834 to enable the SET HEADSET MODE Headset mode Headset Operation Time and Date You dial Service Code 834 to disable the CANCEL HEADSET MODE Headset mode 16 Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 6 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Hold You place an Intercom call on Hold where ext Time and Date name is the name of the extension you placed HOLD ext name on Hold Hold You dial Service Code 832 to place an Time anga Intercom call on Group Hold where ext name GROUP HOLD extname Pate is the name of your Intercom caller Hold trk name You dial Service Code 832 to place your trunk GROUP HOLD call on Group Hold Hold Time and Date You place an Intercom call on Hold where ext HOLD extname name is the name of your Intercom caller Hold An Intercom call you left on Hold too long rexename recalls your extension where ext name is the HOLD
65. Messages Program the Text Messages 1 20 gt 0406 COS Options Item 75 Text Message In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Text Messaging gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 6 Text Message Assign a service code for text message gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 10 Common canceling service code Assign a service code for common canceling service code gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Text Messaging code 1027 Related Features Programmable Function Key Function Keys simplify Text Message operation Operation To select a message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 836 OR Press Text Messaging key PCM 1006 or SC 851 1027 00 20 3 Dial the message number 1 20 You may be able to append a message with digits phone number shown as HHHHHHHH the time of day 24 hour or the date The time displays in 12 hour format To scroll through the messages press VOL A or VOL Y 4 Press SPK to hang up A co worker calling your extension sees the message you selected 472 Text Message Cont d Operation Cont d To cancel Selectable Display Messaging 1 2 Press idle CL key Dial 836 OR Press Text Messaging key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1027 00 Press SPK to hang up OR Press idle CL key
66. Name Storing Trunk amp Station Description Extensions and Trunk Line can have names instead of physical circuit port numbers These names show on an extension s display when the user places or answers calls Extension and Trunk Line names make it easier to identify callers The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls A name can be up to 10 digits long consisting of alphanumeric characters punctuation marks and spaces Conditions This feature available for key telephone with display Default Setting Set by an extension s Class of Service Trunk Line names display when the Trunk Line starts ringing or when the user seizes the Trunk Line Extension names display when intercom call rings in is voice announced or is answered by the user Extensions may program their names EXT xxx for extensions xxx 200 271 LINE yyy for trunk lines yyy 01 52 Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 37 Trunk Line No and Name Display seizing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying of a Trunk Line s name number when the user seizes the Trunk line incoming or outgoing gt 0406 COS Options Item 38 Trunk Line No and Name Display incoming In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying of a Trunk Line s name number when the Trunk line is ringing gt 0406 COS Options Item 39 Extension No
67. Night Service Manual Auto Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Should system have In 0801 set the Automatic Automatic Night Night Service patterns Service switching time periods In 0802 assign entry 0 No to each day of the week In 0802 assign the patterns set in 0801 to days of the week In 0401 Item In 0803 set the l Automatic Night Service patterns to holidays Should system have Yes In 0401 Item 1 enter 1 Manual Night Service switching In 0401 Item No 1 enter 0 Should extensions be able to switch the night Mode i e dial Service Code 818 or press function key In 0406 Item No Yes In 0406 Item 2 enter 0 2 enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Continued on next page 372 Night Service Manual Auto Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Should extension user be able to change the Night Mode by pressing a function key Yes In 1006 do not assign a function key to codes 1039 1042 The default password is 0000 In 0202 Item 2 set the Night Service Password 373 For Day Mode switching in 1006 assign a function key code 1039 plus password For Night Mode switching in 1006 assign a function key code 1040 plus password For Midnight Mode switching in 1006 assign a function key code 1041 plus password
68. No answer time at Normal or DIL call Define the duration time between receive a incoming call and transferring a call gt 0414 System Timers Part B Timer_04 VAU overflow message interval Define the duration time between message and messages gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item_06 Operation for VAU message By using this service code all VAU message are operated recording listening erasing gt 0901 Basic Trunk Port Setup Part A Item_14 17 Service type Day Night Midnight Rest Assign the service type of each exchange line gt 0919 Transfer Incoming Ring Group if Normal or DIL call is no answer For each DIL with delayed ringing enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group gt 2214 Incoming Queue Message VAU for Incoming Ring Group Define the several timers 1st message connection timer etc and assign the VAU Message No which is used for 1st 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone for each Department Group Operation Automatic Incoming Queue Message VAU 1 Incoming call 2 All extensions are busy no answer Pre programmed time passed 3 VAU automatically answers then send the Ist Waiting Message or Fixed Message 4 This line is automatically held Manual Incoming Queue Message VAU 1 Incoming call 2 All extensions are busy no answer 3 Press Incoming Queue Message VAU key and the line key 4 VAU answers then send the Ist Waiting Message
69. OR Press idle CL key and dial 846 2 Dial 0 4 Dial another extension number to change the source OR Dial 0 to cancel Call Forwarding Confirmation tone is heard Press SPK to hang up lt Single Line Telephone gt To activate Follow Me Use this procedure at the extension that will receive Forwarded calls destination Off hook and dial 846 Dial 1 to set Call key Following Dial the extension who s calls you want to intercept source Confirmation tone is heard Repeat steps 1 3 to enable Call Following with Follow Me for additional extensions On hook 234 Follow Me Cont d Operation lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To cancel or reroute Call Forwarding with Follow Me 1 Off hook and dial 846 2 Dial 0 3 Dial another extension number to change the source OR Dial 0 to cancel Call Forwarding Confirmation tone is heard 4 On hook 235 Forced Trunk Disconnection Description Forced Trunk Disconnection lets a user forced to disconnect for a busy trunk if the system have trouble which cannot disconnect trunk by on hook or if outside caller have long conversation lt Caution gt This feature may be assigned for only the system administrator type of station s Assign this feature carefully Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting Service Code for Forced Trunk Disconnection is dial
70. On Warning Tone 400Hz 13dB 100 mS Off 100 mS On Confirmation Tone 800 Hz 13dB 100 mS Off 100 mS On Ringback Tone Continues 1 Sec On 2 Sec Off Override Tone a aa 800 Hz 13 dB 100 mS Off 100 mS On Lock out Tone 800 Hz 13 dB 100 mS Off 100 mS On Clock Alarm Tone Continues 800 Hz 13 dB 100 mS On 100 mS Off 100 mS On 700 mS Off Doorphone Ring 1 Variable 660 Hz at 10 dB for 200 mS 660 Hz at 16 dB for 200 mS 520 Hz at 10 dB for 300 mS 520 Hz at 16 dB for 400 mS 520 Hz at 22 dB for 600 mS 500 mS quiet Variable 880 Hz at 10 dB for 200 mS 880 Hz at 16 dB for 200 mS 700 Hz at 10 dB for 300 mS 700 Hz at 16 dB for 400 mS 700 Hz at 22 dB for 600 mS 500 mS quiet Doorphone Ring 2 Service Set Tone Service Clear Tone Speaker Monitor Tone Door Relay Tone Door Call Tone Splash Tone 1 800 Hz 13 dB 100 mS Off 100 mS On 800 Hz 13 dB 100 mS Off 100 mS On 800 Hz 13 dB 100 mS Off 100 mS On 800 Hz 13 dB 1 Second On Talk Back Tone Paging Tone Splash Tone 2 Splash Tone 3 1 Second Signal Tone 3 1 Doorphone Ring 3 3 Variable 1050 Hz at 10 dB for 200 mS 1050 Hz at 16 dB for 200 mS 700 Hz at 10 dB for 300 mS 700 Hz at 16 dB for 400 mS 700 Hz at 22 dB for 600 mS 500 mS quiet 10 Introduction Cont d Table 1 3 System Tones Page 2 of 2 Tone Repetitions Frequency Level Pattern Transfer and Call Waiting Tone
71. Press DSS Console key for extension If the call voice announces you can make it ring by dialing 1 Extension Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is The assigned extension is On Busy on a call Off Idle Flashing fast In Do Not Disturb Placing a Trunk Line call from your DSS Console as DLS usage 1 Press EXT 2 to select DLS appearance in case of two DSS Consoles are connected then use 2nd Console for trunk access 2 Press DSS Console key for Trunk Line 3 Dial outside number Trunk Line Busy Lamp Field When DSS key is The assigned trunk line is On Busy on a call Off Idle Flashing slowly Ringing Answering a Trunk Line call from your DSS Console as DLS usage 1 Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to Trunk Line Calling a Doorphone from your DSS Console as DLS usage 1 Press DOOR 2 Press DSS Console key for Doorphone you want to call 1 8 Doorphone Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is The assigned Doorphone is On Busy or ringing in Off Idle 205 DSS Console Cont d Operation Cont d Transferring a call using your DSS Console 1 Place or answer call If you are on an Intercom call press HOLD before going to the next step 2 Press DSS key for extension that will receive transfer You cannot Transfer to an extension that is busy or in Do Not Disturb 3 Optional Announce call If called party doesn t want the call press flashing line key to retrieve it 4 Press SPK
72. Print Item 4 Daily Summary Print Item 5 Weekly Summary summaries Print Item 6 Monthly Summary Print Item 8 Incoming call Print Item 10 ALB output Disable Print Item 12 DDI table name Output Print Item 14 Date data output Print Item 5 Weekly Summary Print Item 6 Monthly Summary Print Item 8 Incoming call Print Item 10 ALB output Disable Print Item 12 DDI table name Output Print Item 14 Date data output Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0008 System Alarm Report Setup If the SMDR printer will also be used for alarm reports enter the SMDR DCI port number as the alarm report port number gt 0130 Date Format for SMDR and System Reports Set the date format for SMDR 0 American Japanese or 2 European gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 1 Omit Mask digits Enter the number of digits 1 24 you want SMDR to black i e X out Enter 0 not to block any digits gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 2 Min digits Enter the minimum number of digits a user must dial 1 24 before the system includes a call on the SMDR report Enter 0 to include all outgoing calls regardless of the number of digits dialed gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 3 Printer output port DCI port No Enter the port number of the DCI assigned to the SMDR printer gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 4 Min call duration Enter the minimum duration of a call 1 65535 t
73. Programming lt Room monitor for Key Telephone gt In 0406 Item 54 No Should an extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 54 enter 0 _ _ to initiate KTS Room Monitor sy enter 1 In 0406 Item 55 No Should an extension have Yes In 0406 Item 55 enter 0 ability to be monitored by enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 assign a Room Monitor key code 1025 to both the monitoring and monitored extension lt Room monitor for Single Line Telephone gt Should an extension be able to initiate and receive SLT Room Monitor In 0406 Item 60 In 0406 Item 60 enter 0 enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Should service code be changed from initial Code 770 445 Room Monitor Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 54 Room Monitoring In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate Room Monitor 0406 COS Options Item 55 Room Monitored In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to be monitored 0406 COS Options Item 60 SLT Room Monitor In extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 for SLT Room Monitor 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 56 SLT Room Monitor Assign the Service Code for SLT Room Monitor 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign
74. RECALL y call you left on Hold Hold trk name A call you have left on Hold too long is recalling HOLD RECALL your extension Hold trk name You place a call on Hold HOLD Intercom Time and Date Your extension is busy on an Intercom call TALKING TO ext name Intercom Time and Date You have placed an Intercom call to an DND ext name extension in DND Intercom You have placed an Intercom call that has Time and Date i ee oie CALLING ext name either voice announced or is ringing but the user has not lifted the handset Intercom Time and Date An Intercom call has voice announced or is CALL FROM name _ ringing your extension Intercom Time and Date Your Intercom caller has hung up but you are HANG UP still off hook Intercom Time and Date You have placed an Intercom call to a busy BUSY extname extension ES y Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 7 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Intercom You press CHECK and CL2 to check the Abandoned CHECK SET CALL ABAN Intercom Abandoned Call Display where nnn Call Display nnn ext name is the abandoned extension and ext name is that extension s name Key Touch Tone Time and Date You dial Service Code 824 to enable Key SET KEY TOUCH TN Touch Tone Key Touch Tone Time and Date You dial Service Code 824 to enable Key CANCEL KEY TOUCH TN Touch Tone Last Number trk name Last Number Dialing is outdialing the la
75. Ratings 24V DC 500mA 120V AC 250mA Minimum Application load 1V DC 1mA Audio Music Input Input Impedance 47K Ohms 1KHz Audio Paging Output Output Impedance 600 Ohms 1KHz Maximum Output 400 mV RMS This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting No ACI circuit types programmed for physical ports No ACI extension numbers programmed No ACI group pilot numbers programmed All ACI software ports have function 0 no setting neither input or output All ACI software ports in ACI Department Group 1 Options DX2E 3ACI A 47 Audio Communications Interface ACI Cont d Programming Plug ACI into an available DSTU station port Is ACI software port for Music on Hold or External Paging Aux Device Control External Paging Aux Device Control Music on Hold In 1301 enter 2 for output function In 0914 assign a Music on Hold source for each Trunk In 1301 enter 2 for output function Direct dialing is required for External Direct dialing is optional Paging and Ringer Control for Music on Hold Do notmakeaxtensi n Should system users be In 0504 enter an extension number entries in 0504 able to directly dial ACI number for each ACI i software ports software port Should system users be able to use Department Calling to call ACI software ports In 1303 assign ACI software ports to Dep
76. Telephone gt In the following case SLT B goes to monitor to SLT A At Monitored SLT A 1 Go off hook 2 Dial 770 3 Dial 1 4 Dial the monitoring extension number lt SLT B gt Check confirmation tone 5 Set the transmitter of the handset toward the room At monitoring SLT B 1 Go off hook 2 Dial 770 3 Dial 2 4 Dial the monitored extension number lt SLT A gt Check confirmation tone Nn You can monitor the room status from SLT A 6 Go on hook to end the monitor To cancel the monitored status at SLT A 1 Go on hook 447 Saved Last Number Dialing Description Saved Last Number Dialing permits a keyset user to save their last outside number and easily redial it later on For example a key set user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits The system retains the saved number until the user stories a new one in its place Saved Last Number Dialing saves in system memory a dialed number up to 24 digits The number can be any combination of digits 0 9 and The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered unanswered or busy The system normally uses the same Trunk Line group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific Trunk Line if desired Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service permits Save number Dialed No Save keys d
77. Telephone gt To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 Hook Flash Dial 803 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 4 or 0 for All Call Announce the call nA BW N When Paged party answers hang up to Transfer the call to them To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 Off hook 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone 0 4 You connect to the Paging party 4 Stay on the line After the Paging party hangs up you connect to the transferred call Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer lt Key Telephone gt To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 Press HOLD Dial 801 Dial the Internal Paging Group code 1 8 Announce the call nA BW N When Paged party answers hang up to Transfer the call to them To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 863 Gf your extension is the group called OR Dial 864 and the group number if your extension is not the group called OR Press the Internal Paging group Answer key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1010 if your extension is in the group called 3 Stay on the line After the Paging party hangs up you connect to the transferred call 339 Meet Me Paging Transfer Cont d Operation Cont d Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 Hook Flash Dial 801 Dial the Internal Paging Group code
78. Virtual Extension Port Numbers Virtual Extension Number Range Default Operator Access Number Default DCI Port Number DCI Extension Number Range DCI Pooling Group numbers DCI Pooling Group Extension Number Range ACI Port Numbers ACI Extension Number Range Department Extension Group Numbers Department Extension Group Extension Number Range Ring Group Numbers Doorphone Numbers Call Pickup Group Numbers Internal Page Group Numbers External Page Group Numbers Park Group Numbers User Password for Setting Time and Date User Password for Setting Music on Hold tone User Password for Setting Night Service Introduction Cont d Table 1 2 System Number Plan Page 2 of 2 Programming Passwords Level 2 IN Level 3 SA Level 4 SB Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports not to exceed 400 These devices share the same pool of extension numbers Extension numbers cannot overlap Extension numbers can be three or four digits long See Flexible System Numbering Introduction Cont d Table 1 3 System Tones Page 1 of 2 Tone Repetitions Frequency Level Pattern Extension Dial Tone 400Hz 13dB 250 mS Off 250 mS On Special Dial Tone 400Hz 13dB 10 mS Off 90 mS On Transfer Dial Tone 400 Hz 13 dB 120 mS Off 120 mS On Busy Tone Continues 400 Hz 13 dB 500 mS Off 500 mS On Busy Tone terminated Congestion Tone DND Busy Tone Continues 13 dB 200 mS Off 200 mS
79. Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message 190 Do Not Disturb Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb at your extension 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Off hook and dial 847 3 Dial the DND option code 0 Cancel DND 1 Incoming Trunk Line calls blocked 2 Incoming Intercom and transferred Trunk Line calls blocked 3 Incoming Trunk Line and Intercom calls blocked 4 Transferred calls blocked Confirmation tone is heard To cancel Do Not Disturb 1 Off hook 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 On hook When you cancel of alarm clock by dial 720 these features are canceled at same time DND Call Forward Repeat Dial Message Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message 191 Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override Description An extension user can override Do Not Disturb or Call Forward at another extension This is helpful for example to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows initiating Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override Service Code of Do Not Disturb Override Call Forward is dial 807 One Digit Service Code of Bypass Call DND FWD Override is no setting Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 4 DND Override Call Forwa
80. Walking Toll Restriction Cont d Related Features Toll Restriction Before use the Walking Toll Restriction feature Toll Restriction programming should be assigned Station Message Detail Recording SMDR In case that an extension is used by other user who entered Walking Toll Restriction password the outgoing information can be output to printer PC Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place outgoing call by using Walking Toll Restriction 1 Lift handset or press idle CL key 2 Dial 763 3 Dial Password 6digits fixed If the dialed password is correct dial tone shall be heard If the dialed password is incorrect warning tone shall be heard 4 Seize an idle Trunk Line 5 Dial Telephone Number lt Single Line Telephone gt To place outgoing call by using Walking Toll Restriction 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 763 3 Dial Password 6digits fixed If the dialed password is correct dial tone shall be heard If the dialed password is incorrect warning tone shall be heard 4 Seize an idle Trunk Line 5 Dial Telephone Number 541 Walking Toll Restriction Cont d Reference Printout Format for Walking Toll Restriction on SMDR example 1 When any user places outgoing call by using Walking Toll Restriction the call shall be printed to SMDR as follows CLASS TIME LINE DURATION STATION DIALED No CLI RD COST ACCOUNT 01 POTW 10 10 LINE001 00 01 10 200 0448137101 0 W 001 e
81. When you are For this feature Also ne Function Key 828 P Setting the system Time and Date Time and Date 831 1 8 Parking a callin a system Park orbit 1 Park Hold 1033 8 834 Switching from headset to handset Headset Operation 1028 mode and visa versa 836 Activating Text Message Text Message 1027 Deleting the system alarm message Ss eee 842 Activating Call Forward dual ring Call Forward 1000 843 Activating transfer Busy Call Forward 1002 845 Activating Unanswered call transfer Call Forward 1003 Extension Trunk Switching the function of a Programmable programmable key Function Key Accessing One Touch Key Serial One Touch Serial Operation store and delete functions Operation Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing numbers Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing numbers 855 Programming a One Touch Key One Touch Dialing 856 Answering a call ringing specified Call Pickup extension in pickup group 859 Answer on hook when holding 861 1 8 Pickup a call parked in a system Park Park Hold orbit 1 8 862 Picking up a call from Group Hold Note P is user password Introduction Cont d Table 1 1 Service Codes by Number Page 5 of 6 Service Code When you are For this feature Also ou Function Key 863 Joining a Meet Me Page on an Internal Meet Me Paging Paging Group if your extension is
82. a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features None Operation To set the system Time and Date Press idle CL key Dial 828 Dial the password normally 0000 Dial two digits for the year e g 92 Dial two digits for the month 01 12 Dial two digits for the day 01 31 Dial the day of the week 0 6 0 Sunday 6 Saturday Dial two digits for the hour 24 hour clock Dial two digits for the minutes 00 60 Press SPK to hang up COE SOY ie ee DA gt 476 Toll Restriction Description Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial By allowing extensions to place only certain types of calls you can better control long distance costs The system applies Toll Restriction according to an extension s Toll Restriction Class There are 8 Toll Restriction Classes Toll Restriction offers the following capabilities Common Permit Code Table Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Toll Restriction Classes to dial To let all users dial 911 for example put 911 in the Common Permit Code Table The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and Common Restrict Code Tables Each code is 4 digits max using 0 9 and FLSH as a wild card Common Restrict Code Table The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Toll Restriction Classes To prevent all users from dialing directly assistance
83. a wild card entry e PBX Trunk Line Toll Restriction The system can provide the Toll Restriction for the PBX Trunk Line or restriction can be handled solely by the connected PBX If the phone system provides the restriction it restricts the digits dialed after the PBX access code e PBX Call Restriction When the phone system does the Toll Restriction it can further restrict users from dialing PBX extensions In this case the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code The only PBX facility phone system users can access are the PBX s outside Trunk Lines e Automatic Pause The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual dialing Abbreviated Dialing Last Number Dialing Automatic Repeat Dialing and Save number Dialed This gives the connected PBX time to set up its Trunk Line circuits Conditions None 398 PBX Compatibility Cont d Programming In Program 0901 Items 7 10 designate PBX trunks entry 1 Check Program 0901 Items 1 2 and 3 for compatibility with the connected PBX In Program 0901 Item 19 System PBX Should system or PBX enter 0 to enable system Toil Restrict trunk Toll Restriction In Program 0702 Item 9 enter the PBX access codes Calls are unrestricted unless user dials PBX access code In Program 0701 Item 10 Should calls on the PBX ers Yes eee rank bereticted to i II ly PBX access code oeae C
84. allows an extension user with an audible indication of an incoming Trunk call while already on a call the busy extension user hears muted ringing if on a handset call or one short burst tones if on a Handsfree call Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone 496 Trunk Incoming Call Cont d Default Setting Pre ringing for outside calls enabled Ring No Answer Alarm interval is 60 seconds All trunks have normal ringing All extensions and trunk are in Ring Group 1 Extension 200 rings for trunk calls all other extension s only flash All extension use Access Map 1 In Access Map 1 all trunks have incoming access outgoing access and access when on Hold All function keys are line keys key 1 trunk 1 etc Auto answer to incoming trunk line call is enabled Options None Programming gt 0306 Pre ringing Enable Enable 1 or disable 0 pre ringing for outside calls gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 13 Auto answer to incoming Trunk line call gt 0405 System Timers Item 7 Incoming ring no answer alarm Set the Ring no Answer Alarm interval 0 64800 seconds If a trunk rings a keyset longer than this interval the system changes the ring cadence gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 2 Incoming Type For each Trunk Line enable delayed ringing 0 or immediate ringing 1 gt 0909 Extension Ring Group Assignment To
85. and Name Display conversation In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying of the incoming Intercom callers name number after the extension user answers the call The user answers by pressing SPK or lifting the handset 366 Name Storing Trunk amp Station Cont d Programming Cont d Do you want Trunk Lines to names to Trunk line h 01 52 PAR ports 01 52 In 0903 do not assign names to Trunk line ports In 0903 assign Do you want a Trunk line s name number displayed when a user seizes the Trunk line In 0406 Item 37 No Yes In 0406 Item 37 enter 0 enter 1 Do you want a Trunk line s name to display while it is ringing Yes In 0406 Item 38 enter 1 In 0406 Item 38 No enter 0 In 0502 do not In 0502 assign assign names to No Do you want extensions Yes janesto noh extension ports to have names ports 01 72 01 72 In 0406 Item 85 No enter 0 Do you want an extension to be able to program their own name Yes In 0406 Item 85 enter 1 Continued on next page 367 Name Storing Trunk amp Station Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Answering the call means the called user presses SPK or lifts the handset Yes In 0406 Item 39 enter 1 After a user answers an Intercom call should caller s name number display In 0406 Item
86. and Trunk Line Group keys simplify answering outside calls Night Service Ring Group programming can be different for each Night Service mode Operation lt Key Telephone gt To answer an incoming Trunk Line Call 1 Lift handset 2 Press flashing line key If you don t have a line for a Trunk Line call ringing your phone it rings an idle CL key If you have Ringing Line Preference lifting the handset answers the call If you have Auto Answer to incoming call from Trunk line you automatically answer to ringing Trunk line without press flashing line key lt Single Line Telephone gt To answer an incoming Trunk Line Call 1 Lift handset Automatic answer to ringing Trunk line 501 Trunk Line Group Description Trunk Line Group let you optimize Trunk Line usage for incoming and outgoing calls With Trunk Line Group users can have loop rotary keys for Trunk Line calls Incoming Trunk Line group calls ring these loop keys For outgoing calls the user presses a loop key to access the first available Trunk Line within the group You set the access order in Trunk Line group programming The system allows 16 Trunk Line Group Loop keys give an extension user more available function keys since the user doesn t need a separate line key for each Trunk Line The user only needs one loop key for each Trunk Line group Like Trunk Line Group Routing Trunk Line Group help you to minimize the expense of toll calls
87. call on digits dialed SMDR report Should all outgoing calls print on the Yes In Program 0404 Item 2 enter 0 For example you can use this feature to block the printing of security codes In Program 0404 Item 1 enter the number of Do you want to back digits you want i e X out any of to block If you enter the digits on the 8 for example SMDR Xs SMDR report out the last 8 digits dialed No In Program 0404 Item 1 enter 0 Go to Programming Flowchart on the next Page 466 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Do you want the SMDR report to include calls blocked by Toll Restriction In Program 0404 Item 6 Print Item 1 enter 0 In Program 0404 Item 6 Print Item 1 enter 1 Access Code All Calls Calls if your system is behind In Program 0404 a PBX do you want SMDR In Program 0404 Item 6 Print to include all calls to Item 6 Print Item 2 enter 0 PBX or just calls using Item 2 enter 1 PBX trunk access code In Program 0404 Do you want the SMDR In Program 0404 Item 6 Print report to include Item 6 Print Item 3 enter 0 internal data calls Item 3 enter 1 In Program 0404 Item 6 In Program 0404 Item 6 enter 0 to enable the enter 1 to enable the following reports No Do you want to print Yes following reports Print Item 4 Daily Summary the SMDR report
88. call to ext 200 ext 200 wants to take held call Hold enquiry call to ext 200 ext 200 does not want to take the held call and hangs up 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT presses Recall 4 SLT presses 7 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT dials 1200 4 Ext 200 is RNA Busy 5 SLT presses Recall 6 SLT presses 7 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT dials 1200 4 Ext 200 is Ring No Answer Busy SLT goes on hook Transfer recall timer expires default 30 secs 7 SLT answers recalled call 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT dials 1200 4 Ext 200 Answers 5 SLT presses Recall 6 SLT presses 7 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT dials 1200 4 Ext 200 Answers 5 SLT hangs up 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT dials 1200 4 Ext 200 Answers 5 Ext 200 hangs up 6 SLT presses Recall 7 SLT presses 7 418 1 6001 sent to SLT MOH to TRK starts SLT hears fast dial tone MOH to TRK1 stops SLT hears normal dial tone SLT connected to TRK1 1 6001 sent to SLT 2 MOH to TRK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone 3 4 Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone or Busy tone 5 MOH to TRK1 stops SLT hears normal dial tone 6 SLT connected to TRK1 1 6001 sent to SLT 2 MOH to T
89. change the duration time for door lock open default 10s In 0405 Item 59 change the door lock opening time Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate the Doorphone strike 1 While talking to the Doorphone press the Flash key lt Single Line Telephone gt To activate the Doorphone strike 1 While talking to the Doorphone Hook Flash 196 Doorphone Description The Doorphone is a self contained Intercom unit typically used for an entrance door A visitor at the door can press the Doorphone call button like a door bell The Doorphone then sends chime tones to all extensions programmed to receive chimes To answer the chime the called extension user just lifts the handset This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Doorphone The Doorphone is convenient to have at a delivery entrance they just answer the Doorphone chimes instead The system can have up to eight Doorphones Door Lock Control When you have an electric door lock you can open an electric door lock from talking key telephone Conditions A For each Doorphone port slide the selector switch on the PGDU card to the DH position Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details Default Setting All Doorphone ports use gain type 0 0 dB gain A user must answer the Doorphone chimes within 30 seconds All Doorphones don t ring extensions The system assigns Doorphone Chime patterns as follows Servic
90. change the yes i Refer to Flexible Service Code for 1 System Numbering Step Call feature ini In Program 0512 DO VOLUR Sma NOI Yes Service No assign a i f n e S One Digit Service code for Step Call No 254 Group Step Calling Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To make a Step Call to an idle department member if the member you call is busy You step through Extension Groups set in Program 1003 1 Place call to busy department extension Dial the extension s number not the Department Group Pilot Number 2 Dial 808 OR Press Step Call key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1021 OR Dial One Digit Service Code 3 Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members lt Single Line Telephone gt To make a Step Call to an idle department member if the member you call is busy You step through Extension Groups set in Program 1003 1 Place call to busy department extension Dial the extension s number not the Department Group Pilot Number 2 Dial 808 OR Dial One Digit Service Code 3 Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members 255 Handsfree Speaker amp Microphone Description Handsfree allows a keyset user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone instead of the handset Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don t have a free hand to pick up the handset For example a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands
91. dials Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable O Toll Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 9 Intercom call restriction Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 Intercom Call Restriction 484 Toll Restriction Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 10 Restriction of calls within PBX Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 PBX Call Restriction Refer to the PBX Compatibility Feature 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 11 Permit code table Toll Restriction Class you select disable 0 or enable the Permit Code table When enabling select from tables 1 4 in Program 0702 Item 5 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 12 Restriction table Toll Restriction Class you select disable 0 or enable the Restriction table When enabling select from tables 1 4 in Program 0702 Item 6 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 1 International call restriction table Enter the international dialing codes you want to restrict 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 2 International call permit code table Enter the international dialing codes you want to permit 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 3 Dial number length limit for local call Set the maximum number of digits local callers can dial 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 4 Maximum dial number length limit Set the maximum number of
92. digit are 2 Feature access service code is three digits of first digit are 8 Operator access is one digits of first digit is 0 0502 Extension Numbers and Names Assign extension numbers to extension ports The telephone s programming identity follows the port number not the extension number 0510 Trunk Line Access Code Assign the Trunk Line Group Routing dial 9 access code 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Assign Service Code number of each feature 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Assign Service Code number of each feature Related features None Operation Refer at the beginning section of this issue 231 Follow Me Description While at a co worker s desk a user can have Follow Me redirect their calls to the co worker s extension This helps an employee who gets detained at a co worker s desk longer than expected To prevent losing important calls the employee can activate Follow Me from the co worker s phone Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension To reroute calls from the initiating forwarding extension use Call Forwarding Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows the setting of Follow Me Service Code of Follow Me is dial 846 Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 26 Follow Me In an extension s Class of Service 1 10 to an extens
93. digits numbering In addition factory technicians can make comprehensive changes to your system s number plan You can have factory technicians Set the number of digits in internal Intercom functions For example extension numbers can be up to four digits long Change your system s Service Code numbers Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you You can also use Flexible System numbering to change the system s Trunk Line Group Routing code Although the default code of 9 is suitable for most applications you can alter the code if you have to Conditions Programming follows a telephone s port number not the extension number If you relocate a phone you may need to change additional programming Default Setting Extensions are numbered consecutively from 200 port 01 to 271 port 72 Virtual Extension number not assigned The Trunk Line Group Routing access code is 9 Operator access code is 0 For Service Code first digit is 7 and 8 both are 3 digits long 700 899 Options None 228 Flexible System Numbering Cont d Programming In 0501 select 1st and 2nd digits you want to assign and then enter the digits and type 2 extension access Do you want to change the telephone port s extension number In 0502 select telephone port you want to change and then enter the
94. exact site requirements This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions The Ring groups assigned to each extension can access for incoming calls Ring Groups determine how Trunk Lines ring extensions Generally Trunk Line ring extension s only if Ring Group programming allows For example to make a Trunk Line ring an extension Assign the Trunk Line and the extension to the same Ring Group In the extension s Ring Group programming assign ringing for the Trunk Line The system allows up to 16 Ring Groups and any number of extensions and Trunk Lines can be in a specific group Extensions and Trunk Lines can be in only one Ring Group at a time If an extension has a line key for the Trunk Line Ring Group calls ring the line key If the extension doesn t have a line key the Trunk Line rings the line appearance key If an extension has a key for a Trunk Line that is not in its ring group the Trunk Line follows Access Map programming Incoming Trunk Access An extension user can answer an incoming call on a specific Ring line group The ring line groups assigned to each extension can access for incoming calls and audible assignments Day Night Midnight Rest for the extensions Ringing Recall Trunk Off Hook Access Ringing Recall Trunk Off Hook Access allows a ringing incoming call or recalling line to be answered by just lifting the handset Trunk Off Hook Signaling Trunk Off Hook Signaling
95. extension s ability to use Toll Toll Restriction override restriction override Override Transfer without On off an extension s ability to use Transfer holding Transfer without holding Group hold On off an extension s ability to initiate a Hold Group hold Group hold answer On off an extension s ability to pick upa Hold call on Group hold Note on gt Enable off Disable 108 Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 4 of 8 Trunk No and name display seizing Trunk No and name display incoming Extension No and name display conversation Extension No and name display incoming Intercom hotline Transfer information display 43 44 Not used Break In Monitor mode This option On off the displaying of a Trunk s name number when the user seizes the Trunk On off the displaying of a Trunk s name number when the Trunk is ringing On off the displaying of the incoming Intercom caller s name number after answer On off the pre answer display of the incoming Intercom caller s name and number On off Hotline Off Hook Access for extensions with this COS On off an extension s incoming Transfer pre answer display Set the extension s Break In Monitor Is used with Default Trunk Outgoing Call Name Storing Trunk Incoming Call Name Storing Intercom Name Storing Intercom Name Storing Hot Line Off Hook Access Trans
96. extensions 307 Last Number Dialing Description Last Number Dialing allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed For example a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits Last Number Dialing saves in system memory the last 24 digits a user dials The number can be any combination of digits 0 9 and The system normally uses the same Trunk Line group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific Trunk Line if desired Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows Last Number Dialing Service Code of Last Number Dialing is dial 816 Service Code of Clear Last Number Dialing is dial 876 Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 48 Last Number Dialing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Last Number Dialing gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 13 Last Number Dialing Assign a service code of Last Number Dialing gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 54 Clear Last Number Dialing Assign a service code of clear Last Number Dialing gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class Of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features Automatic Repeat Dialing The system can periodically redial an unanswered Trun
97. feature availability refer to the following table Operation 1 OP1 Automatic On Hook Transfer Operation 2 OP2 use TRFR key Operation 3 OP3 from Conference mode Note For the details of each operation refer to the Operation part lt Important Notice for Analogue to Analogue Conference gt If busy tone detection is not programmed for Analogue to Analogue then the extension user who made Unsupervised Conference should check the line condition by joining to the conference time by time For the operation refer to Operation part However if busy tone detection is programmed then the above operation is not necessary Refer to command 092 1 Item10 lt Important Notice for Program Setting gt In order to provide Unsupervised Conference feature on Analogue trunk command 0901 Item31 must be set to 1 for the trunk Case 1 lt Incoming amp Incoming gt N N N N Analogue Analogue Bam Analogue Yes Yes No wo m em ej fa e E ISDN Analogue Yes Ye No No Note 1 Conference feature is not available on the above condition Note 2 SLT user can not answer to 2nd Line while talking with 1st Line 516 Unsupervised Conference Cont d Description Cont d Case 2 lt Incoming amp Outgoing gt Ist Line 2nd Line Analogue E amp M Yes Yes Yes Yes Analogue ISDN Yes Yes Yes Yes E amp M Analogue Yes Y
98. fit in the display dial to see the entire number Press CLEAR To clear a One Touch Serial Operation 1 Dis Da Press idle CL key Dial 852 Press One Touch Key you want to delete Press the Serial Operations key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1034 Press SPK to hang up If you store a One Touch Key as part of a serial operation the system uses first level One Touch function 383 Paging Description The system allows the following types of paging e Internal Paging Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users The system allows up to 8 separate Internal Paging Zones and allows one internal all call paging group which not correspond to normal internal paging groups When a user makes a Page announcement the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions key telephone in the zone dialed An extension can be a member of one Internal Paging Zone Like External Paging Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension individually e External Paging With External Paging a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected to external Paging zones When a user pages one of these external zones the system broadcasts the announcement over the speakers Like Internal Paging External Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension individually Th
99. group s Internal Paging key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1006 0 and dial 0 OR Dial 801 and the All Call Internal Group number 0 3 Make announcement 4 Press SPK to hang up lt Single Line Telephone gt To Page a Paging Group 1 Off hook 2 Dial 801 and the Paging group number 1 8 3 Make announcement 4 On hook 391 Paging Cont d Operation Cont d Internal Paging Cont d To Page a Internal All Call Paging 1 Off hook 2 Dial 801 and the All Call Internal Group number 0 3 Make announcement 4 Press SPK to hang up External Paging lt Key Telephone gt To Page into an external zone 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 803 3 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for All Call OR Press External Paging key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1004 for External Paging zones or 1005 for External All Call Paging lt Single Line Telephone gt To Page into an external zone 1 Off hook 2 Dial 803 3 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for All Call Paging Combine lt Key Telephone gt To Page the Paging Combine 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 751 3 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 lt Single Line Telephone gt To Page the Paging Combine 1 Off hook 2 Dial 751 3 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 392 Park Hold Description Park Hold places a call in a waiting state called a Park Orbit so that an extension
100. gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 97 Answer on hook when holding SLT Assign a service code of Answer for On Hook Holding for SLT 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 20 Long time Holding Forced Disconnection Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps 1 16 This sets the access options for Trunk lines on Hold 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Setup Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps 1 16 This sets the access options for trunks on Hold 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment Assign Trunk Line Access Maps 1 16 to extensions 1003 Extension Department Groups Assign extensions to Department Groups 1 8 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Exclusive Hold code 1044 If an extension has its fixed Hold key reassigned in Program 0402 Item 4 assign a function key for System Hold code 1043 Related Features Music on Hold Callers on Hold hear Music on Hold if programmed Programmable Function Key An extension can have function keys for System Hold and Exclusive Hold 268 Hold Cont d Operation Normal Hold lt Key Telephone gt To place an outside call on System Hold 1 Press HOLD A line key flashes slowly while on Hold flashes fast when recalling To pick up an outside call on System Hold 1 Press flashing line key OR 1 Press TRER key to re answer lt Sing
101. have Trunk Line ring extensions assign extensions to ring groups 1 16 For each extension in the Ring Group indicate if Trunk Line should ring or not ring gt 0910 Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment To have the Trunk Line ring extensions assign Trunk Line to Ring Group gt 0911 Trunk Line Access Map setup Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps 1 16 This sets the access options for Trunk Line None that Ring Group programming overrides Access Map programming gt 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment Assign Trunk Access Maps 1 16 to extensions gt 1006 Programming Function Keys To simplify answering assign Trunk Line to function keys 497 Trunk Incoming Call Cont d Programming Cont d See also Direct Inward Dialing The Lines No Is trunk other than CO Yes Refer to program 0901 to loop start DTMF match the system to the eee In 0910 assign Trunk lines to Ring Groups Trunks that ring extensions the same way should If trunk is programmed to ring extension incoming access set in 0911 0912 is not required be in the same Ring Group A trunk can be in only one Ring group for each Night Service mode In 0911 set up the Trunk line Access Maps A trunk can be in more than one map Each map sets incoming outgoing options In 0909 assign Not Ri Ring In 0909 assign extension to Trunk INJ_ Should extension ring for extension to Trunk line s Ring Group an
102. have incoming 2nd VOICE CALL override voice announce Intercom Off hook Time and Date You dial Service Code 893 to have incoming Signaling 2nd SIGNALING override ring One Touch Dialing trk name You press a One Touch Key after seizing a ONE TOUCHnn digits trunk to outdial the number stored under the key where nn is the One Touch Key number One Touch Dialing KEY PROG ONE TOUCH You dial Service Code 855 to program a One Touch key One Touch Dialing You program a One Touch Key by dialing Service Code 855 and pressing the One Touch Key where digits displays current programming You press CHECK and a One Touch key to check the stored function where nn is the key number and digits is the stored code One Touch Serial KEY PROG FTR KEY You dial Service Code 852 to program One Operation Touch Serial Operations One Touch Serial CHECK LINE KEY nn You press CHECK and the Serial Operations Operation SERIAL SERIES key where nn is the programmable key number OPERATION One Touch Serial CHECK DSSnn FTR KEY You press a One Touch key twice to check the Operation key key ete stored Serial Operations where nn is the key y key number and key is the stored key function One Touch Serial Time and Date You press the Serial Operations key to begin Operation FTR KEY using One Touch Serial Operations Paging External Time and Date You make an All Call External Page PAGE EXT ALL Paging External Time and Date You make an External Zone
103. in the group called 864 Joining a Meet Me Page if your Meet Me Paging extension is not in the group paged 865 Joining an External Paging Group Meet Me Paging ae 867 Answering a call ringing another phone Call Pickup 1007 in another pickup group 868 Answering a call ringing a phone in Call Pickup 1009 another pickup group 869 Answering a call ringing a phone in Call Pickup 1008 another pickup group if you don t know the group s number 870 Canceling a Camp On Callback request Camp On Callback Extension Trunk a 871 Canceling Message Waiting you have Message Waiting left at a specific extension aa Ce 872 Answering for non ringing Trunk line by SLT 873 Canceling all Message Waiting you Message Waiting have left at other extensions P Temporality overriding an extension s Toll Restriction a Toll Restriction Override 876 Canceling number saved by Last Last Number Dialing Number Dialing 880 Initializing the DCI Data Communications Interface Note P is user password Introduction Cont d Table 1 1 Service Codes by Number Page 6 of 6 Service Code When you are For this feature Also ae Function Key 881 P Switching the Music on Hold Tone Music on Hold 83 8 Enabling the DCI auto answer mode Data Communications Interface 884 Disconnecting an active data call Data Communications Interface 885 Canceling the number saved by Saved Save Num
104. intercept all their calls An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users Default Setting No Secretary Call Pickup keys defined Options None Programming gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Secretary Call Pickup code 1032 Unlike Secretary Call you do not have to program a corresponding key at the source and destination extensions Related Features Follow Me An extension user can also have with Follow Me reroute a co worker s calls to themselves Secretary Call Buzzer Co workers can alert each other without disturbing their work 454 Secretary Call Pickup Cont d Operation To activate Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your Secretary Call Pickup key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1032 ext You hear a splash tone and your Secretary Call Pickup key lights Calls intended for covered extension ring your phone instead To cancel Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1032 ext To check a key s Secretary Call Pickup assignment 1 Press CHECK 2 Press your Secretary Call Coverage key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1032 ext 3 Press CLEAR 455 Selectable Ring Tone Description An extension user can change the way calls ring their phone Selectabl
105. is the same as the physical port Other two software ports follow 1 software port For example when you installed a 3DCI to 2 station port of the system the physical port of this 3DCI is 2 The software ports assigned to 2 3 and 4 Please note that you can not overlap software port of the DCI in other words you can connect the Key Telephone without DCI to station port 3 and 4 in above connection During programming you assign DCI extension numbers Department Group options and System options to DCI software ports not physical ports And due to the above rule 3DCI unit has to be connected between Ist and 6th port of each DSTU card Refer to the system Hardware Manual for more installation details 127 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 1 S Registers Page 1 of 3 Number of Rings The number of rings required Until Auto before the DCI port answers the iS auto answer Answer call 4 255 0 510 seconds Ring Count The register that stores the number 0 255 or rings detected by the DCI 0 510 seconds Escape The decimal value of the ASCII 0 127 decimal Character character used for Escape Carriage Return The decimal value of the ASCII 0 127 decimal Character character used for carriage return Line Feed The decimal value of the ASCII 0 127 decimal Character character used for line feed Backspace The decimal value of the ASCII 0 32 1
106. is used for this feature data 1 should be set 0921 Basic Trunk Port Setup Part B Item10 Busy Tone Detection Enable 0 or disable 1 for busy tone detection for cutting off the paths 518 Unsupervised Conference Cont d Programming Cont d In Program Should analogue line be y In Program s es g 0901 Item 31 available for Unsupervised _____5 0901 Item 31 enter 0 conference function enter 1 In Program Should extensions be able Yes In Program 0406 Item 76 to use automatic on hook 0406 Item 76 enter 0 transfer operation1 enter 1 In Program Should extensions be able In Program 0406 Item 16 to use a conference 0406 Item 16 enter 0 transfer operation3 enter 1 In Program 1005 assign a Class of Service to an extension 519 Unsupervised Conference Cont d Related Features Conference Conference should be activated in case that Operation 3 OP3 from Conference mode is used Operation lt Key Telephone gt Operation 1 Automatic On Hook Transfer 1 Conversation with 1st Line 2 Put Ist Line on hold 3 Seize 2nd Line answer to 2nd Line or place outgoing call 4 Conversation with 2nd Line 5 Go on hook Ist and 2nd Lines shall be connected BLF Lamp of both Line keys lights in red Operation 2 use TRFR key 1 Conversation with Ist Line 2 Put Ist Line on hold 3 Seize 2nd Line answer to 2nd Line or place outgo
107. presses SPK Programmable Function Key A Message Waiting key simplifies this feature s operation 359 Message Waiting Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To leave a Message Waiting This feature only available for key telephone 1 Call busy or unanswered extension 2 Dial 841 OR Press Message Waiting key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1023 OR Dial One Digit Service Code for Message Waiting Confirmation tone is heard 3 Press SPK to hang up Your MW LED lights To answer a Message Waiting 1 Press idle CL key and dial 841 OR Press Message Waiting key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1023 To display your Message Waiting list There are the messages left by other users at your extension 1 Press CHECK 2 Dial 841 3 Press VOL A or VOL to scroll through your messages Press your Messages Waiting key or and idle CL key to call the displayed extension 4 Press CLEAR to return to the time and date display To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 871 3 Dial number of extension you don t want to have your messages Confirmation tone is heard 4 Press SPK to hang up 360 Message Waiting Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To cancel all your Message Waiting This includes message you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you 1 Press idle CL key 2 Di
108. sensor for alarm type 1 and alarm ring tone 1 3 gt 0305 Alarm Sensor Activation Mode PGDU Card Program each alarm sensor for normally closed 0 or normally open 1 operation gt 1010 Alarm Sensor Ringing Extension Setup Determine which alarms should alert which extensions For each sensor enter to ring extension or 0 to not ring extension Related Features None Operation If you program an extension to activate for an alarm and the alarm occurs the alarm alert tone continues at the extension until the alarm condition goes away 218 External Call Forward Description This feature allows specified incoming callers GSDN DUD DISA DIL E amp M and Intercom to be transferred automatically to the pre programmed external party The destination telephone number for External Call Forward is stored in Common Abbreviated Dial area This feature may be used in case that the extension user is absent All incoming calls for him her shall automatically be transferred to his her desired external party ex Mobile Phone Conditions This feature is available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone Notel This feature is not available for normal incoming call on the normal line 0901 14_17 0 Note2 This feature is not available in case of Chained Call Forward eg Ext A forwards to Ext B Then Ext B sets Call Forward to ABBOO1 Note3 After the calling party has conn
109. set the Data 1 DCI auto answer mode Service Code Communications 883 Note on gt Enable off Disable 110 Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 6 of 8 This option Is used with Default 71 Time and date On off an extension s ability to set the Time and Date 1 on setting Time and Date Switching of Allows prevents an extension s ability to Intercom 1 on signal voice call switch the calling mode from voice to signal or vise versa 73 Microphone cutoff On off an extension s ability to use Microphone Cutoff 1 on Microphone Cutoff 74 Repeat redial On off an extension s ability to use Repeat Redial 1 on Repeat Redial Text message On off an extension s ability to use Text Text Message Message Automatic on hook On off an extension s ability to use Transfer transfer Automatic on hook transfer Automatic on hook On off an extension s ability to use Transfer sae Park Hold aaa on hook transfer for Park Se Not Used Used EAEE Call o an extension s ability to set External ow 0 Forward External Call Forward Forward Calling number On off an extension s ability to indicate ISDN Capability identification CLIP CLIP information on the LCD Advice of charge On off an extension s ability to indicate ISDN Capability AOC AOC information on the LCD Cost display On off an extension s ability to indicate TTU 0 off the cost information
110. the Voice Over function can be performed without any option except following types DX2E 16T LC2 TEL DX2E 16TXH LC2 TEL Default Setting An extension s COS allows it to receive Voice Over An extension s COS prevents it from automatically sending Voice Over Service code for Voice Over is dial 809 Service code for setting of forced Voice Over is dial 892 Service code for setting of forced Off hook Signaling is dial 893 One digit service code for Voice Over is no setting 534 Voice Over Cont d Programming An extension user can dial S An extension user can dial Service Code 892 to change Service Code 893 to change the mode to Voice Over Voice the mode to Ring In Program 0401 Item Ring Should Override ring Over In Program 0401 Item 11 enter 1 oo or voice over T 11 enter 0 Set Program 0406 No sa ee be Yes Set Program 0406 Item 5 to 0 Item 5 to 1 Voice Over Set Program 0406 Manually Should extension do Automatically Set Program 0406 Voice Over manually Item 6 to 0 Item 6 to 1 or automatically In 1005 assign a Class of Service to an extension Should extension have In Program 1006 assign a one button operation for function key for Override Voice Over code 1018 Do you change the Yes i Refer to Flexible Service Code for 1 System Numbering Voice Over feature In Program 0512 Service No 4 assign One Digit Service Code for Voice Over Do you use O
111. through TTU on the LCD Sub address On off an extension s ability to indicate ISDN Capability 0 off identification sub address information on the LCD Account code On off an extension s ability to enter Account Codes service Account Codes 85 Extension name On off an extension s ability to program Name Storing 1 on program its name Checking incoming On off an extension s ability to check the Selectable Ring 0 off ring tone Selectable Ring Tone Tone Notification of On off an extension s ability to indicate Caller ID Temporary Memory Temporary Memory existence during existence absence busy 88 Display the detail On off an extension s ability to indicate Alphanumeric O off state of called party busy status of B internal party Display Note on gt Enable off Disable Ate Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 7 of 8 This option Is used with Default Not Used Not Used Operator transfer On off an extension s ability to use after hold callback automatic transfer to operate after hold callback Direct Call Pickup On off an extension s ability to use direct Call Pickup 1 on own group call pickup to own group Enable on hook On off an SLT s ability to use on hook Hold 1 on when holding SLT when holding 94 Answer on hook On off an SLT s ability to answer on hook Hold t on when holding SLT when holding Ringing T
112. to a Department instead of an extension Transfer Without Holding A user presses a busy line key and waits for the call to complete The system automatically sends them the call when the internal caller hangs up Conditions This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone The retrieve feature is available only for Key Telephone Default Setting The Transfer Recall Time is 10 seconds An extension s Class of Service enables Unscreened Transfer An extension s Class of Service disables Transfer Without Holding An extension s Class of Service enables the Transfer pre answer display An extension s Class of Service enables Live Transfer The retrieve feature is not assigned Options None 490 Transfer Cont d Programming Should extension be allowed to place and In 0406 Item 11 No Unscreened Transfer Yes In 0406 Item 11 enter 0 enter 1 If disabled extension user cannot press a busy line key and wait for the internal caller to hang up In 0406 Item 34 No enter 0 Should extension be allowed to use Transfer Without Holding Yes In 0406 Item 34 enter 1 If disabled extension user must additionally press TRFR to Transfer a call In 0406 Item 76 No enter 0 Should extension have Automatic On Hook Transfer Yes In 0406 Item 76 enter 1 The pre answer display shows TRANSFER
113. to hang up Making Extension Page using your DSS Console 1 Press PAGE 2 Press DSS Console Extension Page zone key 1 8 If the zone you want is busy try again later External Page Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is The External Page zone is On Busy Off Idle Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console 1 Press GROUP 2 Press DSS Console Internal Page zone key Department Group key 1 32 If the zone you want is busy try again later Internal Page Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is The Internal Page zone is On Busy Off Idle 206 DSS Console Cont d Operation Cont d Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console 1 Press Night Service key NIGHT DAY BREAK or NITE 2 Night Service Busy Lamp Field When this key is ON The system is in the NIGHT Night Mode DAY Day Mode BREAK Rest Mode NITE2 Midnight Mode Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer 1 Press ALT You hear a short confirmation tone If you hear a long tone you cannot activate Alternate Answer In this case another user has already activated your console as his her Alternate Answer destination Alternate Answer Busy Lamp Field When the ALT key is Alternate Answer is On Enabled Off Disabled 207 Dual Line Appearance Description Each keyset has two line appearance keys CL1 and CL2 for placing and answering calls These line appearance keys assigned to the exten
114. up to 16 Voice Mail ports The level of integration between the Voice Mail system and the dX Z is dependant on the features the Voice Mail system supports The features available with the dX Z Voice Mail Integration are Call Forwarding Forward all calls to the Voice Mail system Forward calls on Ring No Answer to the Voice Mail system Forward calls on Busy to the Voice Mail system Forward Calls on Ring No Answer Busy to the Voice Mail system Message Waiting Key Telephone message waiting indication given on Message Key Key Telephone number of messages 01 32 Single Line Telephone distinctive message waiting dial tone Conversation Recording Key Telephones can record external calls into an individual mailbox Disconnect Detect Incoming caller disconnect detection for ISDN trunks E amp M trunks Internal calls and Analogue trunks with disconnect clearing 406 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Conditions Call forwarding options are available for Key Telephones and single line telephones A call forward on busy and ring no answer can be set simultaneously the key telephone display shows forward on no answer Key Telephones give message waiting on the Message key if no Message key is programmed message waiting will be given on the MW lamp Display Key Telephones also give the number of messages if the voice mail system provides this information Call forwarding diverts i
115. user may pick it up The system has up to 8 Park Hold Orbits After parking a call in orbit a user can Page the person receiving the call and hang up The paged party dials a code or presses a programmed Park Hold Orbit key to pick up the call With Park Hold it is not necessary to locate a person to handle their calls The held line will automatically be transferred to the other extension by going on hook after dial the desired extension number Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone An extension can park a call in any of the 8 Park Hold Orbits However an extension can only pick up a call Parked by a member of its own Park Hold group see Program 1014 Default Setting Hold Recall Callback Time is 30 seconds Park Hold Time is 30 seconds All extensions in Park Hold Group 1 No Park Hold Orbit keys defined All extension users can use On Hook Auto Transfer feature Options None 393 Park Hold Cont d Programming In 1014 assign all Should extension user In 1014 assign all extensions to different be able to pick up any extensions to the same Park Groups 1 8 parked call Park Group e g 01 In 1006 do not assign Should extension have In 1006 assign function function keys for Park l one button access to keys for Park Orbits Orbits code 1033 Orbit Park Orbits code 1033 Orbit number 1 8 number 1 8 In 0406 item T7 No Should extension have
116. user set up a Conference via Paging Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two party meeting via Paging Programmable Function Key In order for keyset to have conference it must have a conference function key Unsupervised Conference After the conference call is established the extension user can quit from the mode Operation lt Key Telephone gt To establish a Conference 1 2 3 Establish Intercom or Trunk call Press Conference key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1016 Dial extension you want to add OR Access outside call To get the outside call you can either press a line key or dial a trunk trunk group code When called party answers press Conference key twice Repeat steps 2 4 to add more parties 118 Conference Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To establish a Conference Cont d 1 Establish Intercom or Trunk call 2 Dial 826 3 Dial extension you want to add OR Access outside call To get the outside call you can either press a line key or dial a trunk trunk group code 4 When called party answers press HOLD key twice 5 Repeat steps 2 4 to add more parties To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties 1 Press HOLD key If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers the outside callers hear Music on Hold To hold all other parties in conference 1 Press Conference key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1016 2 Do n
117. while talking on the phone The system provides four variations of Handsfree operation Handsfree 25 55 5sieciceadeerielhecacccssentgnss cies User can place and answer calls by pressing SPK instead of using the handset One Touch Trunk Access User can press a line or line appearance key without first lifting the handset or pressing SPK Intercom Talkback 00 0000 0 User to respond to a voice announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone without lift the handset Monitor User can place a call without lifting the handset but must lift the handset to speak Conditions This feature available for Key Telephone with Handsfree circuit See the table below Handsfree is only available on keysets with handsfree circuit Keysets without handsfree circuit have Intercom talk back and Monitor circuit Model Name Previous Model DX2E 0T TEL Intercom Talkback and Monitor only DX2E 16T TEL Intercom Talkback and Monitor only DX2E 16TXH TEL Handsfree is available DX2E 24TXH TEL Handsfree is available DX2E 24TSXH TEL Handsfree is available DX2E 32T TEL Intercom Talkback and Monitor only DX2E 32TXH TEL Handsfree is available DX2E 16T LC2 TEL Intercom Talkback and Monitor only DX2E 16TXH LC2 TEL Handsfree is available New Model DX2E 12BTH TEL Handsfree is available DX2E 12BTXH TEL Handsfree is available DX2E 24BTUXH TEL Handsfree is available DX2E 24BTSXH TEL Handsfree is available
118. 0 In 2214 MSG2_TIME E In 2214 MSG2_TIME assign enter 0 the duration time to send a second delay message after receive a call or after start a first delay message 0 64800 sec Go to the following page C 282 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page C Should incoming call be In 2214 DISC_TIME disconnected after receive assign the duration time to second Incoming Queue disconnect a call after start Message VAU a second delay message In 2214 DISC_TIME enter 0 In 0414 Timer 4 assign the interval time between message and message 0 64800 sec Should outside caller listen RBT Int MOH or Ext MOH between message and message RBT Ext MOH Int MOH In 2214 TONE enter 0 to In 2214 TONE enter 1 to In 2214 TONE enter 2 to send a Ring Back Tone send a Internal Music On send a External Music Hold tone On Hold tone Go to the following page D 283 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page D Which is type of exchange line activated Incoming Queue Message VAU DUD DISA line 1 or 2 DDI 3 or DIL line 4 in CMD 0901 Te Or 2 In 1802 and 1803 assign In 1809 1810 1814 and In 0919 assign a a transferred Incoming 1815 assign a transferred transferred Incoming Ring Group if nobody Inco
119. 0 Hold Cont d Operation Cont d On Hook Holding for SLT lt Single Line Telephone gt To on hook when holding 1 When you holding 2 Dial 849 3 On hook To answer on hook holding 1 Off hook 2 Dial 859 271 Hot Line Description With a Hot Line a user can call another extension or outside party by just lifting the handset The call automatically goes through there is no need for the user to dial digits or press additional keys Hot Line is generally used for between internal frequent parties to talk with or for the external calls to information desk or the security center and so on After the Hot Line user lifts the handset Automatic Extension Call Outside call occurs after a programmable interval Depending on the setting of this interval the extension user may be able to place other calls before the Automatic Extension Call Outside call goes through Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone A Hot Line has no effect on an extension s current active call B The Hot Line user must lift the handset for Automatic Extension Call Automatic outside call to work C External Hot Line automatic call to system programmed common abbreviated dial number Default Setting The Hot Line Timer is 5 seconds Automatic Extension Call disabled in an extension s Class of Service No Hot Lines programmed Options None 272 Hot Li
120. 0052 Yes In 0905 assign Trunk to Trunk Line Group In 0906 assign extension to Trunk Line Group Rout In 1006 do not assign Should extension users have Trunk Group Access or one button access to Trunk trunk group keys line groups for placing calls In 1006 assign Outside Line Access keys code 1011 and or Line Group Access loop keys 1012 group number 509 Trunk Outgoing Call Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0405 System Timers Item 15 Pre selection time Set the pre selection interval 0 64800 seconds When a keyset user preselects a line key the system remembers the pre selection for this interval gt 0406 COS Options Item 62 Trunk Line outgoing In an extension s Class of Service enables Trunk Line calling gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 28 Trunk line group access Assign a Service Code for Trunk line group access gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 67 Specified Trunk line access Assign a Service Code for specified Trunk line access gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 11 DTD after line seize in manual dial mode Enable 1 or disable 0 dial tone detection for manually dialed Trunk line calls gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 18 Outgoing For each Trunk Line allow 1 or prevent 0 outgoing calls gt 0903 Trunk Line Names To make identifying calls easier assign a name to each Trunk Line gt 0905 Trunk Line G
121. 1 International call restriction table Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 the International Call Restrict Table Program 0702 Item 1 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 2 International call permit code table Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 the International Call Permit Table Program 0702 Item 2 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 3 Dial number length limit for local call Toll Restriction Class you select disable 0 or enable the dialing limit for local Calls When enabling select from entries 1 4 in Program 0702 Item 3 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 4 Maximum dial number length limit Toll Restriction Class you select disable 0 or enable the dialing limit for non local Calls When enabling select from entries 1 4 in Program 0702 Item 4 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 5 Common permit code table Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 the Common Permit Code Table Program 0702 Item 7 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 6 Common restriction table Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable the Common Restriction Table Program 0702 Item 8 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 7 Restriction for common abbreviated dials Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 Toll Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 8 Restriction for group Abbreviated
122. 1 8 Announce the call nA BW N When Paged party answers hang up to Transfer the call to them To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 Off hook 2 Dial 863 if your extension is the group called OR Dial 864 and the group number if your extension is not the group called If your extension is in the group called 3 Stay on the line After the Paging party hangs up you connect to the transferred call 340 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Description Paging with Personal Message permits incoming ring status will be informed by using recorded Personal Message through external paging speaker or internal paging zone phones Condition This feature is available for key telephone A If appointed paging zone is busy system will wait until paging zone becomes idle B If busy status of paging zone or VAU channel will continue over pre programmed duration VAU no answer timer system will transfer the incoming call to pre programmed station Default Setting All External Paging ports have gain number 1 0 dB Maximum duration of Paging announcement is 120 seconds Maximum duration of personal message time is 20 seconds An extension s Class of Service permits initiating External Paging An extension s Class of Service not permit Personal message All External Paging Zones are broadcasted a splash tone before the page announcement Service Code for Exte
123. 1205 DCI Toll Restriction Class For outgoing data calls set the Toll Restriction Class 1 8 used in program 0701 for each DCI port 1 72 1206 DCI S Register initial After changing register values in Program 1201 be sure to use this program to initialize the DCI port 0 72 0 All ports You must initialize a DCI software port before any changes made in Program 1201 will take effect 1207 DCI Hotline Assignment Use this program to set up a DCI Hotline between an extension with a DCI Module and a destination DCI When the user at the DCI Hotline originator presses the data key the system automatically calls the programmed destination Related Features Programmable Function Key A keyset with a Data Module must have a data key As an option keysets can also have Telemarketing Dial keys Station Message Detail Recording The system uses DCIs for SMDR and system reports 142 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Operation KEYSET ORIGINATED DATA CALL To place a keyset originated data call Your extension must have a data key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1029 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial DCI extension number The data key lights when the call connects If you see BUSY on your terminal display you may be able to type ATK Enter to Camp On Refer to Table DCI 4 for a description of the other Result Codes Refer to Table DCI 5 for a complete list of the Hayes compatible commands TERMINAL ORIGINATE
124. 27 Character character used as a backspace decimal Wait for Carrier During call setup sets time DCI 1 255 seconds After Dial waits for carrier from remote modem before hanging up Also Sets time DCI pauses when it encounters a W in the dial string Carrier Detect Minimum duration of valid carrier 1 255 Response Time signal 10 2550 mS Lost Carrier to Length of time DCI waits before 1 255 Hang Up Delay hanging up after loss of carrier 10 2550 mS must be greater than register 9 12 Escape Code Delay guard time before and after 0 1 255 50 Guard Time entering escape character 0 20 5100 mS 1 second 128 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 1 S Registers Page 2 of 3 Delay to DTR In synchronous mode sets interval 1 255 5 50 mS between connection and 10 2550 mS examination of DTR Also After connection sets minimum duration of valid DTR signal Packet size Sets the size of the data packet 0 255 255 Packets exceeding this size are 0 255 byte transmitted Packets less than this size are not unless timeout occurs see register 63 Terminate Code The decimal value of the ASCII 0 127 decimal code used to end terminate a command line Data Sets how long DCI waits before 0 1 255 Transmission transmitting an incomplete packet 0 50 12750 mS Hee ae Time Use register 61 to set packet size 0 disabled Result Code Allows prevents sending o
125. 3 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for caller Dial 803 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for All Call Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for paging On hook Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a of To operate OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b of To operate OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c of To operate CON DMHAARWN HE To answer Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message 1 Off hook 2 Dial 715 and specified extension number To operate the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message 1 Off hook 2 Dial 713 3 Hear To re record dial 7 to listen dial 5 to erase dial 3 4 a Dial 3 erase 5 a Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c 348 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message Cont d 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 b 5 c 6 c 7T c 8 c 10 c 11 c Dial 5 listen Listen the recorded Personal Message for caller Listen the recorded Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c Dial 7 re record Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for ca
126. 39 No enter 0 This is for the pre answer and Handsfree Answer back display In 0406 Item 40 No enter 0 Should extension user see the name number of an incoming Intercom caller before answering the call Yes In 0406 Item 40 enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Do you change the Service Code for Extension Number Program No Yes Refer to Flexible i System Numbering feature 368 Name Storing Trunk amp Station Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 40 Extension No and Name Display incoming In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying of the incoming Intercom callers name number This is for the pre answer and Handsfree Answer back display 0406 COS Options Item 85 Extension name input In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to program their name 0502 Extension Numbers and Names Program names for system extensions port 01 72 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 79 Extension name program Assign a service code for extension name program 0903 Trunk Line Names Program names for system Trunk Lines 01 52 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features Directory Dialing Digital Key Telephones with Larger Display use extension names for Directory Dialing Op
127. 724 An extension s Class of Service does not permit it to be used Forced Trunk Disconnection Options None Programming gt 0406 Class of Service Options Item 120 Forced Trunk Disconnection In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Forced Trunk Disconnection gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 14 Forced Trunk Disconnection Assign a service code for Forced Trunk Disconnection gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a class of service 1 10 to an extension Related Features None 236 Forced Trunk Disconnection Cont d Programming Cont d No Should extension be able yes In sarin 120 to use Forced Trunk In Cee 120 eerie i Disconnect T i In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Do yon change the Yes Refer to Flexible Service Code for i System numbering Forced Trunk feature i Disconnect ae e E NA j 237 Forced Trunk Disconnection Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To disconnect the busy trunk 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 805 lt Trunk Line Access code gt 3 Dial trunk port number 01 52 Busy tone is heard 4 Dial 724 5 Press SPK to hang up lt Single Line Telephone gt To disconnect the busy trunk 1 Off hook 2 Dial 805 lt Trunk Line Access code gt 3 Dial trunk port number 01 52 Busy tone is heard 4 Dial 724 5 On hook 238 General M
128. 8 Single Line Telephone Voice Mail Message Waiting Tone 0401 System Options Part A Item 18 SLT Answering mode Enter 1 for this option to enable Conversation Record 0405 System Timers Part A Item 65 Record Alert Tone Interval Time Sets the interval between record warning tone sent to line Item 1 Delayed Call Forwarding Time Sets the Ring No Answer Forward time 0516 Voice Mail Ports Dial Number Assign a Voice Mail pilot number Do not assign the same number the extension number of PC based voice mail ports 1001 Basic Extension Port Setup Item 5 Terminal Type Set all ASTU ports used for Voice Mail as type 1 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a Voice Mail Key to a Key Telephone code 1059 Optional Assign a Conversation Record key to a Key Telephone code 1060 1017 Assign Voice Mail Ports Assign one or more ports for connection of the Voice Mail system Related Features Forwarding calls to the Voice Mail system uses the existing call forward features One Touch keys can be used to simplify the call forwarding operation Programmable Function Key There are two keys specifically for Voice Mail system operation A function key defined as a Message key gives Voice Mail message waiting indication and simplifies both transferring calls to the Voice Mail system and accessing the Voice Mail system A function key defined as a Conversation Recording key allows Key Telephone users to record conver
129. 9 Abbreviated Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 15 Abbreviated Dialing DC Key Function Assign the extension s DC key for either Common 0 or Group 1 Abbreviated Dialing 0406 COS Options Item 18 Common Group Abbreviated Dial Registration In an extension s Class of Service allow 1 or prevent 0 the storing of Abbreviated Dialing entries Service Codes 853 and 854 0406 COS Options Item 19 Common Abbreviated Dialing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Group Abbreviated Dialing 0406 COS Options Item 20 Group Abbreviated Dialing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Group Abbreviated Dialing 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 23 Common Abbreviated dial Assign a service code for common abbreviated dialing code 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 24 Group Abbreviated dial Assign a service code for group abbreviated dialing code 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 68 Common abbreviated dial setting Assign a service code for common abbreviated dial registration code 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 69 Group abbreviated dial setting Assign a service code for Group abbreviated dial registration code 0603 Abbreviated Dialing Numbers Names Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names 0604 Trunk Group for Abbreviated dialing Assign the Trunk Group which is used for Abb
130. 901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 14 to 17 Service Type Assign each DIL Service Type 4 Make an entry for each Night Service mode gt 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Setup Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps All extensions should have at least Hold access to the DIL entry 3 Without Hold access transferred DILs and DILs on hold can be answered only while they are ringing or recalling gt 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment Assign Trunk Line Access Maps 1 16 to extensions gt 0917 DIL Assignment Set the destination extension for each DIL You make a different entry for each Night Service mode gt 0919 DIL No Answer Destination For each DIL with delayed ringing enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time Make an entry for each Night Service mode gt 1006 Programming Function Keys To have the DIL ring a key program a line key for the DIL trunk Related Features Call Forward Call Forward does not reroute DILs If an extension forwards their Trunk Line calls the Trunk Line rings according to Ring Group programming Trunk Outgoing Call You can place DILs in Trunk Line Group to make outgoing DIL calls easier Group Hunt A DIL cannot have an Extension Department Group as its destination Do Not Disturb If a DILs destination extension is in DND an incoming call rings according to Ring Group programming Call Pickup A us
131. AS Ony In Program 1004 assign Toll Restriction Class to extensions Do extension users want one button PBX transfer 399 Make an entry for each Night Service mode In Program 0901 Item 19 enter 1 to disable system Toll Restriction User must dial access code User cannot call PBX extensions In Program 0701 Item 10 enter 1 Restriction begins after user dials PBX access code In 0402 Item 2 assign the TRFR key for flash entry 2 In 0114 Item 9 set the flash duration PBX Compatibility Cont d Default Setting PBX call restriction disabled No PBX access codes entered Trunk Lines are DTMF have immediate ring detect and use CODEC gain 1 Trunk Lines are stand alone not set for behind PBX Toll Restriction enabled for all PBX Trunk Lines Options None Programming Cont d Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page gt 0114 Analog Trunk Line ATRU Card Timers If the TRFR key is set for transfer in Program 0402 Item 2 use this program to set the duration of the flash that occurs when a user presses the TRER key gt 0402 System Options Part B Item 2 Transfer key operating mode To simplify PBX transfer assign the TRFR key for flash entry 2 Set the duration of the flash in Program 0114 Item 9 gt 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item 10 Restriction of Calls Within PBX For each Toll Restriction Class enter 1 to restric
132. Assign a Class Of Service 1 10 to an extension 91 Call Pickup Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign Call Pickup keys Code 1007 for an extension s own Pickup Group Service Code 867 Code 1008 for a phone ringing in another Pickup Group Service Code 869 used when the caller doesn t know the group number Code 1009 Group Number for a phone ringing in another specific Pickup Group Service Code 868 gt 1012 Call Pickup Group Assign extensions to call pickup groups far each extension port Related Features None Operation lt Key Telephone gt To answer a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group 1 Press idle CL key 2 Press Group Call Pickup key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1007 OR Dial 867 To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don t know the group number 1 Press idle CL key 2 Press Group Call Pickup key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1008 OR Dial 869 To answer a Call ringing a phone in Pickup Specified Group 1 Press idle CL key 2 Press Group Call Pickup key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1009 OR Dial 868 and the group number 1 8 To answer a call ringing a phone without incoming Trunk in your Pickup Group 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 856 92 Call Pickup Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To answer a call ringing a specified extension 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 715
133. CI Hotlines programmed Options Key telephone with display and DX2E DCI A set OR Key telephone with display and DX2E DCI B set OR DX2E 3DCI A 136 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Programming In 0503 assign unused extension numbers to the DCI ports In 1202 DCI Type Parallel Is DCI software port an Serial In 1202 DCI Type for the DCI software RS 232 C serial or for the DCI software port enter 2 Centronics parallel port enter 1 parallel interface serial In 1202 DCI Sub In 1202 DCI Sub Do DCI s require i Type for the DCI Type for the DCI unique register software port enter software port enter option programming a unique sub type 1 for each sub type ep pro n 1 10 In 1201 for each sub type 1 10 set the values for the DCI S registers Resister Type 1 and LAPB X 25 packet switching resisters Resister Type 2 Do you want to change DCI software port s default communications options No You can also use Hayes commands to change S registers and other options Go to the flow chart on the following page 137 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page In 1204 assign DCI software ports to DCI Department Groups 1 8 Do you want to have DCI Department pooled operation In 0507 assign extension pilot numbers to the DC
134. CK 2 Press CL1 You display shows your telephone s extension number port number and extension Department Group lt Single Line Telephone gt To place an Intercom call 1 Off hook 2 Dial extension number or 0 for your operator Your call to key telephone may voice announce or ring the called extension To force your Intercom call to ring dial I or dial 812 after the extension number If the extension you call is busy or doesn t answer you can dial another extension without on hook To answer an Intercom call 1 Off hook To check your extension s data This feature is only available for key telephone 298 Intercom Abandoned Call Display Description Intercom Abandoned Call Display shows a display extensions user a lift of Intercom calls placed to them that they did not answer This is a convenience if a user has to temporarily leave their desk When they return they can display the list to find out who called while they were out Conditions This feature available for key telephone with display Default Setting Intercom Abandoned Call Display enabled Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 13 Intercom abandoned Call Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Intercom Abandoned Call Display gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class Of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features
135. CL key 2 Dial 870 OR Press Camp On key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1020 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Press SPK to hang up 102 Camp On Cont d Operation Cont d Callback Trunk lt Single Line Telephone gt To queue for a busy Trunk 1 Try to access busy Trunk 2 Dial 850 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Hang up to leave a Callback request OR Wait off hook to Camp On to the Trunk To answer when Callback Trunk calls you back 1 Lift handset To cancel a Camp On Callback Trunk request 1 Off hook 2 Dial 870 Confirmation tone is heard 3 On hook 103 Class of Service Description Class of Service COS sets various features and dialing options called items for extensions The system allows 10 Classes of Service and any number of extensions can share the same Class of Service An extension can have a different Class of Service for each of the Night Service modes This lets you program a different set of dialing options for daytime operation night time operation midnight time option and even during lunch breaks Conditions None Default Setting All extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes See the chart on the next page for the default setting on the individual options Options None Programming gt 0406 Class of Service Options Set the options in a Class of Service gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a
136. CL key 2 Dial Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code 3 Dial telephone number lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a call over a specific Trunk Line 1 Off hook and dial 805 2 Dial line number e g 005 for line 5 3 Dial telephone number To place a call over a Trunk Line group 1 Off hook and dial 804 2 Dial line group number 1 9 or 01 16 3 Dial telephone number 512 Trunk Outgoing Call Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To place a call using Trunk Line Group Routing 1 Off hook and dial 9 Trunk Line Group Routing Code 2 Dial telephone number To place a call using Off Hook Automatic Trunk Line Group Routing When this feature setting this telephone can not used normal intercom call and another features 1 Off hook 2 Dial telephone number 513 Trunk Port Disable Description Trunk Port Disable lets a user disables for each trunk all extension user place outgoing trunk calls For example when a trunk have trouble a trunk caller place trouble trunk by Trunk Line Group Access or Trunk Line Group Routing At this time Trunk Port Disable setting to trouble trunk a user can be place non trouble trunk by automatic avoiding for trouble trunk Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting Service Code for Trunk Port Disable is dial 745 An extension s Class of Servi
137. Cost Routing Description Nowadays not only one carrier public exchange supplier may provide the trunk lines to subscriber sites If one of local carriers offers you special discount then the system manager may think that all of the calls should be routed to the carrier s line In this case if the first digit for outside trunk is started from either 0 or 1 then LCR Least Cost Routing function shall control add delete change the digits for the line Conditions The feature is available for keyphone and single line telephone Default Setting The feature is not provided for any trunk lines Options None Programming gt 0901 Basic Trunk Port Setup Part A Item32 Least Cost Routing Enter 1 LCR ON or 2 LCR ON Cost Center Code only for the LCR trunk lines gt 3001 Digit Analyze Table gt 3002 Carrier Table gt 3003 Authorization Code Table gt 3004 Manual Code Table gt 3005 Manual Exemption Table 311 LCR Least Cost Routing Cont d Programming Cont d Should the trunk line be controlled with LCR for outgoing call No In 0901 Item32 enter 1 ON or 2 ON Cost Center Code only Analyze the first digit for outside line whether 0 or 1 or others Dial 2 9 Receive 2 more digits Do the 3 digits match to Manual Code Table in 3004 Receive 1 more digit Do the digits match to Manual Exemption
138. D DATA CALL To make sure your terminal is working properly 1 Type AT Enter OK displays on the next line If you don t see OK check the communications parameters of your DCI and communications software To place a call from your terminal 1 Type ATD nnn where nnn is the DCI extension you want to call 2 Press Enter You see CONNECT if your call goes through For an explanation of other Result Codes you may see refer to Table DCI 4 To reset your DCI from your telephone DCI Modules only Resetting your DCI Module drops the data call in progress 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 880 3 Press SPK to hang up 143 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Operation Cont d USING DCI HOTLINE To use DCI Hotline For DCI Hotline the calling source DCI must be a DCI Module installed in a telephone 1 Press data key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1029 on extension with DCI Module The system automatically sets up the call USING HAYES COMMANDS To use a Hayes command from your terminal Hayes commands let you dial numbers change DCI registers and set other options Refer to Table DCI 5 for a list of the Hayes commands available with the DCI 1 Type AT 2 Type the command plus any options then press enter If you use ATSx y to change S register values be sure to use AT amp W to save your entries ANSWERING DATA CALLS To answer an incoming data call Your data key flashes 1 Press flashing
139. DUD DISA Dial Tone Continues Variable 400 Hz at 16 dB for 100 mS then 520 Hz at 16 dB for 100 mS Key Touch Tone Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 1 Combination of See Table 1 4 High 1032 Hz 865 Hz 16 Hz Mid 582 Hz 416 Hz 16 Hz Low 421 Hz 360 Hz 16 Hz Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 2 Combination of See Table 1 4 High 2667 Hz 2000 Hz 8 Hz Mid 2000 Hz 1600 Hz 8 Hz Low 1455 Hz 1185 Hz 8 Hz Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 3 Combination of See Table 1 4 High 1778 Hz 1333 Hz 24 Hz Mid 889 Hz 711 Hz 24 Hz Low 438 Hz 360 Hz 24 Hz Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 4 Combination of See Table 1 4 High 2462 Hz 2286 Hz 25 Hz Mid 2000 Hz 1882 Hz 25 Hz Low 1524 Hz 1455 Hz 25 Hz Incoming Ring Tone Range Combination of See Table 1 4 High 800 Hz 1032 Hz 12 Hz Mid 604 Hz 865 Hz 12 Hz Low 400 Hz 640 Hz 12 Hz Alarm Sensor Ring Tone Combination of See Table 1 4 Range High 880 Hz 800 Hz 1000 Hz Mid 800 Hz 800 Hz 1000 Hz Low 800 Hz 800 Hz 1000 Hz es i e Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 1 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Idle telephone Date and Time Your extension is idle and on hook Ext No ext name Idle telephone CHECK You press CHECK to check a function Idle telephone You press CHECK and CL 1 to check ion i i is th CHECK ext No ext name extension information where ext is th
140. Dial 5 Dial message number 01 16 Os Oe ee eS Hear the recorded VAU message To erase the VAU message from outside This feature is not available for DUD caller 61 Automatic Repeat Dialing Description If an extension user places a Trunk call that is busy or unanswered they can have Automatic Repeat Dialing try it again later on The user doesn t continually retries it up to three times until the called party answers Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting The system waits 60 seconds between Automatic Repeat Dialing attempts After Automatic Repeat Dialing places a call the system waits 30 seconds for the called party to answer An extension s Class of Service permits Automatic Repeat Dialing Service Code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720 Options None Programming gt 0405 System Timers Item 36 Interval of Repeat Dial Set the internal between Repeat are dial attempts 0 64800 seconds gt 0405 System Timers Item 37 Repeat Dial Enable Call Set how long the system waits 0 64800 seconds for the called party to answer after an Automatic Repeat Dialing If the called party doesn t answer within this interval the system hangs up and tries again after the Automatic Repeat Dialing Time gt 0406 COS Options Item 74 Automatic Repeat Dialing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to u
141. Dial call forwarding code 843 for Divert on Busy 845 for Divert on Ring No Answer 848 for All Call Forward 3 Dial 0 to cancel 4 On Hook lt Key Telephone gt Voice Mail Message Waiting Indication When the Voice Mail systems sets message waiting for the key telephone the Message key flashes red If a Message key is not assigned the MW lamp flashes red Display your Message Waiting list If the Voice Mail system provides information on the number of voice mail messages the list can be interrogated by 1 Press CHECK 2 Dial 841 3 Press VOL up or VOL down to scroll through your messages The number of Voice Mail messages are shown first on the list followed by message waiting set by other extensions 4 Press CLEAR to return to the time and date display 411 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt Voice Mail Message Waiting Indication When the Voice Mail systems sets message waiting for the single line telephone the Signal Line Telephone dial tone changes to indicate there is a message waiting lt Key Telephone gt Accessing the Voice Mail system 1 Press your Message key OR Dial the Voice Mail system pilot number This establishes a call to the Voice Mail system lt Single Line Telephone gt Accessing the Voice Mail system 1 Dial the Voice Mail system pilot number This establishes a call to the Voice Mail syste
142. ER Destination doesn t answerwitinalowedtine 10 CONNECT 2400 Cat connected araoa a Connect 200 Catloomectes at 300 bau S Sd 22 CONNECT 600 Cat connected a soo baud 28 CONNECT 4800 cat connected a ae00aus CEET 24 CONNECT 0600 Cal conneetea aroso ra FET 25 CONNECT Call connected at 19200 baud ca EL SS 19200 26 CAMP ON SET After getting BUSY result code caller uses ATK aai Re e e to Camp On 27 CAMP ON FAIL Camp on attempt fails see CAMP ON SET ele a eed above 28 CAMP ON Extension waiting for CAMP ON to go through EAS eat eat at CALLBACK 133 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 5 Hayes Commands Page 1 of 2 Dial according to the value of n where n can be 0 9 A to D and in telephone number or soace used to make number easier to read but ignored at time of dialing Hang up disconnect current call i Row Version Returns the version on tne ROM chipinthe DCI ee rare After entering command mode by entering an escape Communication Mode sequence use ATQ to return to the communications mode ao ResuttGodesOn Result codes are displaye Register Contents The contents of register x are displayed e g S1 displays the contents of register 1 x two digits Sx y Change Register The contents of register X are changed to entry y x 2 digits Y 3 digits Vo Numeric Result C
143. External Paging Conference While on a call Hook Flash and dial 826 Dial 803 and the External Paging Group code 1 4 or 0 for All Call Announce the zone When co worker answers your page hook flash twice Repeat steps 2 4 for each co worker you want to add 334 Meet Me Paging Conference Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d Meet Me External Conference To join a Meet Me External Conference 1 Off hook 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone code 0 4 You connect to the other parties Meet Me Internal Conference To make a Meet Me Internal Conference 1 While on a call 2 Hook Flash and dial 826 3 Dial 863 if your extension is in the group called OR Dial 864 and the group number if your extension is not in the group called 335 Meet Me Paging Transfer Description If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co worker but they don t know where the co worker is they can use Meet Me Paging Transfer With Meet Me Paging Transfer the user can Page the co worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the co worker answer the Page Since Meet Me Paging Transfer works with both Internal and External Paging a call can be quickly extended to a co worker anywhere in the facility Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Meet Me Paging Transfer only permits two party conversations
144. Group Step Call In an extension s Class of Service allow 1 or prevent 0 an extension s ability to use Group Step Calling gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 60 Step Call Assign a service code of Step Call gt 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Service No 1 Step call Assign a one digit service code of Step Call gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key Group Step Calling code 1021 Related Features Group Hunt An extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department Group by dialing the group s pilot number Group Hunt also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group which simulates Step Calling 253 Group Step Calling Cont d Programming Cont d Does system have Department Groups programmed Set up Department Groups Refer to the Group Hunt feature In 0406 Item 21 enter 0 No to disable Step Calling Yes After calling a busy Department Group member should caller be able to step call to another group member Yes In 0406 Item 21 enter 1 to enable Step Calling In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 be sure not to No Should extension have N Yes In 1006 assign a Step Call key code 1021 assign a Step Call key i ing code 1021 one button Step Calling Do you
145. Headset key goes out when you disable headset mode To cancel headset mode 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 Press SPK to hang up When you cancel of Headset Mode by dial 720 these features are cancelled at same time DND Call Forward Repeat Dial Message Waiting Alarm Clock and Text Message 261 Hold Description Hold lets an extension user put a temporary waiting state The caller on Hold hears silence or Music on Hold not conversation in the extension user s work area While the call waits on Hold the extension user may process calls or use a system feature Calls left on Hold too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold There are five types of Hold Normal Hold An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key Gf programmed at all other keysets Any keyset user with the flashing line key can pick up the call Exclusive Hold When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold only that user can pick up the call from Hold The Trunk Line appears busy to all other keysets that have a key for the Trunk Line Exclusive hold is important if a user doesn t want a co worker picking up their call on Hold Group Hold If a user places a call on Group Hold another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up the call These let members of a department easily pick up each other s calls Intercom Hold A user can place an Intercom call on Ho
146. I A Call to DISA Trunk Waits for the DISA Trunk to automatically answer with Please enter your password Dial the 6 digit DISA password access code Used DTMF tone Hear Automated Attendant Message Dial 716 Dial the 6 digit VAU password Dial 7 Dial VAU message number 01 16 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording VAU message To confirm the VAU message from outside COON DUAKRWN EE Call to DISA Trunk Waits for the DISA Trunk to automatically answer with Please enter your password Dial the 6 digit DISA password access code Used DTMF tone Hear Automated Attendant Message Dial 716 Dial the 6 digit VAU password Dial 5 Dial message number 01 16 Hear the recorded VAU message To erase the VAU message from outside This feature is not available for DISA caller 60 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt DUD Outside Caller gt To record the VAU message Automated Attendant Message and Automated Attendant Error Message from outside 1 Call to DUD Trunk Hear Automated Attendant Message Dial 716 Dial the 6 digit VAU password Dial 7 Dial VAU message number 01 16 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt COT ON SON ae ob Recording VAU message To confirm the VAU message from outside Call to DUD Trunk Hear Automated Attendant Message Dial 716 Dial the 6 digit VAU password
147. I Department Groups In 1205 assign each DCI In 1205 assign each DCI software port to a non Do you want to Toll software port toa restrictive Toll Restriction Restrict outgoing restrictive Toll Restriction Class 1 8 Also refer to trunk DCI calls Class 1 8 Also refer to the Toll Restriction feature the Toll Restriction feature rene In 1207 set DCI Hotline oueeior originator and target nailed up extension numbers connections If you don t initialize any changes you made in 1201 won t take effect In 1206 initialize DCI software port Go to the flow chart on the following page 138 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page In 1006 assign a Is DCI a DCI Module j installed in a keyset data key code 1029 to the keyset In 0406 Item 70 enter 1 Should keyset be able to set DCI Automatic Answer Service Code 883 In 0406 Item 70 enter 0 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Continued on following page 139 Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page Is the terminal connected to the DCI software port also for SMDR Is the terminal connected to the DCI software port also for system reports Is the terminal connected to the DCI software port also for the alarm report No In 0130
148. ISDN BUSINESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM OKZ Software Manual Issue 2 0 April 1999 Nitsuko Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be and this manual does not constitute a warranty of or representation with respect to any of the equipment covered This manual is subject to change without notice and Nitsuko has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual Further Nitsuko also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate No representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in all respects and Nitsuko shall not be liable for any errors or omissions In no event shall Nitsuko be liable for any incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this manual No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of Nitsuko 1999 by Nitsuko Corporation All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan Table of Contents Cont d Features Page IAtrOdUCtO Meee reer e rr E on ee ee eee ene at er tre eum meer ree rere errr erat 1 Abbreviated Dialing iat cicicecuscecttesee ci EE ita 27 Account Code Optional Forced ccccceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeees 34 PAG Ooo ec ote ee re aaah cena nana emanating 38 Alphanumeric Display cccccecceeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseseneneeeeeeees 42 Audio Communication Interface ACI cceeeeeeeeee
149. In 1006 make sure a ere Bitton peaptor cals function key is not pean assigned code 1008 A a cals In 1006 assign a function key code 1008 Continued on following page Call Pickup Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page Use Service Code 868 when the ringing group number is known In 0406 Item 10 enter 1 Should extension be able to pick up a call ringing in another known Pickup Group Service Code 868 In 0406 Item 10 enter 0 Should extension have one button pickup for calls ringing another known pickup Group In 1006 do not assign a function key code 1009 Pickup Group number In 1006 assign a function key code 1009 Pickup Group number After picking up a call should ae extension s display show PJ In 0406 Item 51 number of trunk intercepted enter 1 or Pickup Group Trunk In 0406 Item 51 enter 0 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Do you change the Service Code for Call pickup for n Refer to Flexible specified group Call pickup Yes J Call pickup for another eee group and Specified extension call pickup No Call Pickup Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 8 Call Pick Up In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to pick up calls ringing their pickup group Service Code 867 0406 COS Options I
150. Item 17 DTMF Receiver Active Time 0405 Item 34 DUD DISA Dial Tone Time When DUD caller rings an extension does the system In 0405 Item 35 ring for an adequate time change the DUD No before setting the call as Answer Time Ring No Answer 213 DUD Direct Universal Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 34 DUD DISA Dial Tone After answering the DUD trunk the system waits this interval 0 64800 seconds for the caller to dial the first digit of extension number If the caller fails to dial within this interval the system drops the call 0405 System Timers Part A Item 35 DUD DISA Answer A DUD caller can ring an extension for this interval 0 64800 seconds before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer After this interval expires the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing see Program 1802 below 0405 System Timers Part A Item 53 Automatic answering telephone set no answer Set the answering waiting time of automatic answering extension when incoming DUD Trunk line 0 64800 seconds 0405 System Timers Part A Item 54 Automatic answering telephone set disconnect Set the announcement time of automatic answering extension when incoming DUD Trunk line 0 64800 seconds 0405 System Timers Part A Item 55 Talkie ACI disconnect Set the announcement time of Talkie ACI when incoming DUD Trunk line 0 64800 seconds 0405
151. Item 59 Trunk line incoming ring tone switching Assign a service code of changing Trunk line incoming ring tone 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 80 Check of ringing tone Assign a service code of ringing tone check 0902 Trunk Line Ring Tone Set the ring tone range 1 4 for each Trunk Line 1001 Basic Extension Port Setup Part A Item 2 Trunk Line Incoming Ring Type From the range specified in Program 0902 select the keyset extension s Trunk Line ring tone High 1 Med 2 Low 3 Refer also to Trunk Line Ring Tone on Table 1 6 1001 Basic Extension Port Setup Part A Item 3 Extension Incoming Ring Type Select the extension s intercom ring tone High 1 Med 2 Law 3 Refer to Extension Ring Tone Range on Table 1 6 1001 Basic Extension Port Setup Part A Item 6 Ringing Cycle Select the incoming call ring cycle for Single Line Telephone sets The choices are 0 short bursts or 1 long bursts 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1008 Basic Extension Port Setup Part B Item 4 Ringing Tone Cycle Set the incoming call ring cycle for each keyset extension The choices are two bursts with a pause 0 continues 1 or single short burst with a pause 2 169 Distinctive Ringing Tone amp Flash Patterns Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To listen to the incoming ring choices 1 2 3 3 Press idle CL key
152. Line Calls Placing Except for dialing the PBX access code users place calls on PBX Trunk Lines just like other Trunk Lines All of the relevant access programming applies Refer to the Central Office Calls Placing feature for more details Direct Inward Lines You can have DILs route from the connected PBX Users can access these Trunk Lines for outgoing PBX calls All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply Flash Flash may allow access to certain PBX features like Transfer Make sure you program Flash for compatibility with the connected PBX Pulse to Conversion The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the PBX Trunk Line access code Toll Restriction PBX Trunk Lines can follow normal system Toll Restriction Refer to the programming chart on the previous page Trunk Line Groups and Trunk Line Group Routing e Users can get outbound access to PBX Trunk Lines through Trunk Line Groups and or Trunk Line Group Routing All Compatibility restrictions and programming apply e Ifthe system routes a call to a PBX Trunk Line it does not automatically insert the PBX access code It outdials the call just as the user dialed it 401 PBX Compatibility Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place a call over a PBX Trunk Line 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 804 3 4 Dial PBX access code and number Dial PBX Trunk Line group number 1 9 or 01 16 OR
153. NE DURATION STATION DIALED No CLI RD COST ACCOUNT 01 POT 10 1010 12 001 00 01 10 EXT200 044813710X 463 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Programming Is DCI installed Yes programmed and Go to Programming Flowchart on the next page functional In Program 1201 Type 1 Item 1 register 65 set DCI communications parameters to match the SMDR device In Program 1202 Parallel Is SMDR device serial Serial In Program 1202 set port type to 2 or Parallel interface set port type to 1 Centronics parallel RS 232 In Program 0503 assign an unused extension number e g 500 to the DCI port In Program 1206 initialize the DCI port used for SMDR Will SMDR printer Yes In Program 0007 enter the also be used for system reports SMDR DCI port number as the system report port number Will SMDR printer Yes In Program 0008 enter the also be used for SMDR DCI port number as the alarm reports system report port number Go to Programming Flowchart on the next page 464 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Do you want American European or Japanese data format in the SMDR header In Program AMANGAN eurepedt In Program 0130 enter 0 0130 enter 2 Japanese In Program 0130 enter 1 In Program 0901 Item 13 Should SMDR record
154. Page where nn PAGE EXT GROUP nn is the external zone number One Touch Dialing CHECK DSSnn gt Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 9 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Paging Internal Time and Date You dial 801 to access an Internal Paging Zone ZONE or 803 for an External Paging Zone Paging Internal You press 801 and an internal zone number where name is the Internal Paging Zone name Time and Date GROUP CALL name Paging Internal Another extension makes an Internal Page to Time and Date your paging group where ext name is the ROE Ores AGEnEME name of the extension that initiated the page Paging Internal KEY PROGRAM KEY nn You dial Service Code 851 and Programmable PAGE EXT ALL Function Key code 1005 Programmable KEY PROGRAM KEY nn You press a function key after dialing Service Function Key Code 851 where function is the currently function programmed function as follows For this key function You see this display CALL FORWARD FOLLOW ME TRANSFER BUSY TRANSFER NO ANS PAGE GROUP 0 PAGE EXT ALL PAGE GROUP ICM 0 CALL PICK UP OTHER GROUP PICK UP GROUP PICK UP MEET ME PAGE LINE ACCESS LINE GRP ACCESS 0 Not used SAVED NUMBER REDIAL MEMO DIAL CONFERENCE MEET ME CONF cae pee Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 10 of 13 With this feature You ll see this disp
155. Press PBX Trunk Line group key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1012 Dial PBX access code and number OR Press idle CL key 2 Dial 9 ere weet aes Dial PBX access code and number OR Press PBX Trunk Line Group Routing key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1011 Dial PBX access code and number OR Press idle CL key Dial 805 Dial PBX Trunk Line number e g 005 for line 5 Dial PBX access code and number OR Press PBX Trunk Line key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1 to 52 Dial PBX access code and number Note In all cases above Toll Restriction may prevent your call 402 PBX Compatibility Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a call over a PBX Trunk Line 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 804 3 4 Dial PBX access code and number Dial PBX Trunk Line group number 1 9 or 01 16 OR Press idle CL key 2 Dial 9 ae a Dial PBX access code and number OR Press idle CL key Dial 805 Dial PBX Trunk Line number e g 005 for line 5 Dial PBX access code and number Note In all cases above Toll Restriction may prevent your call 403 PC Attendant Description Your PC can be performed as like operator console For the installation PC Attendant interface board should be inserted in your PC And either headset or handset shall be connected with the board The board shall be connected to one of DSTU port By installing PC At
156. Private Line to an unused Private Line access map gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Make sure extension has a line key for the Private Line 437 Private Line Cont d Related Features Call Forwarding Private Lines do not follow Call Forwarding Line Preference An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line Prime Line Selection A Private Line can also be a Prime Line Toll Restriction Private Lines follow normal Toll Restriction Transfer An extension user can Transfer their Private Line Since other users have hold access see Programming the destination can answer the transferred Private Line and place it or Hold Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place a call on your Private Line 1 Press Private Line key 2 Dial number OR 1 Press idle CL key and dial 805 2 Dial private line number e g 005 for line 5 To answer a call on your Private line 1 Press Private Line key lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a call on your Private Line 1 Off hook 2 Dial 805 3 Dial private line number e g 005 for line 5 To answer a call on your Private line 1 Off hook 438 Programmable Function Key Description Each keyset has Programmable Function Keys Programmable Function Key simplify placing calls answering calls and using certain features You can customize the function of a keyset s programmable keys from your adm
157. RK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone 3 4 Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone or Ext 200 Busy SLT hears Busy tone 5 TRK1 transferred to Ext 200 6 Call recalls at SLT after timer if RNA or immediately if Busy SLT answers and hears either 4 0 0 1200 Busy or 5001200 RNA 6001 sent to SLT MOH to TRK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone SLT connected to Ext 200 SLT connected to TRK1 Ext 200 goes on hold TRK1I hears 7 6001 sent to SLT 2 MOH to TRK starts SLT hears fast dial tone Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone SLT connected to Ext 200 TRK1 connected to Ext 200 6001 sent to SLT MOH to TRK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone SLT connected to Ext 200 SLT hears 9999 MOH to TRK1 stops SLT hears normal dial tone SLT connected to TRK1 PC Programming Remote Maintenance Description PC Programming software package shall be offered from Nitsuko By this software your PC can access to the dX Z96 system locally or remotely for system programming purpose For local PC Programming application your PC shall be connected to DCI A unit installed in the keyphone For remote PC Programming application ISDN line is preferred to use for direct connection For either case LAPBU S1 should be installed in the system For the details refer to dX Z 96 328 Remote Maintenance Terminal Handling Manual
158. Ring Busy Transfer Unanswered Call Transfer and Common Canceling code Yes H Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature 75 Call Forward Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0405 System Timers Item 1 Delayed Call Forward Time Set the Delayed Call Forward interval 0406 COS Options Item 23 Call Transferring with both rings In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to set Call Forward with Both Ringing Service Code 842 0406 COS Options Item 31 Call Transfer When Busy In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to set Call Forward when Busy Service Code 843 0406 COS Options Item 32 Unanswered Call Transfer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to set Call Forward when Unanswered Service Code 845 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Assign a service code for Call Forward with Both Rings Item 3 dial 842 Unanswered Call Transfer Item 62 dial 845 Busy Transfer Item 63 dial 843 Call Forward Item 85 dial 848 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Assign a service code for Common Canceling Service Code Item 10 dial 720 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Call Forward with Both Ringing code 1000 Busy Transfer code 1002 Unanswered
159. SA caller makes an Internal Page does the In 0405 Item 75 system allow the Page to change the DISA continue for an adequate Internal Paging Time duration When DISA caller makes an External Page does the In 0405 Item 76 system allow the Page to change the DISA continue for an adequate External Paging Time duration 178 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 17 DTMF receiver active timer After answering the call the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the DISA Trunk Line for this interval 0 64800 seconds 0405 System Timers Part A Item 34 DUD DISA dial tone After answering the DISA trunk the system waits this interval 0 64800 seconds for the caller to dial the first digit of password If the caller to dial within this interval the system drops the call 0405 System Timers Part A Item 35 DUD DISA Answer A DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval 0 64800 seconds before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer After this interval expires the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing see Program 1802 below 0405 System Timers Part A Item 53 Automatic answering telephone set no answer Set the answering waiting time of automatic answering telephone after DISA caller dial DISA password 0405 System Timers Part A Item 54 Automatic answering telephone set disconnect Set the an
160. Table in 3004 Delete 3 digits Less than How many digits 4 digits are received 4 digits Get Carrier Table Number Send All digits to the trunk line 312 LCR Least Cost Routing Cont d Programming Cont d Receive 1 more digit Do the digits match Get Carrier Table to an entry data in Number Digit Analyze Table in 3001 Less than 6 digits 6 digits Carrier Table Number No 1 Fixed Setting 313 LCR Least Cost Routing Cont d Programming Cont d This part of programming shall be applied to UK market hasicallv Dial Access Code to the Trunk Line by 3002 Change to DTMF Pause Is Authorization Code set No Get Authorization Code Table Number from 3002 Dial Authorization Code from 3003 to the trunk line Dial Cost Center Code Is Cost Center from 3002 to the trunk line Code set Repeat all dialed digits to the trunk line Related Features None Operation Normal outgoing operations by user 314 Line Preference Description Line Preference determines how a keyset user places and answers calls There are two types of Line Preference Incoming Line Preference and Outgoing Line Preference Incoming line Preference Incoming Line Preference establishes how a keyset user answers calls When a call rings the keyset lifting the handset answers either the ri
161. Waits for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone Dials the 6 digit DISA password access code Dials the system extension directly or feature access service code DUD DISA Talkie This system can be automatic announce to DISA caller from DUD DISA Talkie DUD DISA Talkie can be assigned 3 port ACI SLT port or VAU Audio system ex Tape recorder connected to 3 port ACI Automatic answer system ex Automatic answering telephone connected to SLT port DUD DISA Talkie announces extension numbers and service codes to DISA caller for practical use To use DISA with DISA Talkie the outside caller Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line Waits for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone Dials the 6 digit DISA password access code Hears guidance message from DISA Talkie e x extension numbers for each member and feature access service code Hears unique dial tone again Dials the system extension directly or feature access service code Answering Extension Call for DISA DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls If an extension has a line key for the DISA Trunk Line the call rings that key If the extension does not have a line key the call rings an idle CL key Automatic Transfer to Incoming Ring Group conditionally If DISA call is not completed due to dial tone time over busy no answer or wrong number the system automatically shal
162. Yes In 0406 item T7 enter 0 On Hook Auto Transfer enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions If the Park Hold Time is too short calls recall before the paged callers can pick them up Is the time that unretrieved calls remain parked adequate In 0405 Item 66 change the Park Hold Time Is a parked call recalls does it ring the extension that parked it for an adequate time In 0405 Item 27 change the Hold Recall Callback Time Yes Do you change the Service Code for Park Hold and Answer for Park Hold Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature 394 Park Hold Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0405 System Timers Item 27 Normal hold callback timer A call left park held too long recalls the extension that initially park held it for this interval 0405 System Timers Item 66 Park hold callback time Set the Park Hold Timer 0 64800 seconds A call left park held longer than interval will recall the extension that initially park held it 0406 Class of Service Options Item 77 On Hook auto transfer Park Hold On hook auto transfer for Park Hold is defined either enable 1 or disable 0 in extension s Class of Service 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 55 Park hold Assign a service code for park hold is dial 831 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 56 Answer for park hold Assign a service code for answer for park
163. a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function keys as a Room monitor key code 1025 for both the extension being monitored and the extension initiating Room Monitor Related Features Programmable Function Key Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys Operation You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you want to monitor You can only listen to one extension at a time lt Key Telephone gt To activate Room Monitor by KTS at the initiating extension l 2 3 Do not lift handset and do not press SPK Press Room Monitor key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1025 Dial number of extension you want to monitor Confirmation tone is heard Room Monitor key shows slow flashing You can place and answer to other calls while Room Monitoring is activated 446 Room Monitor Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To activate Room Monitor by KTS at the extension to be monitored 1 Do not lift handset and do not press SPK 2 Press Room Monitor key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1025 3 Dial your own extension number Confirmation tone is heard Room Monitor key shows fast flashing You can place and answer to other calls while Room Monitored is activated To cancel Room Monitor by KTS at either extension 1 Press Room monitor key Confirmation tone is heard lt Single Line
164. a Internal Music On send a External Music Hold tone On Hold tone Go to the following page B 280 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d ontinued from previous page B Should extension be allowed to activate Manual Incoming Queue Message VAU for incoming call In 1006 assign the Incoming Queue Message VAU key code 1082 Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature Do you want to change the Service Code for operation of VAU Message Which is type of exchange line activated Incoming une In Program 091 9assign Queue Message VAU transferred Incoming normal line 0 or DDI on Ring Group ISDN 3 in Program 0901 In 0405 Timer 62 assign DIL transfer time Item 14 to 17 281 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d For Case 3 4 and 5 Should incoming call be In 2214 MSG1 enter 1 to received first Incoming 16 for your recorded VAU Queue Message VAU from message or 17 for Fixed VAU message In 2214 MSG1 enter 0 In 2214 MSG1_TIME enter 0 In 2214 MSG1_TIME assign the duration time to send a first delay message after receive a call 0 64800 sec In 2214 MSG2 enter 1 to 16 received second Incoming for your recorded VAU Queue Message VAU from message or 17 for Fix VAU message Should incoming call be In 2214 MSG2 enter
165. a client s telephone number When Directory Assistance plays back the requested number the caller can use Memo Dial to jot the number down in the telephone s memory They can quickly call the Memo Dial number after hanging up When a user enters a Memo Dial number the dialed digits do not output over the Trunk Line Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress Conditions This feature available for key telephone When Memo Dial calls out it outside the entire stored number Memo Dial does not automatically strip out Trunk Line or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number Default Setting Memo Dial enabled Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 47 Memo Dial In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Memo Dial gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Memo Dialing code 1015 354 Memo Dial Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 47 Should extension be able enter 0 to use Memo Dial Assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 assign a Memo Dial key code 1015 In 0406 Item 47 enter 1 355 Memo Dial Cont d Related Features Last Number Dialing Quickly redial the last number dialed Saved Last Number Dialing Save the last outside nu
166. aah ee tena lea eect enced akmhcned 506 Trunk Port DiSable c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenecaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaees 514 Unsupervised Conference cccccsssecceesesseeeeeesesseeeeeesesseeseeeeessceseess 516 VAU Fixed Message VA diie 522 Virtual Extension sci o 3is5 3soctcdetpnenedetyo ected aaeeateias sad dabededeaate bad sedated 523 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot tyPe 0 0 0 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 526 VOICEOVER od nie ea ial iu aas eed tie Mideast aati ea 534 VOILE Controlman nen naa a xe aaay 538 Walking Toll Restriction ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaees 539 Revision No DX2E 001 2 0 RECORD OF REVISION Description of Change Initial Release Renewal Issue for 2 2A version Introduction Before Reading This Section This section provides detailed information on the system s features If you don t know what the various features are review the Table of Contents for this section and the manual s Index After reviewing turn back to this section for the specifics Using This Section The features in this section are in alphabetical order like a dictionary This section subdivides each feature definition into heading as follows Description tells what the feature is and describes its benefits Along with the Description are the Conditions and the Default Setting Conditions provide the feature s operational limits if
167. able 1 1 Service Codes by Number Page 2 of 6 Service Also see For this feature Function Key D ADO for trouble trunk Trunk Port Disable voll ona eil A Data 747 Indicate Caller ID table Indicate Caller ID Table 1084 750 Withdraw from Station Group STG Withdraw 1074 Tole i Make Combine paging to external zone Paging Combine and internal zone Enter personal code Personal Code 752 754 Set conversation record from SLT Conversation Record NVM series from SLT 761 Set personal speed dial Personal Speed Dial OoOo 63 Set Walking Toll Restriction Walking Toll Restriction C 70 Set SLT room monitor SLT Room Monitor E ee 771 Display the charged cost by Supervisor Charge Cost Display phone 772 Answer the specific trunk line Specified Trunk Answer GE Set station park hold Station Park Hold CE 780 Set the mode for all member to ringin STG All Ring Mode station group a Extension names program Name Storing Making an Internal Page Paging Internal a a N External group zone paging External Paging External all paging 804 0 9 Placing an outside call over a Trunk Trunk Outgoing Call 1012 0 9 00 16 Line group 00 16 805 Placing a call over a specific Trunk Line Trunk Outgoing Call 0001 0128 access 806 Flashing to Trunk Line from a S L T Flash a 8 07 Activating Do Not Disturb and Call DND FWD override 1022 Forward Bypass call Bypass call In
168. ail called DX2E VM A C had been offered The unit shall be connected to a digital station port However the production had been discontinued already In the 2nd release slot type of voice mail called DX2E PVMU S1 has been offered The unit shall be inserted into the main equipment For the functions and operation procedures of previous box type DX2E VM A C refer to HOW TO USE VOICE MAIL BOX Concise User Guide Following functions are added on the DX2E PVMU S1 newly Maximum Recording Capacity Selection The maximum recording capacity can be selected 15 hours or 30 hours by programming It shall be defined depend on the ADPCM type for Hard Disk Automatic Erasing for Left Message The left messages can automatically be erased in accordance with programming This programming can be set for Day base Recording Restriction Nobody can leave a message to the assigned Mail Box This feature can be set canceled by each extension user Left Messages Displaying only Large Display Key Telephone user The Large Display Key Telephone user can select whether left messages are displayed replayed from old message or new message Skip only Large Display Key Telephone user During replaying the left message the Large Display Key Telephone user can skip it by pressing SKIP key And also BACK SKIP key is provided The Skip Duration Time can be set at each Large Display Key Telephone 8 16 24 32 40 second
169. al 720 When you cancel an alarm clock by dial 720 these features are canceled at same time DND Call Forward Repeat Dial Message Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message lt Single Line Telephone gt To set the alarm clock 1 Off hook 2 Dial 827 3 Dial alarm clock type 1 or 2 Confirmation tone is heard Alarm clock I sounds only once Alarm clock 2 sounds each day at the preset time 4 Dial the clock alarm time 24 hour clock Confirmation tone is heard For example for 1 15 PM dial 1315 5 On hook To silence an alarm clock 1 Off hook Music on hold tone is heard 2 On hook To check the programmed alarm clock time This feature only available for key telephone with display To cancel an alarm clock 1 Off hook 2 Dial 827 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 Confirmation tone is heard 4 Dial 9999 Confirmation tone is heard 5 On hook OR 1 Off hook 2 Dial 720 3 On hook When you cancel an alarm clock by dial 720 these features are canceled at same time DND Call Forward Repeat Dial Message Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message A Alphanumeric Display Description Key telephone with display has a 2 line 20 character per line alphanumeric display that provides various feature status messages These messages help the display telephone user process calls identify callers and customize features Refer to Table 1 4 at the beginning of this s
170. al 873 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Press SPK to hang up OR 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 Press SPK to hang up When you cancel of Message Waiting by dial 720 these features are cancelled at same time for DND Call Forward Repeat Dial alarm clock Headset Mode and Text Message lt Single Line Telephone gt To leave a Message Waiting 1 Call busy or unanswered extension for key telephone 2 Dial 841 or One digit service code for Message Waiting Confirmation tone is heard 3 On hook To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension 1 Off hook 2 Dial 871 3 Dial number of extension you don t want to have your messages Confirmation tone is heard 4 On hook 361 Message Waiting Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To cancel all your Message Waiting 1 Off hook 2 Dial 873 Confirmation tone is heard 3 On hook OR 1 Off hook 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 On hook When you cancel of Message Waiting by dial 720 these features are cancelled at same time for DND Call Forward Repeat Dial alarm clock Headset Mode and Text Message To answer a Message Waiting To display your Message Waiting list These features only available for key telephone with display 362 Music on Hold Description Music on Hold MOH sends music to ca
171. aling 1 Do not lift handset Lifting the handset cancels Automatic Repeat Dialing 2 Press DC 3 Press LND See also Last Number Dialing OR 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 Press SPK to hang up When you cancel of alarm clock by dial 720 these features are cancelled at same time DND Call Forward Repeat Dial Message Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message 64 BGM Background Music Description BGM Background Music sends music from a customer provided music source to speakers on the keyphone If a station user activates it BGM is played whenever the station is in on hook condition Conditions This feature available for key telephone and external paging speaker Background Music requires a customer provided music source to be connected to the 32CPRU for dX Z96 or 24CPRU for dX Z24 Refer to the system Hardware Manual Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows BGM Service Code of BGM is dial 825 lt Note gt For dX Z24 system BGM function is not allowed as default For the activation refer to dX Z24 Hardware Manual page 5 12 Options DX2E 4PGDU S1 if BGM is sent from external speaker Programming gt 0108 Service Tone Setup Tone 18 BGM Back Ground Music lt For dX Z24 only gt Change Time slot number from 29 to 28 gt 0406 COS Options Item 53 BGM Back Ground Music In an extension s Class of Service allow 1
172. all Restrict Table In Program 0701 No Yes In Program 0701 Item 7 enter 0 Item 7 enter 1 Do you want to Toll Restrict Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers Do you want to Toll In Program 0701 No Restrict Group Yes In Program 0701 ltem 8 enter 0 Abbreviated Dialing Item 8 enter 1 numbers Go to the flowchart on the following page 482 Toll Restriction Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page In Program 0702 Item 3 program the maximum number of local call digits dialed table The system has one table with four entries in each table Do you want to restrict the number of digits local callers can dial In Program 0701 Item 3 enter 0 In Program 0701 Item 3 select a table entry from Program 0702 Item 3 In Program 0702 Item 3 Do you want to program the maximum restrict the number of number of toll call digits digits long distance dialed table The system callers can dial has one table with four entries in each table In Program 0701 Item 3 enter 0 Long distance calls are calls where the NPA or NNX is in either the Common In Program 0701 Item 4 Table Program 0702 Item 7 or the select a table entry from Permit Code Table Program 0702 Item 5 Program 0702 Item 4 483 Toll Restriction Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0701 Toll Restriction Class Item
173. all to you 4 Press SPK to hang up Ey y Call Forward Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To cancel Call Forward 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 Press SPK to hang up When you cancel Call Forward by dial 720 these features are canceled at same time Alarm Clock DND Repeat Dial Message Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message lt Single Line Telephone gt To activate or cancel Call Forward 1 Off hook 2 Dial Call Forward code 842 for Call Forward with Dual Ringing Transfers ring destination immediately Intercom calls ring both extensions Calls do not forward when extension busy 843 for Busy Transfer 845 for unanswered Call Transfer 848 for Call Forward 3 Dial 1 plus extension to enable dial 0 to disable Confirmation tone is heard Your Call Forward destination must be an installed extension It cannot be a Department Group pilot number One you activate Call Forward only your Call Forward destination can place an Intercom call to you 4 On hook To cancel Call Forward 1 Off hook 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 On hook When you cancel Call Forward by dial 720 these features are canceled at same time Alarm Clock DND Repeat Dial Message Waiting Head set Mode and Text Message 78 Call Forward with Personal Message VAU Description Call Forward with Personal Messages permits an
174. alls and announcements When the user activates DND incoming Trunk Line calls still flash the line keys The user may use the phone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls There are four Do Not Disturb options available at each extension 1 Incoming Trunk Line calls blocked DND EXTERNAL 2 Incoming Intercom and transferred Trunk Line calls blocked DND INTERCOM 3 Incoming Trunk Line and Intercom calls blocked DND ALL 4 Incoming Call Forwards blocked DND TRANSFER 0 CANCEL Conditions This feature available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows it to use Do Not Disturb Service Code of Do Not Disturb is dial 847 Service Code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720 Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 12 Do Not Disturb In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disturb 0 an extension s ability to use Do Not Disturb gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 7 Do Not Disturb Assign a service code of Do Not Disturb gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 10 Common Canceling service code Assign a service code of common Canceling service code is dial 720 gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of service 1 10 to an extension 188 Do Not Disturb Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 12 enter 1 to In 0406 Item 12 enter 0 to No preve
175. and extension name In 0406 Item 61 No Should an extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 61 enter 0 ae to place Intercom calls T enter 1 Should an extension be able to set Intercom Talkback or Forced Intercom Ringing for Incoming Intercom calls No Yes In 0406 Item 68 In 0406 Item 68 enter 0 enter 1 Should an extension be able to set Intercom Talkback or Forced Intercom Ring for outgoing Intercom calls Yes In 0406 Item 72 In 0406 Item 72 enter 0 enter 1 In 0512 Item 3 enter one digit service code set One Digit Service code switching of Voice signal call Continued on next page 295 Intercom Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1105 assign the operator extension port Should System have a different operator attendant extension In 1105 does not assign No the operator extension port In 0405 Item 10 set the Intercom Interdigit Is the time the system allows for users to dial Intercom numbers acceptable Time to correct the problem Yes After getting Intercom dial tone do users have adequate time to dial the first Intercom digit In 0405 Item 28 extend the Extension Dial Tone Time Yes Refer to Flexible D h th Yes o you change the System Numbering Operator access code feature 296
176. and specified extension number lt Single Line Telephone gt To answer a Call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group 1 Off hook 2 Dial 867 To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don t know the group number 1 Off hook 2 Dial 869 To answer a Call ringing a phone in Pickup Specified Group 1 Off hook 2 Dial 868 and the group number 1 8 To answer a call ringing a phone without incoming Trunk in your Pickup Group 1 Off hook 2 Dial 856 To answer a call ringing a specified extension 1 Off hook 2 Dial 715 and specified extension number 93 Call Timer Description Call Timer lets a keyset user time their trunk calls on the telephone display This helps users that must keep track of their time on the phone For incoming trunk calls the Call Timer begins as soon as the user answers the call For outgoing trunk calls the Call Timer starts about 10 seconds PGM 0405 Item 30 after the user dials the last digit However if Polarity Reverse Signal is detected from the network side then the Call Timer starts immediately Conditions This feature available for key telephone with display Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows using the Call Timer Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 46 Call Duration display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to u
177. andset Depending on the setting of your Automatic Extension Call timer you may be able to dial an Intercom call before your Automatic Extension Call goes through If the destination has Handsfree Answer back enabled your call will voice announce If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled your call will ring To place a call if your extension has Automatic outside Call programmed 1 Lift handset To bypass Hot Line if enabled for your extension 1 Do not lift handset 2 Press CL 3 Place Intercom or Trunk Line call To answer a call if you are another extension s Automatic Extension Call destination 1 Speak toward phone to answer incoming voice announcement 2 Lift handset to answer ringing Intercom call 275 Hot Line Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a call if your extension has Automatic Extension programmed 1 Lift handset If you want to place a Trunk Line follows call dial Trunk line access code within hot line timer Depending on the setting of your Hot Line timer you may be able to dial an Intercom call before your Hot Line Call goes through To place a call if your extension has Automatic outside Call programmed 1 Lift handset If you want to place a Trunk Line follows call dial Trunk line access code within hot line timer If you want to intercom call dial extension number within hot line timer To bypass Hot Line if enabled for your extension
178. answers recalled call 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT dials 200 4 Ext 200 Answers 5 SLT goes on hook 417 6001 sent to SLT MOH to TRK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone MOH to TRK1 stops SLT hears normal dial tone SLT connected to TRK1 6001 sent to SLT MOH to TRK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone 3 4 Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone or Ext 200 Busy SLT hears Busy tone MOH to TRK1 stops SLT hears normal dial tone SLT connected to TRK1 6001 sent to SLT MOH to TRK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone 3 4 Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone or Ext 200 Busy SLT hears Busy tone TRK1 transferred to Ext 200 Call recalls at SLT after timer if RNA or immediately if Busy SLT answers and hears either A 01200 Busy or 5001200 RNA 6001 sent to SLT MOH to TRK 1 starts SLT hears fast dial tone Ext 200 rings SLT hears ring tone TRK1 connected to Ext 200 automatically SLT hears Busy tone SLT goes on hook PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Appendix Cont d Incoming Trunk Answered and Screened Transferred to Ext 200 Hold and retrieve Hold enquiry call to RNA Busy retrieve call Hold forced transfer to ext 200 which is RNA Busy Hold enquiry call to ext 200 but ext 200 does not want to take held call and ext 200 does not hang up Hold enquiry
179. any Default Setting outlines how the feature works with the default programming When initially installed the system uses the default setting Programming explains the system programming that lets you customize the feature Most of customization cases to the features they require programming If you decide to customize the features refer to Programming flow Related Features presents the feature interaction Operation consists of instructions on how to use each feature Read These Notes Programmable Keys When reading an instruction using programmable keys you will see a notation similar to PGM 1006 or SC 851 1050 This means that the key requires function code 1050 and you can program this code through Program 1006 or by dialing Service Code 851 Refer to the Programmable function key feature for more information Using Handsfree The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree This lets a user just press a trunk line key or CL key to answer or place a call For extensions without Automatic Handsfree the user must Lift the handset or press SPK for Intercom dial tone Lift the handset or press SPK then press a trunk line key for Trunk dial tone Introduction Cont d Table 1 1 Service Codes by Number Page 1 of 6 Service Code When you are For this feature Ao m Function Key K JE EH Entering the system Programming System Programming mode Password Protection 9
180. ard ports and provides three RS 232 C ports The 3DCI units are helpful in areas that have a high concentration of data devices Since you can have three devices connected to each 3DCI you use up 1 3 the number of DTSU card ports when compared to the DCI Module The system can have up to 24 3DCI Ports DCI A plus DCI B plus 3DCI X 3 see above 125 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d DCI Features Keyset Originated Data Call Place a call to another DCI by using your telephone dial pad The data call automatically sets up if the called DCI answers Terminal Originated Data Call Place data calls directly from your PC You can dial using Hayes compatible dialing commands e g ATDT or use the powerful auto dialing features of your communications software DCI Department Group Group DCIs into departments for pooled DCI operation For example you can program several network printers into a DCI Department Group see the illustration below When a user calls the department they connect to the first available printer Hayes Compatibility The DCI is compatible with many Hayes AT commands For example you can use S registers to change DCI communications parameters refer to Table DCI 2 In addition Result Codes help you monitor the progress of your call refer to Table DCI 4 You can also enter over 20 Hayes commands from your terminal to control dialing and terminal options Resu
181. artment Groups In 0508 assign pilot numbers to the ACI Department Groups 48 Audio Communications Interface ACI Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0504 ACI Extension Number Assign extension numbers to ACI software ports 1 6 This lets system users dial ACI ports directly gt 0508 ACI Group Pilot Numbers Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups 1 4 When a user dials the pilot number they reach an available ACI software port within the External Paging ringer control gt 0914 Setting the Music on Hold Source Assign music on hold tone sending ACI port for each Trunk gt 1301 Basic ACI Port Setup Assign ACI type for each ACI port gt 1303 ACI Groups Assign ACI software ports 1 6 to ACI Department Groups 1 4 This lets ACI callers connect to ACI software ports by dialing the group s pilot number set in Program 0508 Related Features Background Music ACI software ports cannot be Background Music sources Hotline ACT extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports Music on Hold ACI software ports can be Music on Hold music sources Since the system allows up to 6 ACI software ports each Trunk can have its own music source One Touch Dialing An extension can have One Touch Keys for ACI software ports The gives the extension user One touch access to external music One touch External Paging One touch loud ringer control Paging External ACI software p
182. as 420 PICVICW Did EAT en EI E eh gece au ake eM T ATA S 425 Prime LING Selection c itescecsetec eri te terete rete e Ee iiia 427 Privacy Release Meet Me Conference ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 432 Private elie teehee hee REEERE eee areca ea 435 Programmable Function Key ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaees 439 Pulse to Tone Conversion ccccceeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 442 POOMT MONO Ar Ce ae eel er ese er ener erat 444 Saved Last Number Dialliing cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseenneeeeeeees 448 Secretary Call Buzzer 00 cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeees 451 pectetary Call PickUp oscdetc caer ndcvcnctitcesncundercnctisheveniuelaantctnderssceetrenbaunner 454 selectable Ring Tone was nanan aaiheanneaneaimanegies 456 Seres Cll asthe th tae Sek caret IN te eS andrea AASE 459 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 461 TOXUIMES SAG ez ceive cxaheuat e n Rete eat reheat heee 470 Mimetand Dates lt cictencnte nenteeate eee teeter teres 474 TORES Mirapeis a gine ahi eas 477 Toll Restriction OV CFIA Ge cesses ei os oe i Rs i so Se i ta 487 Table of Contents Cont d Features Page PTI ANS ps ees ia a ae Sa Ss E I SN E E a i 490 TRUNK INCOMING Gall siere eta t eee aie steer eet EEEE 496 Trunk LING GROUP see ioiii iia iiai aaia aa ii eaaa beatles 502 Trunk Outgoing Call hale k coe
183. ash Patterns Description Distinctive Ringing Tone amp Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call status signals This lets users tell the types of calls by listening to the ringing tones and watching the keys It also helps users monitor the progress of their calls In addition Distinctive Ringing lets keyset users customize their Intercom and Trunk Line call ringing This is helpful for users that work together closely For example if several co workers set their keysets to the following tables at different pitches the co workers can always tell which calls are for them Refer to the following tables at the beginning of this section Table 1 3 System Tones Table 1 5 System Ring Rates Table 1 6 System Rash Rates Conditions This feature available for Key Telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows selecting the incoming ring tones An extension s Class of Service prevents checking the incoming ring tone choices Trunk Line ring keysets with Ring Tone Range 1 tone Medium see Table 1 6 Extensions ring keysets with tone Medium Calls ring Single Line Telephone sets with long bursts Calls ring keysets with two bursts followed by a pause Service Code of Trunk line incoming ring tone switching is dial 820 Service Code of ring tone is dial 811 Options None 167 Distinctive Ringing Tone amp Flash Patterns Cont d Programming Do you wa
184. ast Number Dialing key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1014 To redial a saved number 1 Press line key This selects a specific Trunk Line for the call 2 Press Saved Last Number Dialing key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1014 The stored number dials out OR 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 815 OR Press Save Number Dialed key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1014 Saved Last Number Dialing automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group as your original call The stored number dials out To check to see the number you have saved 1 Press Saved Last Number Dialing key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1014 The stored number displays for six seconds The stored number dials out is you Lift the handset Press an idle line key Press an idle CL key or Press SPK 2 Press CLEAR To clear your saved number 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 885 3 Press SPK to hang up Confirmation tone is heard 450 Secretary Call Buzzer Description Secretary Call lets two co workers alert each other without disturbing their work To have Secretary Call both co workers must have Secretary Call buzzer keys When a user presses their buzzer key the system alerts the called extension by sending a splash tone and flashing the called extension s buzzer key The called user can respond by placing an intercom call to the calling party The called extension s buzzer key continues to flash until the user cancels the Secretary Call A secretary could use
185. ation Guidance in English For Example The number you have dialed is not in service Vacant number All lines are busy for callback dial XXXX and etc XXXX is service code for Camp an Call back feature Conditions This feature is available for key telephone single line telephone and DUD DISA caller Default Setting VAU fixed message is provided if VAU installation is acknowledged Options DX2E VAU A DX2E VAU B optional Programming gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 31 VAU fixed message Set the use 0 or not use 1 VAU fixed message for VAU features When you set to not use 1 you can not use VAU fixed Message features Related Features None Operation None 522 Virtual Extension Description Virtual Extension lets a keyset have more than one extension number Calls can route to the keyset s installed number or to the keyset s Virtual Extension key This helps users identify incoming calls There are two examples for easy reference An extension installed at 204 Sales could have a virtual extension for 460 Service on the one of function key Calls to 204 ring the extension normally Calls to 460 ring the Virtual Extension key This lets the user at extension 204 differentiate Sales calls from Service calls Extensions 205 206 and 207 in Account group could have virtual extension number 470 on the one of function key on the each keyset Calls to 205 206 and 207 ring to each e
186. ber Redial lt Redial 1 Account Account Code sid Account Code 1054 Forcing Override with voice announce Voice Over to your phone Forcing Override to ring your phone Intercom Off hook Signaling Answering a Call waiting calling Camp On Callback Extension Testing the operation of S L T 899 Saving and erasing a number or dialing Memo dialing 1015 a memo number Privacy release of talking Trunk line Privacy Release 1017 Meet me conference Setting the monitored and monitoring Room monitor 1025 extension number for Room monitor Activating and off for handset 1026 transmission nnne Answering and disconnecting for data 1029 call Buzzer the Buzzer the secretary extension extension Secretary call Buzzer oa Activating Executive s call forward Seupan call pickup B Activating series call 1035 Incoming and answering to Virtual Virtual extension 1036 eee call Holding and picking up a call 1043 Holding and picking up a call in an Exclusive hold 1044 me hold Calling programmed extension DSS key 1058 O Note P is user password For function key number 1059 1065 1067 1071 1073 1082 1083 and 1086 those which don t have Service Code refer to Table 1 4 Page 11 of 13 Introduction Cont d Table l 2 System Number Plan Page 1 of 2 Trunk Port Numbers Trunk Group Numbers Telephone Extension Port numbers Telephone Extension Number Range
187. ber that rings the DUD Trunk line Hears guidance message from DUD DISA Talkie ex extension numbers for each number and feature access service code Hears unique dial tone again Dials the system extension directly or feature access service code Answering Extension Call for DUD DUD calls ring system extensions like other outside calls If an extension has a line key for the DUD Trunk Line the call rings that key If the extension does not have a line key the call rings an idle CL key Answering Extension Call for DUD DUD calls ring system extensions like other outside calls If an extension has a line key for the DUD Trunk Line the call rings that key If the extension does not have a line key the call rings an idle CL key e Automatic Transfer to Incoming Ring Group conditionally If DUD call is not completed due to dial tone time over busy no answer or wrong number the system automatically shall transfer it to incoming ring group as programmed 209 DUD Direct Universal Dialing Cont d Description Cont d Night Service for Trunk Line Type You can set DUD operation differently for each Night Service mode For example a Trunk line can be a normal Trunk Line during the day and a DUD Trunk Line at night You can also set the routing for DUD Trunk Line when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension dials incorrectly or forgets to dial Delayed DUD For the incoming call user can answe
188. ce does not permit it to be used Trunk Port Disable Options None Programming gt 0406 Class of Service Options Item 122 Dial Block In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Trunk Port Disable gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 35 Trunk Port Disable Assign a service code for trunk port disable gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a class of service 1 10 to an extension Related Features None 514 Trunk Port Disable Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 122 No Should extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 122 enter 0 gt to use Trunk Port Disable n enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions sieatetetetatatetatatetatatattatatetetetataaetatatatatatatatataaaaet Refer to Flexible System numbering feature Do you change the Service Code for Trunk Port Disable Operation lt Key Telephone gt To set the Trunk Port Disable 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 745 3 Dial disabling trunk port number 01 52 4 Dial 1 To release the Trunk Port Disable 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 745 3 Dial disabled trunk port number 01 52 4 Dial 0 515 Unsupervised Conference Description Unsupervised Conference Trunk to Trunk allows an extension user to establish the special conference for two outside parties without any extension user There are 3 types of operation in dX Z Series For the
189. ck at busy extension B Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time 2 When extension B becomes idle the system rings extension A This is the Callback ring 3 Once caller A answers the Callback ring the system rings formerly busy extension B If caller A doesn t answer the Callback ring the system cancels the Camp On Callback 4 As soon as caller B answers the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring When Callback Automatic Answer Callback is enabled a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled the user must press the ringing CL key appearance to answer the Callback ring Camp On Callback Trunk Callback Trunk permits an extension user to queue wait in line on hook for a busy Trunk or Trunk group to become free The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the Trunk is available The user does not have to manually retry their call later Camp On Callback Trunk lets the caller know when the call can go through If the extension user does not answer the Camp On Callback Trunk ring the system cancels the queue request With Camp On Trunk an extension user can queue wait in line off hook for a busy Trunk or Trunk group to become free The call goes through immediately when the Trunk becomes free As with Camp On Trunk the user doe
190. d To set the SKIP Time 1 Access to the Voice Mail Service VOICE SRV Press Mail Box and dial Password EXT 200 2 Press SET key REPLAY MSG REC MEMO REC ATTEN MSG INCOM INF SET VOICE SRV 3 Press REPLAY key EXT 200 RESTRICT REPLAY VOICE SRV 4 Press SKIP TIME key PLAY MODE FIRST MSG FIRST MSG SKIP TIME LAST MSG VOICE SRV 5 Press the desired time MSG SKIP TIME Confirmation Message shall be displayed 8 sec 16 sec 24 sec 32 sec 40 sec 532 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Cont d Operation Cont d To use the Skip during replaying the left message VOICE SRV During replaying the left message EXT 200 1 Press SKIP or BACK SKIP key REPEAT COPY REPLAY ERASE SKIP BACK SKIP 2 To escape from VMB Service 1 Enter to the VMB Service from outside 2 Dial 50 during recording mode or Service Code entering mode Unique Dial Tone or Greeting Message shall be heard 3 Follow DUD operation If outside caller comes through DDI Line 1 Enter to the VMB Service from outside 2 Dial 51 during recording mode or Service Code entering mode 3 The call shall be forwarded to specified destination according to the system setting of DDI Transfer 533 Voice Over Description When a user makes intercom to an extension busy on a call he she can perform Voice Over indicating he she has something to talk to Thi
191. d incoming calls on trunk line s Ring Group and enter 0 no ringing enter 1 ringing Should non ringing In 0912 assign extension extension be able to to Access Map that prevents answer call on the user from answering Trunk line Trunk line In 0912 assign extension to Access Map that allows user to answer the Trunk line In 0903 assign names to Trunk lines to make incoming call identification easier The flowchart on the following page is for ringing extensions only Continued on following page 498 Trunk Incoming Call Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page When line key flashes Wait for ring cycle For ringing extensions should extension ring when line key starts flashing or wait for the system ring cycle In 0306 enter 0 to disable pre ringing for trunk calls In 0306 enter 1 to disable pre ringing for trunk calls pik pea ah In 0405 Item 7 set the Ring g wore ging No Answer Alarm Time interval calls after this interval Check 0901 Item 2 Does ring cycle start and Yes Delayed Ringing and stop irregularly review settings of 0114 Items 15 16 and 17 In 0401 item 13 No Yes In 0401 item 13 enter 0 enter 1 In 1006 do not No Do you want one button Yeg In 1006 program function assign function keys incoming access to each keys as line keys as line keys E Trunk line codes 0001 0052
192. dant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Programming Cont d ained ontinue from previous page If the all VAU path are In 2204 enter 0 busy when DUD DISA In 2204 enter the To does not allow has a incoming call does transfer ring group the transfer the system allow number automatic transfer to incoming ring group In 0405 Item 63 enter DUD DISA calling set transferring interval when VAU path are busy Should extension be allowed to operate the automated attendant message and error message Yes In 0406 Item 96 enter No hould DUD DISA calle be allowed to operate the automated attendant essage VAU message Yes In 2208 enter the VAU Password Do you change the Yes Refer to Flexible Service Code for _ System Numbering Common and Group feature Abbreviated Dialing foo 54 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Note For additional programming information on DUD and DISA refer to DUD Direct Universal Dialing and DISA Direct Inward System Access gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 31 VAU fixed message Set the use 0 or not use 1 VAU fixed message for VAU feature gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 10 Intercom interdigit timer Set the Intercom interdigit time 0 64800 seconds when placing intercom calls users Must dial each digit within this interval gt 0405 System Timers Pa
193. data key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1029 OR Your PC communications software answers the call automatically You can also type the Hayes command ATA Enter to answer the call To enable Auto Answer for a DCI Module 1 Press idle CL key Dial 883 Operation Cont d DISCONNECTING AN ACTIVE DATA CALL To disconnect your active data call 1 Use your PC communications software to hang up OR DCI Module Only Press idle CL key and dial 884 144 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Operation Cont d INITIALIZING A DCI MODULE To initialize your DCI Module 1 Press idle CL key and dial 880 2 Press SPK to hang up You can also use Program 1206 to initialize DCIs 145 Data Privacy Description While on a data call using an acoustic coupler an extension user can implement Privacy to block incoming Off Hook Signals and Break In attempts The system establishes Privacy for the extension when the user presses the programmed Privacy key It cancels Privacy when the user presses the Privacy key a second time or hangs up Privacy assures the user that they will not be interrupted during an important data call Conditions This feature only pertains to data calls set up using a keyset and an acoustic coupler It does not pertain to data calls using a DCI Privacy is automatic for these types of calls Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows the use of a Privacy key No Privacy keys prog
194. digits long distance callers can dial 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 5 Permit code table Program codes into the Permit Code Tables 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 6 Restriction table Program codes into the Restriction Tables 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 7 Common permit code table Program codes into the Common Permit Code Tables 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 8 Common restriction table Program codes into the Common Restriction Tables 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 9 Trunk Line access code of PBX Note 1 The system can have up to 10 PBX access codes Refer to the PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 19 Restrict For each Trunk Line enter 0 to enable Toll Restriction enter to disable Toll Restriction 485 Toll Restriction Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1004 Toll Restriction Class for Extension Assign a Toll Restriction Class for each extension and each Night Service mode Related Features Toll Restriction Override A user with the proper password can temporarily override an extension s Toll Restriction Operation To place a Trunk Line call if your system is Toll Restricted 1 Place call normally If your Toll Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial your call will be Cutoff 486 Toll Restriction Override Description Toll Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass an extension
195. done Rather than transferring the call back and forth the CSR can use Series Call to Technical Service and announce I have John on the phone I need to talk to him again Just hang up when you re done and he ll ring back to me Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting No series Call keys defined Options None Programming gt 0402 System Options Part B Item 2 Transfer key operation mode Enter 1 for this option to assign the TRFR key as a Series Call key gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a programmable key as a Series Call key code 1035 Related Features Transfer An extension user can extend send a call to a co worker 459 Series Call Cont d Programming Cont d Refer to the Transfer and Flash features for additional information In 0402 Item 2 enter 1 to make the extension TRFR keys Series Call keys In oe ne mis 0 Should extension be able for Transfer or to use the TRFR key as a for Flash ll kev Do not enter 1 Seles CANKE If the TRFR key is for Series Call extensions don t need a Series Call function key In 1006 assign a function key as a Series Call key code 1035 In 1006 do not assign Should extension have a a function key as a f unction key assigned as a Series Call key Il key code 1035 Series Call key Operation To place a Series Call to a co worker 1 Place or a
196. e ini In Program 0512 Tp VO SS NE IIA Ves Service No 10 assign a Tere One Digit Service code for All Ring mode 248 Group Hunt Cont d Related Features Group Step Calling Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy Incoming Queue Message VAU If outside caller accesses to the station group directly by DUD DISA DIL or DID DDD then more flexible routings are available DID DDI Capability If outside caller accesses to the station group directly by DID DDD then more flexible routings are available Operation lt Key Telephone gt To call a department 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial department s extension number The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department To withdraw from department group 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 750 3 Dial 1 4 Press SPK to hang up OR 1 Press Department Group Withdrawing key SC851 1074 Department group withdrawing key will be light on To cancel the withdrawing from department group 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 750 3 Dial 0 4 Press SPK to hang up OR 1 Press lighting Department Group Withdrawing key SC851 1074 Department group withdrawing key will be light off 249 Group Hunt Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To use Manual All Ring Mode 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial department s extension number The system routes
197. e Up to one digit To disconnect Trunk to Trunk conversation 1 Conversation to another outside party 2 Dial DISA conversation disconnect code If DISA caller did not dial DISA conversation disconnect code the system automatic disconnect after DISA conversation time and DISA conversation disconnect time 183 DLS Console Description Basically DLS Console is designed for Direct Line Selection purpose However in the software point of view either DSS Console or DLS Console is treated as same terminal Only difference in between is physical number of keys It means that 100 keys are provided for DSS Console except 10 functional keys and 24 keys for DLS Console Actually the program commands for DSS Console are basically used for DLS Console as well However only the data for first 24 keys are effected for extensions or trunk lines For example if DLS Console is simply connected to keyphone then keyl key24 shows the status of ext200 ext223 respectively according to command 1103 as default In order to change the status to trunk line 1 24 24DLS Range Selection key has to be assigned on a function key at the keyphone lt Caution gt In the hardware point of view DLS Console cannot be stayed with DSS Console It means the combination of KT DSS DLS is not allowed KT DSS s or KT DLS is allowed Conditions Only 24 key type of keyphones have connectivity of the DLS Console 24 Key Super Di
198. e ATRU Card Timers Item 9 Hooking Time 1 for timed flash Set the Flash duration 16 4080 mS for analog Trunk Line ATRU Card circuits gt 0114 Analog Trunk Line ATRU Card Timers Item 10 Hooking Time 2 for disconnection Set the open loop disconnect duration 16 4080 mS for analog Trunk Line ATRU Card circuits gt 0402 System Options Part B Item 2 Transfer Key Operating Mode If TRFR key should access Flash enter 2 Otherwise enter 0 or 1 gt 0406 COS Options Item 1 Hooking SLT set In a single line telephone s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to hookflash for system feature access gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 34 Hooking Flashing Assign a service code of hooking flashing 225 Flash Cont d Programming Cont d In Program 0901 Item 5 always set the Flash type for open loop 0 Disconnect Trunk s In Program 0114 Item Call Should Flash access Features In Program 0114 Item 10 set the open loop trunk s feature or 9 set the Flash disconnect duration disconnect call duration In Program 0901 Item In Program 0901 Item 6 set trunk for 5 set trunk for open disconnect 1 loop Flash 0 In 0406 Item 1 disable Should single line In 0406 Item 1 enable Flash for single line telephone be able to Flash for single line telephones 0 Flash Trunk lines telephones 1 Assign a Class of Service to single line telephones Sh
199. e Automatic On Hook Transfer If enabled user must Press HOLD dial the extension number and then TRER to transfer the call 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 493 Transfer Cont d Related Features One Touch Dialing When transferring an extension user can press a One Touch key instead of dialing the extension number Series Call Series Call is method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension Operation gt Transferring Trunk Line Calls To Transfer a Trunk Line call to a co worker s extension 1 Press HOLD You hear transfer dial tone 2 Dial co worker s extension number If you have Automatic On Hook Transfer and the extension you call is busy pressing TRFR returns you to the call If the extension doesn t answer you can dial another extension number or press CL to return to the call 3 Announce call and hang up If you don t have Automatic On Hook Transfer you must press TRFR to Transfer the call If your co worker doesn t want to screen the call hang up without making an announcement To answer a Call transferred to your extension 1 Lift the handset when a co worker announces the call gt Transferring to Extension Groups To Transfer your Trunk Line call to an Extension Group 1 Press HOLD 2 Press Internal Group Paging key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1006 OR Dial 801 and the Extension Group n
200. e PORT nnn GP nn extension number ext name is the extension name PORT nn is the port number and GP nn is the extension group Abbreviated Dialing SET ABB COMMON REA E store a Common Abbreviated Dialing SET ABB GROUP EE E ner store a Group Abbreviated Dialing ABB You are storing Abbreviated Dialing numbers where bin is the bin number and digits is the current stored number if any Abbreviated Dialing Time and Date You press CL and DC to dial a Common ABB COMMON _ Abbreviated Dialing number Abbreviated Dialing Time and Date You press CL and DC to dial a Group ABB GROUP Abbreviated Dialing number Abbreviated Dialing trk name HH MM SS You place a call using Abbreviated Dialing digits bin name Abbreviated Dialing PREVIEW You press DC to preview an Abbreviated ABB COMMON or Dialing entry where COMMON or GROUP GROUP displays depending on the DC key setting bin Abbreviated Dialing You press DC and select a bin before outgoing PREVIEW bin name Abbreviated Dialing number where bin name ABB bin digits is the programmed name bin is the bin number and digits is the stored number 12 Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 2 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Abbreviated Dialing You press CHECK and DC to check a stored Abbreviated Dialing bin where bin name is ABB xxxx the bin name xxxx is GROUP or COMMON depending o
201. e Set the format for your preference Data Call Tracking Data Call Tracking can log the system s internal data calls Since SMDR normally logs external Trunk Line data calls Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal activity Digit Counting With Digit Counting SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls For example if the digit count is nine SMDR won t include toll calls within the home area code Digit Counting permits SMDR to include only the types of calls you want to monitor Digit Masking Digit Masking lets you X out portions of the number dialed on the SMDR report A digit mask of seven for example masks out all Trunk codes NNXs and local addresses Digit Masking makes it easier to keep track of calling patterns without having to interpret each individual number You can also use Digit Masking to block out access and security codes 461 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Description Cont d Duration Monitoring SMDR can include calls of any duration or only those that last longer than the interval you specify If you want to keep trunk of all Trunk Line activity use a short duration To keep trunk of only significant usage use a longer duration Incoming Call Exclusion You can selectively exclude all incoming call from the SMDR report PBX Call Reporting If you system is behind a PBX you can have SMDR monitor all traffic into the PBX or
202. e 851 to program extensions their function keys In 1006 you can optionally customize an extension s function keys from the system program Do you want to In 1011 automatically initialize an extension s reset an extension s function keys function keys to line keys Do you change the Service Refer to Flexible Code for Programmable 1 System Numbering Function Key Programming feature 440 Programmable Function Key Cont d Related Features Abbreviated Dialing One Touch Dialing Abbreviated Dialing and One Touch Dialing also offer quick access to calls and features Operation To change the function of a programmable key 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 851 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Enter the 4 digit key function Available functions are 1000 1074 refer to chart and line keys 0001 0052 To check the function of a programmable key 1 Press CHECK 2 Press the programmable key The programmed function displays 441 Pulse to Tone Conversion Description An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion on Trunk Line calls Pulse to Tone Conversion lets a user change their extension s dialing mode while placing a call For systems in a Dial Pulse area this permits users to access automatic banking from their DP area The user can for example Place a call to a DP Trunk Line Depending on programming Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion OR Wait 10 s
203. e Box chimes gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 18 Doorphone access Assign a service code of Doorphone access gt 1502 Doorphone Ring Assignment Determine which Doorphone Boxes should ring which extensions Related Features Paging External If a PGDU card has a Doorphone connected you cannot use that port for External Paging 199 Doorphone Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To call a Doorphone 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 802 3 Dial Doorphone Number 1 8 To answer a Doorphone chime 1 Lift handset lt Single Line Telephone gt To call a Doorphone 1 Off hook 2 Dial 802 3 Dial Doorphone Number 1 8 To answer a Doorphone chime 1 Lift handset 200 DSS Console Description The DSS Console gives an extension user a Busy Lamp Field BLF and one button access to extensions or Trunk Line This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing e g operators or dispatchers The DSS Console simplifies Calling extensions and Doorphones Placing answering and transferring outside calls Making an External or Internal Page Switching the Night Service mode Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer Call Pick Up The system allows up to four extensions to have DSS Consoles Each of the four extensions can have two consoles daisy chained together for a system total of 8 If an extension has two DSS Consoles the 2nd console requires a
204. e Code of Doorphone access is dial 802 Options DX2E 4PGDU S1 and NT S D6 Doorphone 197 Doorphone Cont d Programming Refer to the Hardware Manual Is Doorphone for Doorphone installation poi installed Yes In 1502 select the No Should extensions ring Yes In 1502 select the when Doorphone user presses call button station port you want to station port you want to have not ring and enter 0 have ring and enter 1 In 0120 assign a Is the Doorphone me caller s voice at Doorphone gain type that a normal level either decreases or f increases the volume Use 0119 to customize the gain entries you set in 0120 Do Doorphones ring No extensions for the proper In 0405 Item 14 change the amount oftime A Doorphone Answer Time Yes If the Doorphone chimes stop before users can answer them consider extending the Doorphone Answer Time Do you change the Refer to Flexible Service Code for System Numbering Doorphone access feature 198 Doorphone Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0119 External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Type Set the five CODEC gain types for External Page and Doorphone Box ports gt 0120 External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Type Assign a CODEC gain type to the External Page and Doorphone Box ports gt 0405 System Timers Item 14 Doorphone Answer Time Set the interval within which a user must answer the Doorphon
205. e Group Listening gt 1005 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to extension In Program 0406 Item No Should extension be Yes In Program 0406 Item 105 enter 0 to disable allowed to activate Group 105 enter 1 to enable Group Listening _ Listening i Group Listening In Program 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions 251 Group Listening Cont d Related Features None Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate Group Listening 1 Press SPK key during Handset Conversation Other party s speech is heard through Speaker To deactivate Group Listening 1 Press SPK key during Group listening is activated lt Single Line Telephone gt This function is not available for Single Line Telephone 252 Group Step Calling Description After calling a busy Group Hunt Group member an extension user can have Group Step Calling quickly call another member in the group The caller does not have to hang up and place another Intercom call if first extension called is unavailable Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service permits Group Step Calling No Group Step Calling keys defined Service Code of Step Call is dial 808 One digit service code of Step Call is no setting Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 21 Department
206. e Ring Tone allows an extension user to set up unique ringing for their calls This is important in a crowded work area where several phones are close together Because their phone has a characteristic ring the user always can tell when it s their phone ringing Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows using Selectable Ring Tone An extension s Class of Service prevents checking Selectable Ring Tone Service Code for Trunk line incoming ring tone switching is dial 820 Service Code for Check of ring tone is dial 811 Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 59 Ringing tone selection In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to change the incoming ring tones gt 0406 COS Options Item 86 Checking incoming ring tone In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to check the Selectable Ring Tone gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 59 Trunk Line incoming ring tone switching Assign a service code for Trunk line incoming ring tone switching gt 0511 Service Code setup Part A Item 80 Check of ring tone Assign a service code for check of ring tone gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 456 Selectable Ring Tone Cont d Programming Cont d No Should extension be ab
207. e is system wide Manual day night mode change is available for key telephone Default Setting Night Service user password is 0000 Manual Night Mode Switch allowed Automatic Night Mode Switch allowed An extension s Class of Service not allowed Manual Night Mode Switch 370 Night Service Manual Auto Cont d Programming For example Use Ring Group 16 for Night Mode 15 for Midnight Mode and 14 for Rest Mode In 0910 assign Trunk In 0910 assign Trunk lines to Ring Groups that lines to Ring Groups for you won t use for night night ringing Trunk ringing Trunk lines that Ba teeters lines that ring the same way ring the same way should be i at night should be in the in the same Ring Group same Ring Group Should system In 0909 select night ringing Ring Group e g 16 assign extensions to that group and make them ring 1 In 1605 do not assign Should system In 1605 indicate which Trunk lines to External have Universal Night Trunk lines should ring Paging zones Answer UNA External Paging zones Refer also to the In 0911 make sure UNA External Paging feature Trunk lines are in Access Maps that allow Incoming access In 0912 make sure the Access Maps the extension function keys to the uses at night allow Renae es incoming access for the ines 01 52 UNA Trunk lines In 1006 assign Continued on the next page 371
208. e of music on hold tone gt 0914 Setting the Music on Hold Source Set the Music on Hold source gt 1005 Class of Service Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 363 Music on Hold Cont d Programming Cont d External CPU Terminals ACI In 0914 enter option Should MOH use In 0914 assign ACI 255 for selected internal external or software port 1 6 to Trunk line ACI for source selected Trunk line In 0914 enter option In 1301 set ACI 254 for selected software port assigned Trunk line above to input 1 In 0302 Item 1 In 0302 Item 1 enter 1 No need to change 0302 enter 0 for for Minuet in G or 2 entering an ACI software external for Nocturne port in 0914 overrides it tes oe ath i In 0202 set the Music on AIEO CANJE NE ASIE Hold Time and Date on Hold tone by dialing Service Code 881 password normally 0000 If you enter 0 with no external source connected MOH doesn t occur In 0406 Item 45 enter 0 In 0406 Item 45 enter to enable dialing Service 1 to enable dialing Code 881 Service Code 881 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions 364 Music on Hold Cont d Related Features None Operation To change the Music on Hold tone 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 881 3 Dial the password normally 0000 4 Dial Music on Hold tone code 0 No tone 1 Minuet 2 Nocturne 5 Press SPK to hang up 365
209. e system allows up to eight External Paging zones Each zone requires a port on a PGDU option cards and customer provided Paging equipment e Paging Combine With Paging Combine a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected to external zones and other keyset users in an extension group at the same time Each external paging zone can has one internal paging group which is called Paging Combine at the same time Conditions e This feature available for key telephones and single line telephones e Single line telephones cannot received internal paging call e Internal Paging does not require a PGDU card e External Paging requires the installation of PGDU Cards and customer provided Paging equipment Options DX2E 4PGDU S1 384 Paging Cont d Related Features Doorphone If PGDU card has four Doorphone connected par a card you cannot use the port for External Paging Night Service Universal Night Answer Outside calls can ring External Paging Zones Default Setting No Internal Paging Groups programmed An extension s Class of Service allows Internal Paging No Internal Paging Zone keys assigned Service code for internal group paging is dial 801 All External Paging ports have gain number 1 0 dB Maximum duration of Paging announcement is 120 seconds An extension s Class of Service permits initiating External Paging All External Paging Zones broadcast a splash tone be
210. e to the extension with option 1 Private Line access map Yes Is Private Line to Private Line s ring see step 3 Use option 7 Both Ways group see step 4 incoming outgoing and N o Hold access In Program 0911 assign In Program 0909 assign Private Line to a unique 2 pavate bind extension oath apne 1 access map i e one for Outgoing Only to Private Line s ring member Use option 4 or Outgoing Only group outgoing and Hold access No Is all other access maps give access 3 Hold to Private line Do not assign any extensions to Private Line ring group 436 Private Line Cont d Programming Cont d Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page gt 0909 Trunk Line Group for Assignment Assign extension to Private Line s ring group Use option 1 for Incoming or Both Ways Private Lines Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines Do not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring group gt 0910 Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment Assign Private Line to an unused Private Line ring group 1 16 e a ring group just for the Private Line gt 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Setup Assign Private Line to the Private Line access map 1 16 see Program 0912 below Use option 5 for Incoming option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing In all other access maps give option 3 to the Private Line gt 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment Assign extension that should have
211. eature Do you use One Digit Yes m Coos Service Code f a Bena Digit Service Code for Break In 69 Break In Cont d Programming Cont d Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 5 Intrusion Tone Enable 1 or disable 0 the Break In Tone on the Speech mode gt 0406 COS Options Item 44 Break In Monitor Mode In an extension s Class of Service Monitor mode 1 or Speech mode 0 the Break In Speech Mode at the initiating extension i e Break In initiator gt 0406 COS Options Item 65 Break In In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the Break In at the initiating extension i e Break In initiator gt 0406 COS Options Item 66 Broken In In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the Break In at the receiving extension i e Broken In gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 61 Break in Assign a service code for Break In default code 810 gt 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Service No 2 Break in Assign a One Digit Service Code for Break In gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Break In code 1019 Related Features Conference An extension user cannot Break In on Conference mode Intercom An extension user cannot Break In on an Intercom call of
212. econds PGM 0405 Item 30 Dial the access code for automatic banking The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF Conditions This feature available for key telephone Pulse to Tone Conversion is only valid for Dial Pulse Trunk Lines Program 0901 Item 1 options 0 or 1 Default Setting All Trunk Line allow manual DP to DTMF Conversion An extension s Class of Service allows Pulse to Tone Conversion The Pulse to Tone Conversion time inter digit time is 10 second Options None Programming gt 0104 DP to DTMF Conversion Options For each Trunk Line set the type of DP to DTMF Conversion required automatic 0 automatic and manual 1 or manual 2 gt 0405 System Timers Item 30 Trunk line inter digits timer Set the inter digits timer 0 64800 seconds Related Features None 442 Pulse to Tone Conversion Cont d Programming Cont d At an extension should DP to DTMF conversion be automatic manual or both In 0104 enter 1 for both In 0405 Item 30 set how long automatic conversion wait time Automatic In 0104 enter 2 In 0104 enter 0 for manual for automatic Operation To convent your phone s dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line 1 Place call over pulse line 2 Dial to switch the DP Trunk Line to DTMF dialing 443 Room Monitor Description This feature enables you to monitor the ro
213. ecord go to 5 c Dial 7 re record Hear Please start recording Recording Personal Greeting Message Dial the destination extension number Dial Call Forward condition 1 Busy 2 No answer 3 Busy No answer 4 Always Dial forwarding type 1 All incoming calls 2 Trunk incoming calls only 3 Extension incoming calls only Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b 84 Call forward with personal message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To activate the Call forward with personal message Off hook Dial 713 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Greeting Message Dial the destination extension number ON SO 2 ee Dial Call Forward condition 1 Busy 2 No answer 3 Busy No answer 4 Always 7 Dial forwarding type 1 All incoming calls 2 Trunk incoming calls only 3 Extension incoming calls only 8 On hook To operate the Call forward with personal message 1 Off hook 2 Dial 713 3 Hear To re record dial 7 to listen dial 5 to erase dial 3 4 a Dial 3 erase 5 a On hook Finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c 4 b Dial 5 listen 5 b Hear recorded Personal Greeting Message 6 b On hook Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c Call forward with personal message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d
214. ected to the desired external party the system shall take 2 deferent ways of disconnection procedure according to the type of incoming line as below If incoming line type is DUD DISA or DIL 0901 14 _17 1 2 or 4 on Analogue trunk then the system sends alert tone on the conversation to remind In case 0517 is completed continue discontinue code can be used except DIL feature lt Note gt In case of Busy Tone Detection program is activated 0921 Item10 0 then the trunk line shall automatically be cut when one of parties hangs up then If incoming line type is ISDN or E amp M then the both parties can speak and hung up simply without special operations Default Setting This feature is not assigned Service code for Call Forward is 848 Function key code for Call Forward is 1055 Option Required Items ISDN DUD DISA DIL E amp M Facility 219 External Call Forward Cont d Programming Do you complete to set the basic programming for Abbreviated dial Common Complete Abbreviated dial Common Programming Should extension be able to use External Call Forward In 0406 Item 79 enter 0 Should extension have one button access to Call Forwarding In 0604 assign trunk group for each abbreviated number Y Is DISA feature used No Are analogue trunk Yes lines used No DIL DUD DISA E amp M and ISDN programming has to be ente
215. ection for a listing of the available digital key telephone displays Busy Status Displaying When the Key Telephone user Display type only places an intercom call to the busy status extension the details of busy status who is talking with him or which Line is used by him can be displayed And also the details of busy status for Trunk who is using can be displayed after accessing to the Trunk This feature provides the benefit that the calling Key Telephone user can decide whether Break In feature is used or not after checking the busy status Conditions This feature available for key telephone with display Default setting An extension s Class of Service allows the displaying of A Trunk s name number when the user seizes the Trunk A Trunk s name number when the Trunk is ringing The incoming intercom caller s name and number Anextension s incoming Transfer pre answer display Anextension s Group Call Pickup display Options None 42 _ Alphanumeric Display Cont d Programming This also disables the Call Timer In Program 0406 Item 37 enter 0 In Program 0406 Item 38 enter 0 In Program 0406 Item 39 enter 0 In Program 0406 Item 40 enter 0 In Program 0406 Item 42 enter 0 In Program 0406 Item 51 enter 0 When a user seizes a trunk should they see the trunk name on their display When a trunk rings an extension should their display show the trunk name and RINGING
216. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 General Message VAU e esseeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesnaeeeeeeeees 239 UPON IN EEEE Seta aie leseleiecebe aie lesuceleleve T 244 GROUDIMISICNING earan torte tect ice a RE A Aa 251 Group Step Calling casas encase aetn Ave a Maem ae aati 253 Handsfree Speaker amp Microphone ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennees 256 Headset ODGANOM xisecttn ce tetcte a ets sect elec 258 PION EEEE E seas eps EE A EEEE E E EEES 262 HOt LINE aeee eee tem A RODE aN ED mora ee tee eee ae er eet 272 Incoming Queue Message VAU 2 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 277 NAT GR COM sec Satish ae hee i oats heh tat Aa aiaa Debt itt bh ain a adean 293 Intercom Abandoned Call Display ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 299 Intercom Off Hook Signaling ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 301 ISDN Capability Euro cceeeceeeeeee eee eeeceeceeeeeee tere eeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeteee 305 Key TOUCM TONG Seepia nreo OAE E AEE EE EAEn ARE 306 Last Number DidlinG e cainaieiattcaimwetacmewaiec aimee 308 LCR Least Cost Routing ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeteee 311 Line Preference sessseeeennneeeeeeeerrtetnrtrrseortrtrtnnnrtseeerrternnnntneeerrenenne ee 315 Long Conversation CulOnl sescasnaeeresceat nates tence ast Rate neta 322 Long Conversation Warning iccc2 ticec cette ese te ees tanec eee eas
217. efer to Programming Flowchart on the following page gt 0405 System Timers Item Timer 24 Long conversation alarm 1 After a user places a Trunk Line call the system sends the first warning tone to their extension after this interval 0 64800 seconds gt 0405 System Timers Item Timer 25 Long conversation alarm 2 After hearing the first warning tone the system sends the first warning tones after this interval 0 64800 seconds The warning tones continue spaced by this interval until the user hangs up gt 0406 COS Options Item 3 Long conversation alarm In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Long Conversation Warning gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features Trunk Line Calls Answering Long Conversation Warning does not occur for incoming Trunk Line calls Trunk Line Calls Placing Toll Restriction Long Conversation Warning occurs for all outgoing Trunk Line calls regardless of how they are placed or other outgoing restrictions Intercom Long Conversation Warning does not occur for Intercom calls Operation Long Conversation Warning is automatic if programmed 327 Meet Me Paging Answer Description Meet Me Paging Answer allows an extension user to Page a co worker and meet with them on a Page zone The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place Meet Me Paging is a
218. efined Service Code for Saved Last Number Dialing is dial 815 Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 49 Saved Last Number Dialing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Saved Last Number Dialing gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 25 Saved Last Number Dialing Assign a service code for Saved Last Number Dialing gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key as a Save key code 1014 448 Saved Last Number Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d No Should extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 49 to se Saved tast Number In 0406 tom 49 enter 0 J Dialing _ enter 1 Assign Class of Service to extensions An extension cannot save In 1006 assign a function numbers without a Saved key for Saved Number Number Redial function key Redial code 1014 Related Features Last Number Dialing An extension user can quickly redial the last number placed Programmable Function Key Function keys simplify Saved Last Number Dialing Automatic Repeat Dialing The system can automatically retry a Trunk Line call that was unanswered or busy 449 Saved Last Number Dialing Cont d Operation To save the outside number you just dialed up to 24 digits Use this feature before hanging up 1 Press Saved L
219. endant After the outside service answers the user can dial digits for whatever options the service allow Without Continued Dialing the system s Toll Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of dialed digits See Programming below for additional information NOTICE Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud Conditions This feature available for key telephone and DTMF type single line telephone Since SLT set dial pad is always active the system does not limit Intercom Continued Dialing from these phones Default Setting e Intercom Continued Dialing allowed e Toll Restriction allows Continued Dialing for Trunk calls e Continued Dialing detection port no setting 120 Continued Dialing Cont d Programming Is Continued Dialing required for Intercom calls Yes Program 0406 item 57 Program 1005 In 1001 lt SLT gt Item 5 enter 1 to Continued Dialing receiving SLT port No Is Continued Dialing required for local trunk calls No Yes Refer to Pulse to i Tone Conversion feature Is Continued Dialing required for DP type Trunk Program 0701 Item 3 and Program 1004 0702 Item 3 Is Continued Dialing Yes Program 0701 required for long Item 4 and Program 1004 distance trunk calls 0702 Item 4 No Refer to the Toll Restriction feature for more information 121 Continued Dialing Cont d Options None
220. ends OR End the conversation by going on hook 413 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Appendix VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION PROTOCOL Function Code Voice Mail System Plan Reason for Connection to VM System 1 Remote Log On Internal EET XXX Connect user to prompting routine for unknown user XXX Connect user to voice mail box for extension XXX Request password if required 2TTTYYY Record a message to be placed in voice mail or YYY box of extension YYY 2 Direct Log On 3 Transfer Message 4 Record 2XXXYYY Message for Called Extension Record a message to be placed in voice mail box of extension YYY Store source extension number XXX for automatic reply feature 5 Forward All 3UUUZZZ Calls Play Personal Greeting and or record a message to be placed in the voice mail box of extension ZZZ Store source extension trunk UUU for automatic reply feature 6 Forward Busy 4UUUZZZ Play Personal Greeting and or record a message to be placed in the voice mail box of extension ZZZ Store source extension trunk UUU for automatic reply feature 7 Forward RNA 5UUUZZZ Play Personal Greeting and or record a message to be placed in the voice mail box of extension ZZZ Store source extension trunk UUU for automatic reply feature 8 Message Status Off Hook Transmit message lamp status for each Lamp Update Receive Dial voice mail box Updates may be sent
221. er can activate group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension 162 Direct Inward Line DIL Cont d Related Features Cont d Name Storing Program a name for a DIL This makes it easier to identify the incoming call Private Line To simulate Private Line operation create a unique Access Map for the DIL that allows full access only for the destination Give all other extensions only Hold access Programmable Function Key If an extension has a line key for a DIL the call will ring the key If not the call rings an available line appearance For other extensions the DIL indicates as busy Ring Groups A DIL will ring its assigned extension without Ring Group programming A DIL only rings at assigned extension It will not ring other extensions in a Ring Group Operation lt Key Telephone gt To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift handset 2 Press flashing line key for DIL If you don t have a line key for the DIL the DIL rings an idle CL key If you have Ringing Line Preference lifting the handset answers the call If you don t answer the call it may ring other extensions i e DIL No Answer Ring Group To place a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift handset 2 Press line key for DIL OR Dial 805 and the DIL Trunk Line number e g 05 OR Dial 804 and the DIL Trunk Line group number e g 05 OR Dial 9 for Trunk Line Group Access 3 Dial telephone numbe
222. er is dial 845 Service Code of Call forward is dial 848 Options None 73 Call Forward Cont d Programming Should extension be able to use Call Forward Service Code 848 Yes In 0406 Item 30 enter 1 Optional For one button access in 1006 assign a Call Forward code 1055 Yes In 0406 Item 23 enter 1 Optional For one button access in 1006 assign a Call Forward with dual Ringing key code 1000 Yes In 0406 Item 31 enter 1 Optional For one button access in 1006 assign a Busy Transfer key code 1002 In 0406 Item 30 No enter 0 Should extension be able to use Call Forward with Dual Ringing Service Code 842 In 0406 Item 23 No enter 0 Should extension be able to use Busy Transfer Service Code 843 In 0406 Item 31 No enter 0 Continued on following page 74 Call Forward Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Should an Extension be able to use Unanswered Call Transfer Service Code 845 In 0406 Item 32 enter 1 Optional For one button access in 1006 assign a Unanswered Call Transfer key code 1002 In 0406 Item 32 enter 0 In 0405 Item 1 set the Delayed Call Forward Time Unanswered calls transfer after this interval In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Do you change the Service Code for Call Forward Call Forward with Dual
223. eration To program your extension s name 1 2 3 n A Press idle CL key Dial 800 Enter name see below Your name can be up to 10 digits max Press HOLD Press SPK to hang up 369 Night Service Manual Auto Description Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes Night Service redirects calls to their night mode destination as determined by Assigned and Universal Night Answer programming A user typically activates Night Service after normal working hours when most employees are unavailable to answer calls The system also provides external contacts to enable Night Service There are four Night Service modes Day Mode for normal working hours Night Mode after hours evening Midnight Mode after hours late evening to midnight Rest Mode interval usually used for lunch Assigned Night Answer ANA With Assigned Night Answer Night Service has calls ring extensions directly Assigned Night Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls For certain applications this may be more appropriate than Universal Night Answer For example you could program Trunk Line to ring the security station telephone during off hours Universal Night Answer UNA Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers With UNA an employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key Conditions Night service featur
224. erenteu cn E ERESSE SERCA 160 Directory Dialing eieae a iaeaea adana t antaga AAR ERANA au KARAKA ALEAGA E 165 Direct Station Selection hii ik al etal tele thcals aanceheata real mame 166 Distinctive Ringing Tone amp Flash Patterns eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 167 DISA Direct Inward System ACCESS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 171 DIES GONSOlG sicer carson tet cee ten cote a tek eile pee ean clas 184 Do NORDISIUID naiekeen natant ah a 188 Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 192 Table of Contents Cont d Features Page Door BOCK Controlo sesei tiie ete Ne hed etek ae fee RA a hed i ek es 195 DOOMDNONG icin nteiscecettceeie dicta ttebcece tela Mista chic tet Meee E 197 DSS COMSOIG it petites Scans ieeihesd iea aiei a ii a E ii 201 Dual Line Appealanee ss lt n kee ee ee at ceuaetu ane ecentacunt 208 DUD Direct Universal Dialing ccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 209 External Alarm Sensor cisccicinces seccsaddcniennsctecisatd cadena snntetatdauiesncicetnnaiees 216 Ext rnal Gall POMWANG seriea aaee a a a E E EEEE E dt 219 External Music On HoOld cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 223 R E E E EEE bath E E T E E de 225 Flexible System Numbering sssesssssennnneeeseoeeererenrrrseeerrternnnnrrseerrrrrnnnen 228 Folow ME sinnen eana AA A A eateee 232 Forced Trunk DiSCONNECTHION ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee
225. ernal Zone 1004 External All Call 1005 Internal Zone Answer 1006 Should extension have Function Key access to Meet Me Paging Transfer 337 Meet Me Paging Transfer Cont d Related Features Meet Me Paging An extension user can Page a co worker and meet with them on a Page zone Meet Me Paging Conference An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other inside parties Paging External With External Paging an extension user can broadcast announcement over Paging equipment connected to external Paging zones Paging Internal Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keysets Operation Meet Me External Paging Transfer lt Key Telephone gt To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 Press HOLD 2 Dial 803 And then dial the External Paging Group code 1 4 or 0 for All Call OR Press the External Paging Zone key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1004 amp 1005 3 Announce the call 4 When Paged party answers hang up to Transfer the call to them To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone 0 4 You connect to the Paging party 4 Stay on the line After the Paging party hangs up you connect to the transferred call 338 Meet Me Paging Transfer Cont d Operation Cont d Meet Me External Paging Transfer Cont d lt Single Line
226. ervice Code 851 to program your Function Key function keys Programmable CHECK LINE KEY nn You press CHECK and a function key while on Function Key function hook where function is the stored function Park Hold trk name PARK nn_ You Park Hold a call before you hang up HOLD Park Hold PARK HOLD You dial Service Code 831 to Park Hold a call PARK No DIAL Park Hold ANS HOLD You dial Service Code 861 to pick up a parked PARK No DIAL call Privacy Data Time and Date You press the Data privacy key to activate Data DATA PRIVACY Privacy Automatic Repeat PREVIEW You cancel Automatic Repeat Dialing Dialing CANCEL REPEAT DIAL Automatic Repeat trk name Automatic Repeat Dialing is automatically Dialing REPEAT DIAL digits outgoing Automatic Repeat trk name You have activated Automatic Repeat Dialing Dialing REPEAT DIAL but have not hung up Room Monitor ROOM MONITOR You press the Room Monitor key ICM DIAL Room Monitor You activate Room Monitor at the initiating Time and Date extension where ext name is the name of the MONITOR lt lt ext name i i extension being monitored Room Monitor Time and Date You activate Room Monitor at the extension to MONITORED gt gt be monitored Saved Last Number trk name You saved the number you just dialed Dialing NUMBER SAVED Saved Last Number trk name Save is outdialing your saved number Dialing SAVED digits Saved Last Number While on hook you pressed your Saved Last
227. es You can make four entries The range is 4 30 digits Toll Free Trunk Lines Certain Trunk Lines can be completely unrestricted such as the company president s Private Line Users can place calls a Toll Free Trunk Lines anytime to anywhere without inadvertently being toll restricted 478 Toll Restriction Cont d PBX Call Restriction Toll Restriction programming lets you enable disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX access codes You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have Trunk Lines programmed for behind PBX operation Refer to PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics Transfer Restriction of Non completed dialing Trunk Transfer Restriction of Non completed dialing Trunk lets you enable disable the non completed dialing trunks an outside caller may transfer Example a disabled extension of Transfer of Restriction Completed Trunk have dial 00 restriction When this extension transfer without dialing or transfer after dial 0 user heard congestion tone user cannot transfer When this extension transfer after dial 01 trunk is transferred to another extension Conditions A Ifa Toll Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table the system does not restrict the call B Toll Call Digit counting may prevent users from talking advantage of long distance automated services like ACD and automated Technical Service Default Setting N
228. es Yes Yes E amp M E amp M E amp M ISDN LISON Aegi Yes Fes Yor Yor Cmn em Ye Ys Ys Ys Case 3 lt Outgoing amp Incoming gt Ist Line 2ndLine Line Analogue Analogue ae ean e e ea ISDN Note 1 Conference feature is not available on the above condition Note 2 SLT user can not answer to 2nd Line while talking with Ist Line 517 Unsupervised Conference Cont d Case 4 lt Outgoing amp Outgoing gt Ist Line 2nd Line _istLine nding Tot fT Outgoing Line Outgoing Line OP 1 OP2 OP3 SLT amp M Yes Yes Yes Yes ISDN E Condition This feature is available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone Default Setting Automatic On Hook Transfer feature is provided for Key Telephone Option Required Items None Programming gt 0116 DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Setup Item19 Item32 for Tone type2 If 0921 Item10 is set to 0 for BT detection ON then enter appropriate data of your exchange busy tone 0406 Class of Service Options Item 16 Conference In extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 for the Conference 0406 Class of Service Options Item 76 Automatic on hook transfer In extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 for the Automatic On Hook Transfer 0901 Basic Exchange Line Port Setup Part A Item 31 Line Loop Detection In case of Analogue exchange line
229. ess the Trunk Line s line key to join the call Privacy Release does not use the telephone system features to announce the call The person initiating the Privacy Release just announces it through the air Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting The system allows 8 four party Conferences An extension s Class of Service allows initiating a Voice Call Conference Meet Me Conference key not assigned Privacy Release join permission time is 90 sec Options None 432 Privacy Release Meet Me Conference Cont d Programming Should the system allow eight 4 party conferences or four 8 party conferences In 0302 Item 2 enter 1 In 0302 Item 2 enter 0 In 0406 Item 17 enter Should an extension be In 0406 Item 17 enter 0 to prevent initiating allowed to initiate a 0 to allow initiating Conference Voice Call Conference Conference In 0405 Item 9 enter the interval after which the system cancels Privacy Release In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 assign a function key as a Meet me Conference key code 1017 433 Privacy Release Meet Me Conference Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0302 Music on Hold and Conference Setup Item 2 Conference mode Set the Conference mode The system allows either 8 four party conferences or 4 eight party conferences per option card 0405 System Timers
230. essage VAU Description General Messages gives key telephone users to listen guidance message and etc Key telephone user can listen General Message on VAU when dial 4 without seizing internal dial tone General Message can be recorded by user from key telephone Message waiting lamp of all extensions will be light on when user records new General Message And then an extension user listen General Message message waiting lamp will light off Conditions This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone Options DX2E VAU A Programming gt 2201 VAU Reset Erase the VAU Personal message and VAU message gt 2202 Message Length Assignment for VAU Assign the maximum message length for VAU message and Personal message gt 2203 General Message Number Assignment Assign the VAU Message number is used by General Message 239 General Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Does the all VAU message Yes In 2201 enter 2 all VAU clear 4 message clear No Does the system allow the General message for an adequate duration Yes In 2202 Item 1 change the message length No Does the system allow Yes In 2203 assign the VAU the General message message number No Should extension be allowed to Operate the General Message Yes In 0406 Item 98 enter 1 No Should extension be allowed to use the General message Yes In 0406
231. extension busy on a Handsfree Speakerphone call The called extension s idle CL key flashes fast with no ringing Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place Off hook Signaling to an extension busy on a handset call 1 Call to busy keyphone You hear busy tone 2 Dial 809 OR Press Override key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1018 OR Dial one digit service code for override You hear ring back tone To set Off hook Signaling mode at your extension with CDHF A 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 893 to set To answer the signal you must first hang up your current call or place it on Hold lt Single Line Telephone gt To place Off hook Signaling to an extension busy on a handset call 1 Call to busy keyphone You hear busy tone 2 Dial 809 OR Dial one digit service code for override You hear ring back tone To set Off hook Signaling mode at your extension This feature is only available for key telephone 304 ISDN Compatibility Euro Description This system provides the connectivity with ISDN trunks for both BRI Basic Rate Interface 2B D and PRI Primary Rate Interface 30B D under Euro specification Hardware options are as follows refer to Hardware Manual for dX Z24 dX Z96 DX2E 4BRIU S1 DX2E 2BRIU S1 for BRI DX2E PRIU S1 for PRI For the details of programming refer to the separate issue as follows dX Z96 Euro ISDN Manual Basic Rate Interface T point S point supp
232. extension until the outside party hangs up The DIL does not automatically reroute Default Setting DIL No Answer Time is 0 disabled No DILs programmed 0901 Items 14 to 17 0 All Trunk Line has extension port 1 as the DIL destination All extensions have full access to all Trunk Line No DIL No Answer Ring Groups Programmed Options None 160 Direct Inward Line DIL Cont d Programming Should extension have a DIL Should DIL also yes In 1006 enter ring extension s Trunk line number line key i for line key All extensions should have at least hold access for DIL In 0911 for trunks 0912 for extensions In 0901 Items 14 In 0917 enter DIL to 17 enter 4 destination Incoming DILs show as busy Should extensions have outgoing access to DIL Should other extensions have delayed ringing for the DIL In 0405 Item 62 set the DIL No Answer Time Unanswered calls to In 0919 assign the ring the DIL ring this group used for the DIL group after the DIL No Answer destination No Answer Time 161 Direct Inward Line DIL Cont d Programming Cont d Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page gt 0405 System Timers Item 62 Normal or DIL incoming call no answer Set DIL No Answer Time 0 64800 seconds If DIL Delayed Ringing is set in program 0919 this option sets the DIL Delayed Ring interval gt 0
233. extension user to redirect their call to another extension with message There are four types of Call forward with personal message Call Forward All calls forward immediately to destination and only the destination rings Busy Transfer Call forward only when the extension is busy Unanswered Call Transfer Calls forward only if the extension is unanswered in certain period Ring No Answer Busy or Unanswered Call Transfer Calls forward when the extension is busy or unanswered Conditions This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone Options DX2E VAU A module VAU Expansion Board 79 Call Forward with Personal Message VAU Programming Should extension be able to use Call Forward with Personal Message In 0401 Item 31 enter 1 In 0406 Item 99 enter 0 In 0401 Item 31 enter 0 In 0406 Item 99 enter 1 If the all VAU path are busy le n Oe When DUD DISA has a incoming Yes 1n 2204 enter the does not allow the call does the system allow transfer ring group transfer automatic transfer to incoming ring number group In 0405 Item 63 enter DUD DISA calling set transferring interval when VAU path are busy Does the all VAU personal In 0406 Item 31 message clear enter 1 No Continued on following page 80 Call Forward with Personal Message VAU Programming Cont d
234. f Result 0 Send Send Block Codes to device connected to DCI 1 Do Not Send Result Code Enables sending of Result Codes 0 Numeric 1 Words Type as words or numbers 1 Words Result Code Determines which set of Result i 0 Basic Mode Codes are sent to device connected 1 Extended to DCI Basic or Extended see Results Codes table below 6 Baud Rate Sets the baud rate of the DCI port 1 300 BPS 3 2 600 BPS 1200 BPS 3 1200 BPS 4 2400 BPS 5 4800 BPS 6 9600 BPS 7 19200 BPS 129 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 1 S Registers Page 3 of 3 Stop Bit Sets the number of stop bits the DCI 0 1 stop bit 0 expects in the data stream 1 2 stop bits 1 stop bit Data Bits Sets the number of data bits the 0 7 stop bits 1 DCI expects in the data stream 1 8 stop bits 8 stop bits 0 Sets the parity method the DC 0 No parity expects in the data stream 1 Not used no parity 2 Odd parity 3 Even parity Request to Send Enables 0 or disables 1 RTS 0 Control 0 RTS Control pin 4 control If disabled the DCI enabled control holds RTS on 1 Disabled enabled normally on Data Terminal Enables 0 or disables 1 DTR 0 Control 0 Ready DTR pin 20 control If disabled the DCI enabled control Control holds DTR on 1 Disabled enabled normally on Clear to Send Enables 0 or disables 1 CTS 0 Control 0 pin 5 contr
235. fer Break In 45 Changing of music on hold tone On off an extension s ability to change Music on Hold the music on hold tone On off an extension s Call duration timer Call Timer n off an extension s ability to use Memo Memo Dial Dial On off an extension s ability to use Last Last Number number redial Redial Saved number On off an extension s ability to use Save Save Number Number Redial redial Redial 50 Preset dial On off an extension s ability to use Preview Dial 1 on Preview Dial 51 Call pick up On off an extension s Call Pickup display Call Pickup 1 on information display 52 Internal group On off an extension s ability to use Paging Internal 1 on paging Internal Paging 1 on BGM Back Ground On off an extension s ability to turn Background Music Background Music on and off Service Code 825 54 Room monitoring On off an extension s ability to initiate Room Monitor O off Room Monitor Note on gt Enable off gt Disable 47 Memo dial mode 0 for Break In 1 for Monitor 48 Last number redial Call duration timer 109 Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 5 of 8 Item Name This option Is used with Default 55 Room monitored On off an extension s ability to be Room Monitor 0 off monitored Key touch tone Allow prevent and extension from on off Key Touch Tone 1 on the Key Touch Tone DTMF signal On off a
236. fer Ring Group Table 2 Trunk Group basis Setup the DDI facility by using above commands Queue message process will finish and this queuing message call will be transferred by above commands Case 4 gt 0405 System Timers Part A Timer_35 No answer time at DUD DISA call Define the duration time between receive a incoming call and transferring a call gt 0414 System Timers Part B Timer_04 VAU overflow message interval Define the duration time between message and message gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item_06 Operation for VAU message By using this service code all VAU messages are operated recording listening erasing gt 0901 Basic Trunk Port Setup Part A Item_14 17 Service type Day Night Midnight Rest Assign the service type of each exchange line gt 2214 Incoming Queue Message VAU for Incoming Ring Group Define the several timers 1st message connection timer etc and assign the VAU Message No which is used for Ist 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone for each Department Group gt 1802 DUD DISA Operation Mode Setup gt 1803 DUD DISA Transfer Ring Group Setup Setup the DUD DISA facility by using above commands Queue message process will finish and this queuing message call will be transferred by above commands 286 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Case 5 gt 0405 System Timers Part A Timer_62
237. for DDI conditional transfer vacant busy no answer DISA feature can take place Group Hunt As one of the option for DDI conditional transfer vacant busy no answer the call shall be transferred to the pilot number station group PC Based Voice Mail Connection As one of the option for DDI conditional transfer vacant busy no answer the call shall be transferred to the pilot number of the PC based voice mail port Operation None This feature is for outside caller 159 Direct Inward Line DIL Description A Direct Inward Line DIL is a Trunk Line that rings an extension directly Since DILs only ring one extension employees always know which calls are for them For example a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information When outside callers dial the DIL s phone number the call rings the operator on the International Sales line key The DIL does not ring other extensions DIL Delayed Ringing Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension s DIL If the DIL is not answered at its original destination it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group This could help a Technical Service department for example that covers calls for an Inside Sales department If the Inside Sales calls are not answered they ring into the Technical Service department Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone If unanswered a DIL rings an
238. fore the page announcement External Paging Zone numbers are the same as the External Paging Group numbers Service Code for External paging is dial 803 385 Paging Cont d Programming Internal Paging Refer to the system Hardware Manual No Should system have Yes Set up PGDU PCB for External Paging External Paging In 1606 assign the This is used for External Zones set in calling the zones 1603 to External Paging Groups 1 8 In 1604 Item 1 No enter 0 In 1604 Item 2 No enter 0 In 1604 Item 3 No enter 0 Should two beeps i e splash tone precede External Paging announcements Yes In 1604 Item 1 enter 1 When an External Paging zone is idle should it broadcast Background Music Yes In 1604 Item 2 enter 1 When an External Paging zone is idle should it broadcast Alarms Yes In 1604 Item 3 enter 1 Continued on next page 386 Paging Cont d Programming Cont d Internal Paging Cont d Continued from previous page If necessary you can set up the PGDU CODEC gain types in 0119 After adjusting the Paging amplifier and the PGDU In 0120 select a different volume controls is the CODEC gain type for the External Paging volume PGDU ports adequate Too short a setting can cut off Pages in progress Yes Is the Page duration No In 0405 Item 18 adjust setting adequate the Page An
239. g code 1004 External all Call Paging code 1005 and Internal Paging Zone Answer code 1006 Related Features Meet Me paging An extension user can have a telephone meeting with a co worker on a Page zone Conference An extension user can be conference with another extension user and outside party 333 Meet Me Paging Conference Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt Meet Me External Conference To make a Meet Me External Paging Conference 1 While on a call press Conference key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1016 2 Dial 803 and the External Paging Group code 1 4 or 0 for All Call OR Press Page key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1004 amp 1005 3 Announce the zone 4 When co worker answers your page press the Conference key twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To join a Meet Me External Conference 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone code 0 4 You connect to the other parties Meet Me Internal Conference To make a Meet Me Internal Conference 1 While on a call press Conference key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1016 2 Dial 863 Gf your extension is in the group called OR Dial 864 and the group number if your extension is not in the group called OR Press the Internal Paging group Answer key PGM 1006 or SC851 1010 if your extension is in the group called lt Single Line Telephone gt Meet Me External Conference To make a Meet Me
240. g message status lamps NN 00 means no messages and turns off NN 00 turns lamp on Display sets may be equipped to display NN when messages are left External trunk call to voice mail system from trunk TTT User has not indicated intent to enter voice mail box and must be queried as to which voice mail box he wishes to enter 10 DX2E Reset FEET Update message status lamps The DX2E requests a complete update of message status lamps 414 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Appendix Cont d VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION PROTOCOL Cont d Function Code Voice Mail System Plan Reason for Connection to VM System 11 Conversation Record a message to be placed in voice mail Extension NNN wishes an Record box of extension NNN Warning tones established conversation to be should be played every 15 seconds recorded and deposited in voice mail box extension NNN The DX2E establishes a conference and connects the correct audio path to the voice mail port This feature may be accessed by a pre programmed function key on the DX2E 12 Disconnect 9999 Terminate 1 DX2E has completed a screen transfer from a voice mail system to internal extension 2 Calling party disconnect during attempted screened transfer by voice mail 3 Calling party disconnect Notes XXX Source Extension NNN Extension number requesting service YYY Destination Extension NN Message Count 00 32 UUU Called extension or t
241. g Pilot Numbers Assign unused extension numbers e g 500 to the DCI Department Groups set in Program 1204 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 49 DCI auto answer mode setting Assign a service code for DCI auto answer mode setting 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 50 Data call disconnect Assign a service code for Data call disconnect 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 51 DCI initial Assign a service code for DCI initial 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign Class of Service 1 10 to extensions 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a data key code 1029 to each keyset with a DCI Module 141 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1201 DCI Internal Pattern Setup For each of the DCI sub types 1 10 set in Program 1202 set the values for the modem S registers Register Type 1 and the X 25 packet switching LAPB registers Register Type 2 Refer to Tables DCI 1 and DCI 2 provided with this feature You can also change these registers interactively from the DCI s terminal 1202 Basic DCI Port Setup Assign a DCI port type 1 for RS 232 C or Centronics to each DCI software port installed 1 72 Also assign the sub type 1 10 used in Program 1201 to each DCI port 1204 DCI Group To pool DCIs into a Department assign DCI software ports 1 72 to DCI Department Groups 1 8 Assign Pilot Numbers to DCI Departments in Program 0507
242. g Prime Line Preference Outgoing Prime Line Selection is a customized application of Trunk Line Group Routing Program Trunk Line Group Is Prime Line trunk Routing part of current dial 9 group Assign Trunk lines to groups in 0905 Assign Trunk lines groups to routes in 0906 Assign routes to extensions in 0907 In Program 0911 assign each This gives the system Prime Line Trunk line to a maximum of 16 a different access map outgoing Prime Lines In Program 0912 Will Prime Line In Program 0912 assign each extension Trunk line be shared assign more than one with a Prime Line toa by more than one extension to the same different access map extension access map In Program 0912 deny outbound access to all trunks expect the Prime Line Trunk line In Program 1008 Item 3 enter 1 If users phone is idle they set dial tone on the programmed Prime Line Trunk line when they lift the handset 428 Prime Line Selection Cont d Programming Cont d Incoming Prime Line Preference In Program 0910 assign each Prime Line Trunk This gives the system a maximum line to a different ring of 16 incoming Prime Lines group In Program 0909 assign each In Beet oe oe Yes Should extensions NO extension with an incoming Se ee share Prime line Prime Line to a different same Prime Line ring group Prime Line ring group Check other Program 0909 ring gro
243. g code The stored number dials out 33 Account Code Optional Forced Description Account Codes are user dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and or restrict Trunk calls The system has two types of Account Codes Optional Account Codes Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a Trunk call or anytime while on a call This type of Account Code is optional the system does not require the user to enter it Forced Account Codes Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time before they place a Trunk call If the user doesn t enter the code the system prevents the call Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes Account Codes can be from 1 8 digits long using 0 9 and Conditions This feature available for key telephone and DTMF type single line telephone A If a user enters a code that exceeds the eight digits limit the system ignores the Account Code entry B The system does not verify Forced Account Codes C If the system has Account Codes disabled the digits dialed e g 1234 appear on the SMDR report as part of the number dialed Default Setting Account Codes disabled in an extension s Class of Service Account Codes enabled in the system but not forced Service Code for Account Code is dial 891 No Account Code keys assigned Option
244. g mode at 1 use this program to assign the ring group that is the transfer destination You make a different entry for each Night Service mode gt 1804 DUD DISA Talkie Assign DUD DISA Talkie type and extension group for Talkie gt 1811 Trunk Line Route Setting for DISA Trunk User this program to assign the Trunk Group Route 1 36 chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials 9 Set Trunk Line Group Routing in Program 0906 The rout chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service which is determined by the password the caller dials gt 1812 Setting of DISA Restriction If the system uses Toll Restriction enter a Toll Restriction Class 1 8 The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 0701 The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class at Service which is determined by the password the caller dials You cannot use Program 1004 to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks gt 2205 Automated Attendant Message assignment Assign the VAU message number which is used Automated Attendant Message for DISA caller from VAU 180 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming Cont d gt 2210 VAU 1 Digit Code Assign extension department group to be called by 1 digit 1 to 0 and from outside caller per each VAU message Command 2205 Related Features Abbreviated Dialing A DISA caller can use Abbreviated Dialing for Trunk
245. ge number 01 16 5 b Listen the recorded VAU message 6 b Press SPK to hang up OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 3 c Dial 7 4 c Dial message number 01 16 5 c Hear Please start recording lt beep gt 6 c Recording VAU message 7 c Press SPK to hang up OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b 423 Preamble Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To operate the VAU message Preamble Message Note Message Number refer to 4 a 4 b and 4 c should be assigned under CMD 2207 1 Off hook 2 Dial 716 3 a Dial 3 erase 4 a Dial message number 01 16 5 a On hook finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 3 b Dial 5 listen 4 b Dial message number 01 16 5 b Listen the recorded VAU message 6 b On hook OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 3 c Dial 7 4 c Dial message number 01 16 5 c Hear Please start recording lt beep gt 6 c Recording VAU message 7 c On hook OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b 424 Preview Dial Description Preview Dial lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials it out Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors Conditions This feature only available for key telephone with display An extension user cannot edit t
246. gn a Class of Service 1 10 to extension 122 Continued Dialing Cont d Related Features Toll Restriction The ability to use Continued Dialing on Trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming Pulse to Tone Conversion Users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse Trunks and then dial DTMF digits after the service answers Operation To use Continued Dialing When DP to DTME conversion timing is auto to DP trunk or Continued dialing to DTMF trunk 1 Place Intercom or Trunk call 2 Continue dialing after call connects Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing To use Continued Dialing When DP to DTMF conversion timing is manual to DP trunk 1 Place Intercom or Trunk call 2 Dial 3 Continue dialing Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing 123 CTI Capability Description From next version of main software version 2 4A TAPI 1 4 standard will be supported Several application software package e g Phonemax Phonetasatic etc which are being sold in the market may be able to applicable to the dX Z system For the future plan TAPI 2 1 standard shall be complied with For more details refer to separate issue for CTI 124 Data Communication Interface DCI Description With the Data Communication Interface DCI you can use your telephone system to set up a data netw
247. goes to department 300 immediately by 1 digit access function Conditions The DUD caller must use a DTMF telephone This feature available for outside caller 210 DUD Direct Universal Dialing Cont d Default Setting No DTDU blocks reserved for analog Trunk line DTMF reception The DTMF Receiver Active Time is 10 seconds The DUD DISA Dial Tone Time is 10 seconds The DUD DISA No Answer Time is 10 seconds DUD DISA will disconnect for timeout busy and if the user makes a mistake in dialing All service types of trunk lines are assigned as normal Delayed DUD Timer is set to 10 seconds Options DX2E 4DTDU S1 if VAU adaptor is not installed DX2E 4ASTU S1 for DISA Talkie such as Answering Machine DX2E 3ACI A for DISA Talkie such as CD player DX2E VAU A DX2E VAU B1 to be used to expand the talk path 211 DUD Direct Universal Dialing Cont d Programming Do you wish to set any extension or extension group to be called by one digit from outside Yes Assign data in Program 2210 In Program 0414 Item 7 Do you specify the time fo Yes ae hetime 1 default i delay 10 sec default 0 64800 sec Does alarm signal generate Yes In Program 0921 Item 2 enter 1 when delayed DUD call is transferred to ring group To set DUD operation mode to Transfer in according to the setting at Command 1802 and 1803 Should dialing mistakes 1802 Items 1 3 enter
248. good way to talk to a co worker when their location is unknown If the co worker can hear the Page they can join in the conversation Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Meet Me Paging Answer only permits two party conversations Default Setting Meet Me Paging Answer Time is 90 seconds An extension s Class of Service permits initiating Meet Me Paging Answer No Paging keys assigned Options DX2E 4PGDU S1 When you use Meet Me External Paging Programming Note For additional programming information on Paging refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 44 Meet me answer to specified internal group paging Assign a service code of Meet me answer to specified internal group paging gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 45 Meet me answer to external paging Assign a service code of Meet me answer to external paging gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 46 Meet me answer to internal paging Assign a service code of Meet me answer to internal paging 328 Meet Me Paging Answer Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 14 No Should extension be able to Yes In 0406 Item 14 enter 0 _ initiate a Meet Me Page a enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions You can simplify Meet Me Is the time users have No In 0405 Item 11 Paging operation be assigning
249. hat will print on the SMDR report Enter 0 to have calls of any duration print gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 5 Min ringing time Enter the how long an unanswered call must ring 1 65535 before SMDR lags it as No Answer Enter 0 to allow all No Answer calls to print gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 1 Toll restriction call Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include calls blocked by Toll Restriction Enter 0 to exclude blocked calls gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 2 PBX call If system is behind a PBX enter 1 to have SMDR include all calls to the PBX Enter 0 to have SMDR include only calls dialed using PBX Trunk Line access code gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 3 Extension data call Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include internal data calls Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to exclude internal data calls gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 4 6 Summary daily weekly monthly Enter 1 to enable a summary report Enter 0 to disable a summary report gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 8 Enter 1 to enable an incoming call report Enter 0 to disable an incoming call report 468 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 9 Enter 0 to printout the extension status by extension name En
250. he displayed number Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows Preview Dial Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 50 Preset dial In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Preview Dial gt 1005 Class of Service Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features None Operation To use Preview Dial to place a call 1 Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key 2 Dial number you want to call The number displays 3 To dial out the displayed Trunk Line number press a line key If the previewed number as a Trunk Line access code e g 9 you can press CL instead OR To dial out the displayed Intercom number press a CL key OR To cancel the number without dialing it out Press HOLD 425 Preview Dial Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 50 enter 0 Should extension have In 0406 Item 50 enter 1 to disable Dial Number Preview Dial to enable Dial Number Preview capability Preview In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions 426 Prime Line Selection Description Prime Line Selection allows an extension user to place or answer a call over a specific Trunk Line by just lifting the handset The user does not have to first press keys or dial codes This simplifies handing calls on a frequently used Trunk Line Prime Line Selection has the following two
251. hin DISA conversation disconnect time Permitted Conversation time renewed If you did not dial Continued Code automatic disconnected Trunk line for Trunk to Trunk Transfer When you would like finish conversation dial disconnect code 1 digit If you did not dial disconnect code automatic disconnect Trunk lines for Trunk to Trunk Transfer after DISA Conversation time and DISA Disconnect time Onhook 1 Digit Access on DUD DISA VAU Any extensions can be defined as 1 digit which to be dialed from outside caller on DUD DISA with VAU Adaptor The outside caller is able to access to the desired extension department group by dialing only 1 digit after the system automatically answered Note If same number is used for Ist digit of extension number and Idigit access code on DUD DISA out side caller can not access directly to the extension Example if 1 digit access code 2 is assigned to department group 300 outside caller can not access to extension 200 to 299 directly Because outside caller tries to dial extension 200 however after dialing 2 it goes to department 300 immediately by 1 digit access function 172 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Conditions The DISA caller must use a telephone with DTMF sender This feature available for outside caller Default Setting No DTMF receive blocks reserved for analog trunk DTMF reception The DTMF Receiver Active Time is
252. his feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff for incoming An extension s Class of Service does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff for outgoing A trunk port s condition does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff for incoming A trunk port s condition does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff for outgoing The long conversation Cutoff timer for incoming is no setting The long conversation Cutoff timer for outgoing is no setting Options None 322 Long Conversation Cutoff Cont d Programming For each Trunk Line should the system be able to automatic Cutoff for long conversation In 0921 Item 1 No Yes In 0921 Item 1 enter 0 enter 1 Do you want an extension to use automatic Cutoff for long conversation to incoming call Yes In 0406 Item 107 enter 1 In 0405 Timer 77 set the Long Conversation for incoming call Cutoff interval 0 64800 seconds Yes In 0406 Item 108 enter 1 In 0405 Timer 78 set the Long Conversation for outgoing call In 0406 Item 107 No enter 0 Do you want an extension to use automatic Cutoff for long conversation to outgoing call In 0406 Item 108 No enter 0 Cutoff interval 0 64800 seconds In 1005 assign Class of Service to ex
253. hold 1005 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a keys as a Park Hold Orbit key code 1033 plus Park Hold Group number 1014 Park Hold Group Assign an extension to a Park Hold Group 1 8 An extension can only pick up a call Parked by a member of its own Park Hold Group Related Features Hold A user can place a call in a temporary waiting state without putting it in orbit Programmable Function Key Function keys simplify Park Hold operation 395 Park Hold Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To Park Hold a call You can Park Hold Intercom of Trunk Line calls 1 Press Park Hold key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1033 Use Paging to announce call Y N Press SPK to hang up OR Press HOLD Dial 831 Dial Park Hold orbit 1 8 Use Paging to announce call Se te aly es Press SPK to hang up To pick up a park held call 1 Lift handset 2 Press Park Hold key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1033 OR 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 861 3 Dial announced Park orbit 1 8 lt Single Line Telephone gt To Park Hold a call You can Park Hold Intercom or Trunk Line calls Press HOLD Dial 831 Dial Park Hold orbit 1 8 Use Paging to announce call Aedes adn a Press SPK to hang up To pick up a parked call 1 Off hook 2 Dial 861 3 Dial announced Park orbit 1 8 396 Par
254. ial tone again NN Dial the system extension directly or feature access service code Used DTMF tone 181 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Operation Cont d To place an extension call directly 1 Hear second unique dial tone 2 Dial a system extension directly To place an Operator call directly 1 Hear second unique dial tone 2 Dial an Operator access code To place an External Group Paging 1 Hear second unique dial tone 2 Dial 803 3 Dial the group number 1 8 or 0 for All Call 4 Make announcement To place an Internal Group Paging 1 Hear second unique dial tone 2 Dial 801 3 Dial the group number 1 9 or 01 32 4 Make announcement To place a call over a Trunk Line Group 1 Hear second unique dial tone 2 Dial 804 3 Dial line group number 1 9 or 01 32 4 Dial telephone number To place a call using Trunk Line Group Routing 1 Hear second unique dial tone 2 Dial 9 Trunk Line Group Routing Code 3 Dial telephone number To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number 1 Hear second unique dial tone 2 Dial 813 3 Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code 000 399 182 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Operation Cont d To continued Trunk to Trunk conversation 1 Conversation to another outside party 2 Hear 1 sec signal tone 3 Dial DISA Continue code within DISA conversation disconnect tim
255. ict table to prevent only certain calls or you can build a permit table to allow only certain calls To allow most international calls use the International Call Restrict Table To prevent most international calls use the International Call Allow Table The system can have one Inter national Call Restrict table and one International Call Allow table with up to 10 digits in each table entry Valid entries are 0 9 and FLSH for a wild card Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialing You can have abbreviated Dialing bypass or follow Toll Restriction If you allow many users to program Abbreviated Dialing you ll probably want to Toll Restrict the numbers they dial If only administrators can program Abbreviated Dialing Toll Restriction may not be necessary You can separately restrict Group and Common Abbreviated Dialing Local Call Digit Counting Use Local Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial You can use this option to prevent users from accessing local dial up services For example set the Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to 7 to limit local callers to dialing the Trunk code NNX and local address nnnn only You can make four entries for this option The range is 4 8 digits Toll Call Digit Counting With Toll Call Digit Counting you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can dial This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial up servic
256. ide caller does not hear the warning tones In addition warning tones do not occur for Intercom calls and incoming Trunk Line calls There are two types of warning tones Alarm Tone 1 and Alarm Tone 2 Alarm Tone 1 is the first set of tones that occur after the user initially places a Trunk Line call Alarm Tone 2 broadcasts periodically after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder Each alarm tone consists of three short beeps Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting The first warning tone occurs after 170 seconds Additional warning tones occur every 180 seconds An extension s Class of Service enables Long Conversation Warning Options None 325 Long Conversation Warning Cont d Programming In Program 0406 Ne Do you Want all exenslel Vee In Program 0406 Item 3 enter 0 loviave wy arning Tone Tor Item 3 enter 1 f i a Long Conversation _ i i In Program 1005 assign a Class of Service to the extension In program 0405 Timer 24 set the Long Conversation Alarm 1 interval 0 64800 seconds Entering 0 disables the timer which also disables Long Conversation Alarm 2 In Program 0405 Time Do you want to disable 25 enter the Long f just Long Conversation Conversation Alarm 2 Alarm 2 interval 1 64800 seconds In Program 0405 Timer 25 enter 0 326 Long Conversation Warning Cont d Programming Cont d R
257. ided on each keyphone to adjust the volume level for incoming Ring Background Music Paging announcements Handsfree and the handset With Volume Controls each keyphone user can individually set volumes to their most comfortable level The user can adjust their controls while on a call or when the phone is idle lt Note gt For the Ist generation type of keyphones except LC2 type the slide switch had been provided at the left side of the phone In the case incoming ring volume shall be adjusted by the switch Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting None Options None Programming None Related Features None Operation To adjust the volume of incoming Ring Background Music Paging announcements Handsfree and the handset 1 Press VOL A or VOL V You can press the volume keys while on a call or when your phone is idle 538 Walking Toll Restriction Description Walking Toll Restriction lets you temporally permit to make outgoing call which is originally restricted at the extension by entering your password Each password carries own toll restriction class Once the system permits you to make outgoing call continuous attempt is not accepted after terminate the first call unless entering the password again Condition This feature is available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone Default Setting Maximum 50 passwords can be stored to the memory All
258. in each restrict most calls table In Program 0702 Item 6 program the Restrict Codes tables The system has four tables with 60 entries in each table For a Toll Restriction In Program 0701 Item 11 In Program 0701 Item 11 enable the Restrict Code enable the Permit Code Table 1 4 you want to use Table 1 4 you want to use In Program 0701 Item 12 In Program 0701 Item 12 disable 0 the Permit disable 0 the Restrict Code Table Code Table In Program 0701 Item 13 In Program 0701 Item 13 enable 1 the Transfer of disable 0 the Transfer of restriction completed trunk restriction completed trunk Go to the flow chart on the following page 481 Toll Restriction Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page In Program 0702 Item 1 For a Toll Restriction In Program 0702 Item 2 program me International Class do you want to program the International Call Restrict Table The system allow most International Call Permit Table The has one table with ten calls or restrict most system has one table with entries in each table International calls ten entries in each table Restrict In Program 0702 Item 1 In Program 0702 Item 2 enable 1 the International enable 1 the International Call Restrict Table Call Permit Table In Program 0701 Item 2 In Program 0701 Item 1 disable 0 the International disable 0 the International Call Permit Table C
259. ing call 4 Conversation with 2nd Line 5 Press TRER Ist and 2nd Lines shall be connected BLF Lamp of both Line keys lights in red 6 Go on hook Note If Command 0402 Item 2 is set to 2 the above operation is not activated Operation 3 from Conference mode 1 Conversation with Ist and 2nd Line 3 party Conference 2 Press TRER Ist and 2nd Lines shall be connected BLF Lamp of both Line keys lights in green 3 Go on hook 520 Unsupervised Conference Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To release the Unsupervised Conference in case of Analogue to Analogue Conference only in case of Busy Tone Detection is not programmed 1 Press one of the Line key which lights in green 2 Listen the talk status still making conversation or already finished 3 If both Lines are making conversation press TRFR to go on hook Unsupervised Conference shall be continued OR 3 If both Lines are already finished conversation Busy Tone is heard then go on hook to finish the Unsupervised Conference mode lt Single Line Telephone gt 1 Conversation with 1st Line 2 Tap hook switch for hold Ist Line 3 Seize 2nd Line then place outgoing call 4 Conversation with 2nd Line 5 Go on hook gt 1st and 2nd Lines shall be connected 521 VAU Fixed Message VAU Description VAU Fixed Message gives extension users to listen the Oper
260. ing does the system allow the re try to page by personal message Yes No Do you change the Service Code for Meet Me Paging Yes Transfer by Personal Message No 343 In 2201 enter 1 all VAU personal message clear In 2202 Item 2 change the message length In 0405 Item 64 assign the re sending interval time Refer to Flexible System numbering feature Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 31 VAU fixed message Set the use 0 or not use 1 VAU fixed message for VAU features When you set to not use 1 you can not use Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message feature gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 63 VAU no answer time VAU Set the waiting time 0 64800 seconds of Paging Transfer for incoming call from outside caller when all VAU path are busy If all VAU path are busy while waiting time Incoming call transfer to transferring ring group CMD 2204 gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 64 Message re send duration time for paging VAU Set the duration time when no answer to Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message re send the personal message for paging speaker gt 0406 COS Options Item 99 Personal Message VAU In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate a Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU
261. inistration telephone or the extension user can do it themselves Depending on your telephone you either have 16 24 or 32 Programmable Function Keys 0 Line keysets don t have function keys Refer to Table 1 4 for Programmable Function Key functions Conditions This feature available for key telephone without DX2E 0T TEL Default Setting All Programmable Function Key are line keys Service Code for programmable function key programming is dial 851 Options None Programming gt 0406 Class of Service Options Item 69 Programmable function key programming In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to program their own function keys gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 36 Programmable function key programming Assign a service code for programmable function key programming gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign the functions of a keyset s Programmable Function Key gt 1011 Function Key Initialization Initialize an extension s Programmable Function Key This makes all keys key 1 line key 2 etc You may want to do this if you have to reassign an extension s keys 439 Programmable Function Key Cont d Programming Cont d Should extension be able to program their own function keys Yes In 0406 Item 69 enter 1 In 0406 Item 69 No enter 0 In 1005 assign Extension users dial Class of Service to Servic
262. ion gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Assign a service code for Follow Me Item 9 dial 846 gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Follow Me code 1001 Related Features Programmable Function Key Function keys simplify Follow Me operation 232 Follow Me Cont d Programming Cont d Should extension In 0406 Item 26 be able to use nter Follow Me S i Should extension have one button access to Follow Me In 0406 Item 26 enter 0 In 1005 assign In 1006 assign a Class of Service to Follow Me key extensions code 1001 Do you change the Yes Refer to Flexible Service Code for gt System Numbering Follow Me feature i 233 Follow Me Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate Follow Me 1 Use this procedure at the extension that will receive Forwarded calls destination Press Follow Me key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1001 OR Press idle CL key and dial 846 2 Dial 1 to set Call key Following 4 Dial the extension who s calls you want to intercept source Confirmation tone is heard Repeat steps 1 3 to enable Call Following with Follow Me for additional extensions Press SPK to hang up To cancel or reroute Follow Me 1 Press Follow Me key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1001
263. ion cut off for incoming cut off for incoming Trunk Cut off call 108 Long conversation On off the long conversation automatic Long Conversation 0 off cut off for outgoing cut off for outgoing Trunk Cut off call 109 119 Not used 120 Forced trunk On off an extension s ability to use forced Forced Trunk 0 off disconnect service trunk disconnect service Disconnect Dial block On off an extension s ability to use Dial Dial Block Block 122 Trunk port disable On off an extension s ability to use Trunk Trunk Port Disable Port Disable 123 Indicate Caller ID On off an extension s ability to indicate Caller ID information Caller ID information on the LCD 124 Edit Caller ID table On off an extension s ability to edit Caller ID Caller ID table 125 Incoming holding On off an extension s ability to answer Intercom answer by CL1 2 incoming holding call by CL1 or CL2 key key External incoming On off an extension s ability to answer Trunk incoming answer with service trunk incoming call by service code Call code Protect for the call On off an extension s ability to protect the Intercom mode switching call mode to be switched by the caller from caller intercom Cafas SSCS Note on Enable off Disable 113 Condition Guidance Message VAU Description Condition Guidance Message gives key telephone users to listen date time and own extension number Cond
264. ique digit 0 9 1106 DLS Console Key Assignments Assign trunk line to each DLS Console keys Related Features One Touch Dialing Like a One Touch Key a user can have DLS Console keys for Direct Station Selection or Trunk Line Calling DSS Console Basically same functions are provided for one touch access to extension or trunk line except 10 functional keys of DSS Console 186 DLS Console Cont d Operation Calling an extension from your DLS Console as DSS key usage Confirm 24DLS Range Selection key shows OFF 1 Press DLS Console key If the call voice announces you can make it ring by dialing 1 Extension Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is The assigned extension is On Busy on a call Off Idle Flashing fast In Do Not Disturb Placing a Trunk line call from your DLS Console as DLS usage Confirm 24DLS Range Selection key shows ON 1 Press DLS Console key assigned for Trunk Line 2 Dial outside number Trunk Line Busy Lamp Field When DLS key is The assigned trunk line is On Busy on a call Off Idle Flashing slowly Ringing Answering a Trunk Line call from your DLS Console as DLS usage Confirm 24DLS Range Selection key shows ON 1 Press flashing DLS Console key 187 Do Not Disturb Description Do Not disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements DND permits an extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming c
265. ircuit requires 5 24 VDC power supply in series with the alarm contacts Refer to the hardware manual for additional details Default Setting PGDU sensors 1 8 card 1 amp 2 are set as alarm sensors PGDU sensors are normally open External alarms don t alert extensions Options DX2E 4PGDU S1 216 External Alarm Sensor Cont d Programming Do you need Yes External Alarm Sensors In 0304 make sure PGDU No sensors are type 0 not used or 2 for bridged fax operation In 0304 program PGDU sensors for type 1 alarm In 0304 Additional Information for each sensor assign one of the three alert tones 1 3 to each sensor In 0304 Additional No Should alarms provide Yes Information for each sensor distinctive alert tones assign the same alert to extension tone to each sensor Is sensor s In 0305 enter 0 for associated alarm In 0305 enter 1 for each sm ie contact normally each sensor fear toa ee y close open or normally toa pe y open relay closed relay Normally closed Do you want In 1010 enter 0 for extension to In 1010 enter 1 for each sensor that should broadcast an alert each sensor that should not alert extension tone when the alert extension alarm activates 217 External Alarm Sensor Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0304 Alarm Sensor FAX Sensor Setup PGDU Card For external alarm sensors program the PGDU
266. is display Call Forward Your extension is idle and you have previously Time and Date i activated Call Forward Service Code 848 FWD ext name Reeve Name shows destination extension Call Forward Your extension is idle and you have previously Time and Date i i FWD DUAL name activated Call Forward dual Ring Service Code 842 Name shows destination extension Call Forward Your extension is idle and you have previously Time and Date TRNS NA ext name activated Unanswered Call Transfer Service Code 845 Name shows destination extension Call Forward Your extension is idle and you have previously Time and Date i activated Busy Transfer Service Code 843 TRNS BUSY ext name es Name shows destination extension Call Forward SET DUAL RING You dial Service Code 842 to enable Call 1 SET 0 CANCEL Forward Dual Ringing Call Forward SET BUSY TRANSFER You dial Service Code 842 to enable Busy 1 SET 0 CANCEL Transfer Call Forward SET NO ANS TRANSFER You dial Service Code 845 to enable 1 SET 0 CANCEL Unanswered Call Transfer Call Forward SET FORWARD You dial Service Code 848 to enable Call 1 SET 0 CANCEL Forward Call Forward You dial 1 to set Call Forward System asks ICM DIAL you to enter the destination extension number Call Forward You dial a Call Forward Service Code and 0 to CANCEL cancel Call Forward Call Pickup Time and Date You have intercepted a call using Call Pickup CALL P U ext name Call Pic
267. ish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 3 c Dial 7 re record 4 c Dial message number 01 16 5 c You hear Please start recording lt beep gt OR Three times of beep tone 6 c Recording VAU message by your voice 7 c Press SPK to hang up finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To operate the VAU message Automated Attendant Message and Automated Attendant Error Message 1 Off hook 2 Dial 716 3 a 4 a 5 a 3 b Dial message number 01 16 5 b 6 b 3 c 4 c 5 c 6 c 7 c Dial 3 erase Dial message number 01 16 On hook finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c Dial 5 listen You hear recorded VAU message On hook finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c Dial 7 re record Dial message number 01 16 You Hear Please start recording lt beep gt OR Three times of beep tone Recording VAU message by your voice On hook finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 4 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b 59 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt DISA Outside Caller gt To record the VAU message Automated Attendant Message and Automated Attendant Error Message from outside 1 2 QUE ON
268. itions This feature is available for key telephone Options DX2E VAU A module VAU Expansion Board Programming No i Yes In 0401 Item 31 Should extensions be able In 0401 Item 31 enter 1 to use Condition Guidance SnterO Message Related Features None 114 Condition Guidance Message VAU Cont d Operation To listen the date 1 Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key 2 Dial 3 3 Listen date ex The day is Thursday seven fourteen ninety nine Thursday July 14 1999 To listen the own extension number 1 Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key 2 Dial 6 3 Listen extension number ex This is station Two o one 201 To listen the time 1 Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key 2 Dial 8 3 Listen the time ex The time is eleven five AM 11 05AM 115 Conference Description Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation With Conference a user may set up a multiple party telephone meeting without leaving the office The system allows either four or eight parties maximum per conference Up to two outside parties can be joined in Conference on analogue trunks Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting System allows four party conferences An extension s Class of Service allows initiating a Conference C
269. k Hold Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt To use On hook auto transfer feature to transfer a call 1 Make conversation with outside party 2 Press Park Hold key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1033 3 Dial desired extension number 4 Hang up or press TRFR key This call shall be transferred lt Single Line Telephone gt To use On hook auto transfer feature to transfer a call 1 Make conversation with outside party 1 Do hook flash for hold the line 2 Dial 831 3 Dial Park Hold orbit 1 8 4 Dial desired extension number 5 Hang up This call shall be transferred 397 PBX Compatibility Description You can connect your phone system trunks to Centrex PBX lines rather than to telco Trunk line circuits This makes the trunk inputs into the system single line telephone compatible Centrex PBX extensions rather than telco circuits PBX Compatibility lets the system be a node i e satellite in a larger private telephone network To place outside calls when the system is behind a PBX phone system users must first dial the PBX s trunk access code usually 9 The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options e PBX Trunk Access Code Screening The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk access codes The system can screen for up to 4 trunk access codes The codes can be one or two digits long consisting of the digits 0 9 and You use the FLSH key as
270. k Line call 308 Last Number Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 48 Should an extension be able In 0406 Item 48 enter 0 n to use Last Number Dialing a enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions 309 Last Number Dialing Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To redial your last call 1 Optional Press idle line key If you skip the system automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group as your original call 2 Press LND OR 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 816 The system automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group as your original call To check the number kept for Last Number Dialing This feature only available for key telephone with display 1 Press LND The stored number displays for six seconds The stored number dials out if you lift the handset Press an idle line key Press an idle CL key or Press SPK 2 Press CLEAR To erase the kept number 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 876 Confirmation tone is heard lt Single Line Telephone gt To redial your last call 1 Off hook 2 Dial 816 The system automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group as your original call To check the number kept for Last Number Dialing This feature only available for key telephone with display To erase the kept number 1 Off hook 2 Dial 876 Confirmation tone is heard 310 LCR Least
271. keys Ringing Line Preference answers the calls on a first in first answered basis 315 Line Preference Cont d Default Setting Ringing Trunk Line calls have answer priority over ringing Intercom calls Trunk Line doesn t ring extensions All extensions have full access to all Trunk Lines Extension users hear Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines not set Options None Programming gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 8 Priority for incoming call Determine if ringing Intercom calls 0 or ringing Trunk Line calls should have answer priority See the table below for interaction gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 12 Auto Answer to Incoming Call from Extension Enable Idle 0 or Ringing 1 Line Preference for Intercom calls See the table below for interaction gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 13 Auto answer to incoming Trunk line call Enable Idle 0 or Ringing 1 Line Preference for Trunk line calls See the table below for interaction Program 0401 Ringing Ringing ltem 12 Intercom ne pore lh the handset Seizes idle line appearance ee o Seizes idle line appearance If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1 answers ringing trunk If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0 seizes idle line appearance If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1 answers ringing trunk If Josie 0401 Item 8 is 0 seizes idle line appearance Seizes idle line appearance If Pr
272. kup trk name HH MM SS ___ You use Call Pickup to intercept a call ringing a CALL P U ext name phone in a pickup group Call Timer trk name HH MM SS _ You place an outside call and the Call Timer digits starts HH MM 14 Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 4 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Camp On Callback Time and Date You have 850 to camp on to a busy extension Extension CAMP ON ext name Name shows the destination extension Camp On Callback Time and date You have dialed 870 to cancel a Camp On or CAMP CANCEL Callback Camp On Callback Time and Date Extension at which you left a Callback shown ean CALL BACK extname in the name field is calling you back Camp on Callback trk name The trunk you queued for is calling you back Trunk Line CALL BACK Camp On Trunk Time and Date You have queued for a busy trunk line CAMP LINE Conference CONF You press the Conference key to initiate a ICM DIAL Conference Conference name You have set up a Conference where name name is either an extension or trunk name Dial Block Time and Date You blocking dial for your extension DIAL BLOCK Dial Number PREVIEW DIAL You use Preview Dial to preview your call Preview DIAL digits before dialing it out Direct Station You press ALT to activate Alternate Answering Selection DSS ae ee nee DUTY Console Do Not Disturb Time and Date You press DND a
273. l Automatic Off hook Signaling Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Off hook signaling This option is set in the calling extension s Class of Service Manual Off hook Signaling When the above option is not set then system provides this option In case of reaching to a busy extension the caller can dial service code or press function key to send Off hook Signaling to the called keyphone manually Prefer Off hook Signaling at the keyphone with CDHF A If the keyphone with CDHF A user sets this mode by service code called mode shall be Off hook Signaling not Voice Over Conditions The Off hook Signal call is available for key telephone and single line telephone When single line telephone receives Off hook signaling short beep tone is heard Default Setting An extension s COS allows it to receive Off hook Signaling An extension s COS prevents it from automatically sending Off hook Signaling Off hook Signaling is muted Program 1008 Item 5 0 Service code for Off hook Signaling is dial 809 Service code for setting of forced Off hook Signaling is dial 893 One digit service code for Off hook Signaling is no setting 301 Intercom Off Hook Signaling Cont d Programming An extension user can dial S An extension user can dial Service Code 892 to change Service Code 893 to change the mode to Voice Over Voice the mode to Ring In Program 0401 Item Ring Should Override ri
274. l Operation Zo gt MSG2 MSG2 gt MSG2 gt CMD _0414 CMD_0414 em4a ITEM4 DISC_TIME 1 CMD_ 0405 ITEM43 Notel If DISC_TIME 0 a queuing call will not be cut after 2nd message has been sent and the 2nd message process will be continue Note2 If the preprogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_43 has passed after sending Incoming Queue Message VAU the Queue Message process will finish and the external line will be cut Note3 If the preprogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_62 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 0919 290 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Appendix Cont d 2 STG Call Timer Only 2 1 1st message to 2nd message MSG1 1 17 MSG1_ TIME 1 64800 MSG2 1 17 MSG2_TIME 1 64800 gt MSG r MSGI ccad MSG2 _p MSG2 CMD_0414 CMD_0414 CMD 0414 MEM im ITEM4 MSG1_TIME MSG2_ TIME DISC_TIME CMD_0405 DUD DISA ITEM35 DIL ITEM62 CMD_0414 DDI ITEM 9 2 2 1st message only MSG1 1 17 MSG1_TIME 1 64800 MSG2 0 or MSG2_TIME 0 gt MA MSGi m M CMD_0414 CMD_0414 MSG1_TIME 9 TEM4 e TeM4 CMD_0405 DUD DISA ITEM35 DIL ITEM62 CMD_0414 DDI ITEM 9
275. l telephone number but it goes to the extension directly through KTS PABX switch box lt Note gt Generally in the telecommunication world the above function may be called either DID Direct Inward Dialing or DDI Direct Dialing In even though the functionality is exactly same In this manual the word DID DDI shall be used for easy reference For ISDN DDI DID in case of the destination is busy no answer or vacant number is dialed from outside then Ist and 2nd transfer tables even divert to outside party can be programmed for more flexibility Conditions This feature is available for outside caller on DID DDD trunk Default Setting This feature is not assigned Options DX2E 8 4 BRIU S1 lt for ISDN BRI gt DX2E PRIU S1 lt for ISDN PRI gt Programming gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 30 Inter Digit Timer for Trunk Define Inter Digit Timer for Trunk 5 sec is recommended Note This timer assignment is required in case 2nd Trunk type is Analogue The system connects DID DDI incoming call and transferred to destination party after this timer has passed In case 2 Trunk type is Digital ISDN this timer assignment is not related gt 0405 System Timers Part A Item 31 DDI no answer time Define the ringing duration period After timeout this call shall be transferred to the next target in accordance with Command 1814 1815 and 1809 gt 0406 Class of Service Options Item 79 Exte
276. l the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 1809 1810 1814 and 1815 respectively Case 4 When DUD DISA trunk line Command 0901 Item_14 17 1 or 2 receives a station group address in All busy Incoming Queue Message VAU will be automatically sent by the Command 2214 If there will be one idle station in the accessed Station Group during the Incoming Queue Message VAU process the Queue Message process will finish If the pre programmed time Command 0405 Timer_35 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 1802 and 1803 respectively Case 5 When DIL trunk line Command 0901 Item_14 17 4 receives a station group address in All busy Incoming Queue Message VAU will be automatically sent by the Command 2214 If there will be one idle station in the accessed Station Group during the Incoming Queue Message VAU process the Queue Message process will finish If the pre programmed time Command 0405 Timer_62 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 0919 Default Setting This feature is not assigned Fixed Waiting Message is assigned as Ist and 2nd Waiting Message 278 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming For Case 1 and 2 In 2213 MSG1 enter 1 to
277. l transfer it to incoming ring group as programmed 171 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Description Cont d Night Service for Trunk Line Type You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode For example a Trunk Line can be a normal Trunk Line during the day and a DISA Trunk Line at night You can also set the routing for DISA Trunk Line when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension dials incorrectly or forgets to dial Trunk to Trunk Transfer for DISA DISA caller can be transferred to another Trunk line by operating their telephone set DISA caller can place a call by Dialing a Trunk Line Group Access Code Dialing a Trunk Line Group Routing Code The system provides flexibility in the way each DISA Class No can place Trunk to Trunk Transferring Trunk line This system applies Toll Restriction according to User number for DISA password class Trunk to Trunk Transfer by Abbreviated Dialing DISA caller can be dialing to another Trunk line by Common Abbreviated Dialing Continued Code for Trunk to Trunk Transfer This system automatically disconnects call for Trunk to Trunk Transfer after DISA Conversation time and DISA Disconnect time When you would like continued conversation you dial Continued Code To use DISA the outside caller Place a Trunk to Trunk Transfer for DISA Heard 1 sec signal tone after DISA Conversation time Dial Continued Code 1 digit wit
278. lass of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying of a Trunk s name number when the Trunk is ringing gt 0406 COS Options Item 39 Extension No and Name Display conversation In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the incoming Intercom caller s name and number gt 0406 COS Options Item 40 Extension No and Name Display incoming In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the pre answer display of the incoming Intercom caller s name and number gt 0406 COS Options Item 42 Transfer Information Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s incoming Transfer pre answer display gt 0406 COS Options Item 51 Call Pick up Information Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s Group Call Pickup display gt 0406 COS Options Item 88 Busy status displaying In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 for the Busy status displaying to monitor Caution If Busy Status Displaying feature is to be used then this item should be set to 6679 Related Features Refer to Table 1 4 in Introduction section Operation Display indication appears automatically as operated 44 _ Audio Communications Interface ACI Description The Audio Communication Interface ACI provides three audio ports with associated relays for Music on Hold Exter
279. lay Programmable For this key function You see this display Function Key OVERRIDE BREAK IN CAMP ON STEP CALL DND FWD OVERRIDE MESSAGE WAITING Not used ROOM MONITOR TRANSMIT CUT OFF TEXT MESSAGE 00 CHANCE HEADSET MODE DATA PRIVACY BUZZER BOSS CALL FORWARD PARK HOLD 00 SERIES OPERATION SERIES CALL 00 VIRTUAL EXTENSION ABB COMMON DIAL ABB GROUP DIAL SET DAY SET NIGHT 1 SET NIGHT 2 SET BREAK EXCLUSIVE HOLD KEYBOARD DIAL Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 21 Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 11 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Programmable For this key function You see this display Function Key Not used CALL FORWARD Not used Not used DSS ICM VOICE MAIL MSG CONVERSATION RECORD CONV RECORDING MAIL BOX RE RECORDING Not used CANCEL CONV REC PLAY MESSAGE SKIP MESSAGE IMMEDIAE DELIVERY AUTO ATTENDANT Not used EDIT CALLER I D PILOT GROUP WITHDRAW Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used VAU QUEUE MESSAGE INTERNAL LND IND CALLER ID TBL CHECK MISSED CALL 24DLS SELECT RANGE Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 12 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Programmable KEY PROGRAM You dial S
280. ld Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0302 Music on Hold and Conference Setup Item 1 Music on Hold tone Set the Music on Hold selection The options are 0 no tone 1 synthesized Minuet in G 2 synthesized Nocturne For external MOH purpose don t set 0 gt 0914 Setting the Music on Hold Source Set the Music on Hold source gt 1301 Basic ACI port setup Set the ACI port type The option are 0 no setting 1 Input for ACI port 2 Output for ACI port Related Feature Music on Hold Operation None 224 Flash Description Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting Trunk Line loop current Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected public network or PBX offers You must set appropriate Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected public network or PBX lines Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone by service code The system does not provide a ground flash Default Setting Flash timer Hooking 1 is 800 mS Open Loop Disconnect timer is 2 496 seconds A single line telephone extension s Class of Service enables Flash Flash is always set for open loop not ground All Trunk Line use timed Flash mode not open loop disconnect Options None Programming Note See programming flow chart on the following page gt 0114 Analog Trunk Lin
281. ld The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension On Hook Holding for SLT A single line telephone user can on hook when holding On hook holing possible to get dialing Service Code after hooking For Normal Hold Exclusive Hold and Group Hold the user can re answer the hold line by simply pressing TRER key Conditions This feature available key telephone and single line telephone 262 Hold Cont d Default Setting The HOLD key activates System Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Time is 90 seconds Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time is 30 seconds Hold Recall Time is 90 seconds Hold Recall Callback Time is 30 seconds Forced Release of Held Calls is disabled Group Hold is enabled all extensions are in group 1 No Exclusive hold keys assigned Service Code of group hold is dial 832 Service Code of pick up group hold is dial 862 Service Code of Enabled on hook when holding SLT is dial 849 Service Code of Answer on hook when holding SLT is dial 859 All Key Telephone users can re answer the last hold line by pressing TRFR key Options None 263 Hold Cont d Programming In 0402 Item 4 enter 0 System Should extension s HOLD key be for System or Exclusive Hold Do calls left on System Hold No too long recall after an A ee Beret acceptable interval Yes Exclusive In 0402 Item 4 enter 1 E A ee
282. ld call to be replaced 462 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Cont d Description Cont d Default Setting No DCI circuit types programmed System and Alarm Reports use DCI port 1 System date is American format No SMDR digits masked SMDR includes all outgoing calls regardless of number of digits dialed SMDR printer port is not assigned Outgoing calls of any duration print All No Answer calls print SMDR report includes all calls blocked by Toll Restriction If system is behind a PBX all calls to PBX print an SMDR report Internal data calls print on SMDR report All report summaries enabled No DCI extension numbers defined All Trunk lines print out on SMDR report Internal RS 232 C parameters for SMDR DCI are 2400 baud no stop bits 8 data bits and no parity All DCI ports set for RS 232 C All DCI ports not initialized Incoming call report not out put Extension status printouts by extension name The system outputs ALB information to printer PC The system does not output the Conversion Table Name information to printer PC The system does not output Date information to printer PC Options DX2E DCI A B or DX2E 3DCI A Printout Format 1 Conversation table name output CLASS TIME LINE DURATION STATION DIALED No CLI RD COST ACCOUNT 01 IVIN 10 10 John EXT200 44556677 2 Date Information output CLASS TIME DATE LI
283. le yes i ee ant 59 to change the incoming In ae 59 ee T ring tones T No Should extension be able yes m so a ae to check listen to the 0 rca 86 aa n incoming ring tones a i In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Do you change the paa e Service Code for Yes i Refer to Flexible Trunk Line Incoming l System Numbering ring tone switching and feature Check of Ring Tone Pssseeeeeeem opm 1 17 3 457 Selectable Ring Tone Cont d Related Features None Operation To change your extension s incoming ring tones 1 5 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 820 3 4 Dial code for the desired ring pattern Dial 1 to set Intercom ring 2 to set Trunk Line ring 1 High pitch 2 Medium pitch 3 Low pitch Press SPK to hang up To listen to the incoming ring choices 1 2 3 Press idle CL key Dial 811 Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring 2 to listen to Trunk Line ring For Trunk Line ring enter the tone you want to listen to followed by the System Dial code for the desired ring pattern 1 High pitch 2 Medium pitch 3 Low pitch Press SPK to hang up 458 Series Call Description Series Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension Series Calling saves transferring steps between users For example a Customer Service Representative CSR has a client of certain costs when Tech Service is
284. le Line Telephone gt This feature only available for key telephone Exclusive Hold lt Key Telephone gt To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold 1 Press Exclusive Hold key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1044 A line key flashes slowly while on Hold flashes fast when recalling To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold 1 Press flashing line key OR 1 Press TRER key to re answer lt Single Line Telephone gt To place an outside call on System Hold 1 Hook Flash To pick up an outside call an System Hold 1 Hook Flash 269 Hold Cont d Operation Cont d Group Hold lt Key Telephone gt To place a call on Hold so anyone in your extension group can pick it up 1 Press HOLD 2 Dial 832 3 Press SPK to hang up To pick up a call on Group Hold 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 862 OR 1 Press TRER key to re answer lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a call on Hold so anyone in your extension group can pick it up 1 Hook Flash 2 Dial 832 3 On hook To pick up a call on Group Hold 1 Off hook 2 Dial 862 Intercom Hold lt Key Telephone gt To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press HOLD 2 Press SPK to hang up To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press SPK 2 Press flashing CL key lt Single Line Telephone gt To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Hook Flash To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Hook Flash 27
285. ller Dial 803 Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for All Call Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b 349 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer lt Key Telephone gt To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message Press idle CL key Dial 713 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for caller Dial 801 Dial the Internal Paging Group code 1 8 Hear Please start recording lt beep gt Recording Personal Message for paging Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a of To operate OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b of To operate OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c of To operate On OO ON Ange ee Ne ah To answer Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 715 and specified extension number To operate the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 713 3 Hear To re record dial 7 to listen dial 5 to erase dial 3 4 a Dial 3 erase 5 a Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c 350 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation
286. lls on Hold and parked calls The music lets the caller know that his call is waiting not forgotten Without Music on Hold the system provides silence to these types of calls Music on Hold is generated from the internal music source Optionally customer s music device such as CD player or Radio can be used as the source For the details refer to External Music on Hold Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting Default password for changing MOH is 0000 The Music on Hold selection is Minuet An extension s Class of Service permits changing the Music on Hold tone All Trunk Line use the internal Music on Hold source Options None Programming gt 0202 Setting the User Password Item 1 Setting of Data and Time and Changing the Music on Hold Tone Set the password for a user must dial before changing the Music on Hold tone four digits gt 0302 Music on Hold and Conference Setup Item 1 Music on Hold tone Set the Music on Hold selection The options are 0 no tone or external 1 synthesized Minuet in G 2 synthesized Nocturne gt 0406 COS Options Item 45 Changing the Music on Hold Tone In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to change the Music on Hold tone Service Code 881 gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 1 Change of music on hold tone Assign a Service Code for chang
287. lls to another extension Call Forward ensures that the user s calls are covered when they are away from their work area There are four types of Call Forward for internal usage Call Forward All calls forward immediately to the destination and only the destination rings Call Forward with Dual Ringing All calls forward immediately to the destination and both the destination and the forwarded extension ring Busy Transfer Calls forward only when the extension is busy Unanswered Call Transfer Calls forward only if they are unanswered Ring No Answer Calls Forward reroutes calls from the initiating forwarding extension To reroute calls from the destination extension use Call Forward with Forward with Follow Me Additionally the feature that a call forwards to an external party is provided For the details refer to External Call Forward Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Note The system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards For example extension 216 forwards to 218 and 218 in turn forwards to 220 However the calls to 216 don t route to 220 Default Setting Delayed Call Forward interval is 10 seconds Extension users can activate Call Forward Immediate Both Ringing When Busy and When Unanswered Service Code of Call forward with dual ring is dial 842 Service Code of Busy transfer is dial 843 Service Code of Unanswered call transf
288. lt lt the incoming trunk and the transferring extension In 0406 Item 42 No enter 0 Should extension be able to see the incoming pre answer display Yes In 0406 Item 42 enter 1 The Transfer Callback display shows TRF RECALL and the number of the extension that didn t pick up In 0406 Item 95 No enter 0 Should extension be able to see the Transfer Callback display Assign Class of Service to extensions Yes In 0406 Item 95 enter 1 Continued on next page 491 Transfer Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Should an extension retrieve the last Transferred line by pressing the incoming line key In 0401 Item 21 In 0401 Item 21 enter 0 enter 1 Should extensions be allowed to Transfer calls to busy extensions In 0401 Item 19 No Yes In 0401 Item 19 enter 0 enter 1 In 0405 Item 5 change the Transfer Recall time If an extension s Transfer is not picked up does it recall in an adequate time Yes Hook switch For single line telephones Hook switch In 0401 Item 18 894 should hook switch or enter 0 hook switch 894 answer to Call Waiting call In 0401 Item 18 enter 1 492 Transfer Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 18 Call waiting answer method For a busy single line telephones set the mode used t
289. lt Code display and S register programming refer to Table DCI 5 DCI Hotline DCI Hotline sets up a nailed up permanent connection between a DCI Module and another DCI During programming you set the DCI Module as the source and the other DCI as the target When the user at the source presses the keyset data key the system automatically sets up the data link to the target DCI You could use a DCI Hotline at a terminal connected through the phone system to a mini computer When the terminal user presses the keyset Hotline key the terminal goes on line to the mini computer 126 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Speed Conversion The system can automatically compensate for speed differences between two connected data device For example a PC receiving at 2400 baud can accept files sent by another PC at 19 2K baud There is no need for the two devices to match their communications speed Physical Ports and Software Ports DCIs have physical ports and corresponding software ports The software ports are used during system programming For DCI modules the physical port and corresponding software port 1 72 are the same as the phone port into which the module is installed Each 3DCI consists of a physical port for connection to the Main Equipment and three software ports The physical port is the station port into which the 3DCI line cord is plugged The Ist software port of a 3DCI
290. m lt Key Telephone gt Calling an extension and leaving a message in their mail box 1 Dial the extension number 2 The extension is Busy or Ring No Answer 3 Press the Message key Pressing the Message key will take you directly into their mail box 4 Leave your message 5 Go on hook 412 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Transferring a call to someone else s mail box Method 1 You do not know they are unavailable until you call them 1 Place the caller on hold by pressing the Hold key 2 Dial the required extension number 3 If there is ring no answer or they are busy press your Message key 4 Wait for the voice mail system to answer then press the transfer key TRFR Method 2 You know they are unavailable before you call them 1 Place the caller on hold by pressing the Hold key 2 Press your Message key 3 Dial the required extension number 4 Press the transfer key TRFR lt Key Telephone gt Conversation Recording External calls only 1 Answer incoming call by going off hook 2 To start Conversation Recording press the Conversation Recording key The Conversation Recording key flashes red and the key telephone display indicates recording has started 3 To end conversation record Press the Conversation Recording key The Conversation Recording key goes idle stops flashing red and the recording message on the display
291. m 1005 assign a Class of Service to an extension Should the alarm In Program 0405 Item 23 signal be different set the duration of the than 30 seconds alarm signal the default 0 64800 seconds Do you change the p Service Code for Yes I Refer to Flexible Alarm Clock setting System Numbering cancel and common feature Canceling code a z 39 Alarm Clock Cont d Related Features None Operation lt Key Telephone gt To set the alarm clock 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 827 3 Dial alarm clock type 1 or 2 Confirmation tone is heard Alarm clock I sounds only once Alarm clock 2 sounds each day at the preset time 4 Dial the alarm clock time 24 hour clock Confirmation tone is heard For example for 1 15 PM dial 1315 5 Press SPK to hang up To silence an alarm clock 1 Press CLEAR To check the programmed alarm clock time This feature only available for key telephone with display 1 Press CHECK 2 Dial 827 3 Dial alarm clock type 1 or 2 The programmed time displays 4 Press CLEAR To cancel an alarm clock 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 827 3 Dial alarm clock type 1 or 2 Confirmation tone is heard 4 Dial 9999 Confirmation tone is heard 5 Press SPK to hang up 40 Alarm Clock Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To cancel an alarm clock 1 Press idle CL key 2 Di
292. mated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Programming Cont d gt 2205 Automated Attendant Massage Assignment Assign the VAU message which is used Automated Attendant Message for DUD DISA caller from VAU gt 2208 VAU Password Setup Assign the VAU Password When DUD DISA caller is heard and recorded VAU Message DUD DISA caller must dial VAU gt 2209 Automated Attendant Error Message Assign the VAU Message number which is used Automated Attendant Error Message for DUD DISA caller from VAU Related Features DISA Direct Inward System Access DISA feature is supported by the automated attendant and automated voice guidance DUD Direct Universal Dialing DUD feature is supported by the automated attendant and automated voice guidance Operation For DISA caller To place a DISA call from outside 1 Call to DISA Trunk 2 Waits for the DISA Trunk to automatically answer with Please enter your password OR Hear Unique dial tone 3 Dial the 6 digit DISA password access code used DTMF tone 4 Hear Automated Attendant Message 5 Dials the system extension number directly to feature access service code For DUD caller To place a DUD call from outside 1 Call to DUD Trunk 2 Hear Automated Attendant Message 3 Dials the system extension number directly 56 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Operation Cont d For DUD and DISA Caller To leave telephone number for busy exten
293. matic Handsfree One touch Program 0401 Item 6 1 an extension user can press a line key to place a Trunk Line call without first lifting the handset or pressing SPK Users without Automatic Handsfree Pre selection Program 0401 Item6 0 can preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing SPK Programmable Function Key Line keys and Trunk line group keys simplify placing outside calls Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place a call over a specific Trunk Line l 2 Press idle line key PGM 1006 or SC 851 0001 to 0052 Dial telephone number OR Press idle CL key and dial 805 Dial line number e g 005 for line 5 Dial telephone number 511 Trunk Outgoing Call Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To place a call over a Trunk Line group 1 Press Trunk Line group key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1012 1 9 or 01 16 2 Dial telephone number OR 1 Press idle CL key and dial 804 2 Dial line group number 1 9 or 01 16 3 Dial telephone number To place a call using Trunk Line Group Routing 1 Press idle CL key and dial 9 Trunk Line Group Routing Code 2 Dial telephone number OR 1 Press Outgoing Line Access key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1011 2 Dial telephone number To place a call using Off Hook Automatic Trunk Line Group Routing 1 Off hook 2 Dial telephone number To place a call using Individual Trunk Line Group Routing 1 Press idle
294. mber dialed Operation To store a number while you are on a call 1 While on a call press Memo Dial key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1015 2 Dial number you want to store 3 Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation To call a stored Memo Dial number 1 Press Memo Dial key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1015 2 Press idle CL key The stored number dials out only if you store a Trunk Line access code before the number OR Press line key The stored number dials out To check to see the stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift handset 2 Press Memo Dial key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1015 The stored number displays To cancel erase a stored Memo Dial number 1 Press idle CL key 2 Press Memo Dial key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1015 356 Message Waiting Description An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return call The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called extension and a steadily lit MW lamp on the calling extension Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication Message Waiting ensures that a user will not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended Additionally Message Waiting lets extension users View and selectively answer messages left at their extension display key telephone only Cancel all message left at their extension key telephone only Cancel messages they left a
295. ming Ring Group if Ring Group if nobody answers to the incoming nobody answers to the answers to the incoming call incoming call Ring Group In 0405 Timer 35 assign In 0414 Timer 9 assign In 0405 Timer 62 assign DUD DISA transfer time DDI transfer time DIL transfer time 284 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Case 1 2 gt 0405 System Timers Part A Timer_15 Pre selection time Define the effective duration time of the Incoming Queue Message VAU key 0405 System Timers Part A Timer_43 Disconnect after VAU answers Define the duration time from V AU answers to the line is terminated 0405 System Timers Part A Timer_62 No answer time at Normal or DIL call Define the duration time for no answer for DIL line 0414 System Timers Part B Timer_04 VAU overflow message interval Define the duration time between message and message 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item_06 Operation for VAU message By using this service code all VAU messages are operated recording listening erasing 0901 Basic Trunk Port Setup Part A Item_14 17 Service type Day Night Midnight Rest Assign the service type of each exchange line 0919 Transfer Incoming Ring Group if Normal or DIL call is no answer For each DIL with delayed ringing enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group 1006 Programming Function Keys To have the manual Incoming Queue Mes
296. modes of operation Outgoing Prime Line Preference Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line Outgoing Prime Line Preference would help a telemarketer who always needs a free line to call prospective clients The telemarketer just lifts the handset and the Prime Lines is always available Outgoing Prime Line Preference may be affected by Incoming Prime Line Preference see Programming below Incoming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension lifting the handset answers the call Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer s service calls and then dispatch repay technicians The dispatcher would have the assurance than whenever a customer calls in the dispatcher just lifts the handset get their call Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize an idle line appearance see Programming below Conditions This feature available for key telephone without DX2E OT TEL Default Setting Trunk Line calls have incoming priority over Intercom calls Ringing Line Preference set for ringing Trunk Line calls All Trunk Lines in group 1 route 1 Trunk Lines only ring extension 200 port 001 Extensions Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset Users get Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset No Prime Lines programmed Options None 427 Prime Line Selection Cont d Programming Outgoin
297. n Trunk callback time Set the Camp On Trunk Callback time 0 648000 seconds Camp On Trunk Callback ring an extension for this interval 0405 System Timers Item 29 Camp On Cancel Time The system cancels callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this interval 0 64800 seconds 0406 COS Options Item 24 Camp On Extension In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use the Camp On Callback Extension 0406 COS Options Item 25 Camp on Trunk In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Camp On Trunk 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 20 Camp On Assign a Service Code for Camp On Callback 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 21 Cancel Camp On Assign a Service Code for Cancel Camp on 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Camp On code 1020 This key is also the Camp On key Related Features Programmable Function Key Function Keys simplify Callback operation 100 Camp On Cont d Operation Callback Extension lt Key Telephone gt To place a Callback Extension 1 Call busy extension 2 Dial 850 or press Camp On key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1020 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Hang up 4 Lift handset when busy extension calls you back If you have Callback A
298. n extension s Class of Service causes telephone display to show the pickup group intercepted not the Trunk To Group Call Pickup keys assigned All extensions are in pickup group 1 Service Code of Call Pickup of same call pickup group is dial 867 Service Code of Call Pickup for another group is dial 869 Service Code of Call Pickup for specified group is dial 868 Service Code of Direct call pickup own group is dial 856 Service Code of Direct extension call pickup is dial 715 Options None Call Pickup Cont d Programming In 1012 assign No Should extension be in a Yes In 1012 assign extensions to Pickup Pickup Group extensions to Pickup Group 0 Co f TE Groups 8 max In 0406 Item 63 In 0406 Item 63 enter 0 enter 1 Should extension have to ability to be call pickup by another extension Should extension be able to pick up a call ringing their own Pickup Group Service Code 867 In 0406 Item 8 In 0406 Item 8 enter 0 enter 1 In 1006 make sure a she biter o ree function key is not PIG SUP assigned code 1007 ringing their own Pickup Group In 1006 assign a function key code 1007 Use Service Code 869 when the ringing Pickup Group number is unknown Yes In 0406 Item 9 enter 1 Should extension be able to pick up a call ringing another unknown Pickup Group Service Code 869 In 0406 Item 9 enter 0
299. n extension s ability to use Continued Dialing 1 on sending while Continued Dialing talking on extension Connected line On off an extension s ability to indicate ISDN Capability O off identification COLP information in the LCD COLP Ringing tone On off an extension s ability to change Selectable Ring 1 on Selection the incoming ring tones Tones SLT room monitor On off an extension s ability to use room Room Monitor O off monitor by SLT Intercom calls On off Intercom calling for the extension Intercom Trunk outgoing On off Trunk calling for the extension Trunk Outgoing Call Call Pick upped On off an extension s ability to pick upa Call Pickup call ringing into a Pickup Group Service Code 867 and 868 Pilot number called On off an extension s ability to call a Group Hunt extension department number 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on i i 1 on Broken In Blocks Allows Break In at the initiating Break In 1 on extension 1 on 1 on 1 on on 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 Buzzer On off an extension s ability to use Secretary Call Secretary Call Setting of Allows prevents an extension s ability to Intercom signal voice called set signal called mode s c 823 and voice called mode s c 821 Programmable On off programmable and extension s Programmable function key ability to program their function keys Function Key programming 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 7 0 7 DCI auto answer On off an extension s ability to
300. n extension to Ring Groups 1 16 For each extension in the Ring Group indicate if Trunk line should ring 1 or not ring 0 0910 Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment To have Trunk lines ring extensions for ANA assign Trunk lines to Ring Groups You make a different entry for each Night Service mode 374 Night Service Manual Auto Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Setup To allow for UNA answering set up the Trunk line Access Maps 1 16 For UNA extension must have incoming access to Trunk line ringing the External Paging speakers gt 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment For UNA answering assign Trunk line Access Maps 1 16 to extensions Make one entry for each Night Service mode gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign Night Service function keys to extensions Day Mode 1039 password Night Mode 1040 password Mid Night Mode 1041 password Rest Mode 1042 password gt 1605 Universal Night Answer For each Night Service Mode assign which Trunk Lines should ring which External Paging Zones Related Features Central Office Calls Answering and Placing Ring Groups There are separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entries for each Night Service mode Day Night Midnight and Rest Paging External When Universal Night Answer outside calls can ring E
301. n off an extension s ability to use abbreviated 1 on abbreviated dialing Common Abbreviated Dialing Dialing Group abbreviated On off an extension s ability to use Group abbreviated dialing Abbreviated Dialing Dialing Department group On off an extension s ability to use Department Group step call Department Group Step Calling Step Calling External paging On off an extension s ability make an Paging External External Page Call Forward dual On off an extension s ability active Call Call Forward ring Forward with dual ring Service Code 842 Note on Enable off Disable 107 Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 3 of 8 This option Is used with Default Camp on extension On off an extension s ability to dial Camp On Service Code 850 for a Camp On or Callback Callback Extension Camp on Trunk On off an extension s ability to Camp On Camp On Trunk to a busy Trunk Follow me On off an extension s ability to initiate Follow Me Follow Me 24 Alarm clock On off an extension s ability to set an Alarm Clock es Not Used Call transfer Es an extension s ability to use Call Call Forward Forward Busy transfer On off an extension s ability to use Busy Call Forward transfer Service Code 843 Unanswered call On off an extension s ability to use Call Forward transfer Unanswered call transfer Service Code 845 Toll restriction On off an
302. n the DC key setup Abbreviated Dialing You press CHECK DC and dial a bin number CHECK name to check an Abbreviated Dialing entry where ABB xxxx digits name is the bin name xxxx is the bin type number and digits is the stored number Alarm Clock Date and Time Your extension is idle after setting Alarm n Ext No ALARM n_ 1 or 2 Alarm Clock SET n ALARM You set an alarm time but do not hang up HH MM am or pm Alarm Clock SET n ALARM You dial 827 1 or 2 to select an alarm type then CANCEL 9999 to cancel Alarm Clock SET ALARM You dial 827 to set an alarm 1 ALARM 1 2 ALARM 2 Alarm Clock ALARM n HH MM amor You press CHECK dial 827 then 1 or 2 to pm digits check your alarm setting Background Music Time and Date You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background B G M ON Music on Background Music Time and Date You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background B G M OFF Music off Break In BREAK IN You have Break In Speech mode on a co ext name ext name worker s Intercom call Break In trk name BREAK IN You have Break In speech mode on a co ext name worker s Outside call Break In MONITOR _ You have Break In monitor mode on a co ext name ext name worker s Intercom call Break In trk name MONITOR You have Break In monitor mode on a co ext name worker s Outside call 13 Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 3 of 13 With this feature You ll see th
303. n user dials the ACI audio port extension number the associated ACI relay closes and activates the ringer You could use this capability to control an emergency buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor for example Physical Ports and Software Ports Each ACI consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and three audio ports For programming purposes the audio ports are also called as software ports The physical port connects to a station position on a DSTU card During installation the first ACI you set up is physical port 1 the second ACI is physical port 2 etc Each ACI has three software ports which are numbered independently of the physical ports Normally the first ACI set up has software ports 1 3 the second ACI has software ports 4 6 etc There are a total of 6 software ports 2 ACIs x 3 ports each During programming you assign ACI extension numbers Department Group options to ACI software ports not physical ports During installation you connect equipment to the jacks on the ACI that correspond to the software port Refer to the system Hardware Manual for more installation details 46 Audio Communications Interface ACI Cont d Description Cont d Conditions The devices connected to the ACI must be compatible with the specifications below Refer to the system Hardware Manual for additional details ACI Interface Specifications Relay Contacts Configuration Normally Open Maximum Contact
304. nal Paging or auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and loud bells The system allows up to 2 ACIs for a maximum of 6 audio ports Each ACI unit requires an unused port on the DSTU card The ACI gives you more flexibility when connected auxiliary devices since it doesn t use up resources on PGDU Page Doorphone ASTU Analog Station or ATRU Analog Trunk cards Music on Hold You can connect up to three customer provided Music on Hold music sources to an ACI This lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the CPU card or the internal source is not adequate By using ACIs you could even have a different music source for each Trunk When the system switches the ACI audio port to a Trunk on Hold the ACI relay associated with the ACI audio port closes You can use this capability to switch on the music source if desired Extension users can dial the ACI audio port extension number and listen to the connected music source The ACI relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through For Music on Hold connect the music source to the ACI audio port IN Input jack Connect the music source control leads to the CTL control relay jack Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details External Paging An ACI audio port can also be an External Page output When connected to customer provided External Paging equipment the ACI port provides External Paging independent of the PGDU card To use the E
305. nd PBX operation Transfer The extension that initially answers or places a call owns the SMDR record for the call For example if extension 218 transfers a Trunk Line call to extension 220 does not show on the SMDR record as part of the transferred call Operation Once installed and programmed SMDR operation is automatic 469 Text Message Description An extension user can select a preprogrammed Text Message for their extension Display keyset callers see the selected message when they call the user s extension Text Massage provides personalized messaging For example an extension user could select the message GONE FOR THE DAY Any display keyset user calling the extension would see the message Other than displaying the message the system puts the call through normally See Default Setting below for a list of the standard messages Each System has 20 Text Messages An extension user can add digits for date time or phone number after messages 1 8 and 10 For example an extension user could select the message ON VACATION UNTIL and then enter the date Callers see the original message followed by the appended date They would then be able to tell when the user was coming back from vacation Conditions This feature available for key telephone with display Default Setting The default messages are No Message Appended with 1 IN MEETING UNTIL Time when meeting done 2 OUT UNTIL Time when re
306. nd dial 2 to activate DND for DND INTERCOM Intercom and transferred trunks Do Not Disturb Time and Date You press DND and dial 3 to activate DND for DND ALL all calls Do Not Disturb Time and Date You press DND and dial 4 to activate DND for DND TRANSFER incoming Call Forwards Do Not Disturb SET DND You press DND to start DND activation procedure Do Not Disturb SET DND You press DND and dial 0 to cancel Do Not CANCEL _ Disturb Do Not Disturb Time and Date You press DND and dial 1 to activate DND for DND EXTERNAL incoming trunk calls ee Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 5 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Doorphone Time and Date You are receiving rings from Doorphone n CALL lt lt lt DOOR n Doorphone Time and Date You dial Service Code 802 and call a TALKING TO DOOR n Doorphone where n is the Doorphone number External Alarm SET n ALARM You dial 827 to set an alarm then dial 1 to set DIAL TIME Alarm 1 or 2 to set Alarm 2 Trunk Incoming trk name A trunk call is ringing your extension Call RINGING Trunk Incoming trk name HH MM SS You have answered an incoming trunk call Call ANSWERED where nn nn indicates the Call Timer Trunk Outgoing trk name You have tried to place a call over a busy trunk Call BUSY Trunk Outgoing You have seized a trunk for an outside call Call trk name Follow Me SET FOLLOW ME You dial Service Code 846 to dial Follow
307. nder a One Touch Key This simplifies extension operation by giving each user the ability to have customized feature keys For example an extension user could have a One Touch Serial Operations Key automatically forward all their calls to extension 210 One Touch Serial Operation can store up to 24 of the following operations Allowed Serial Operations Service Codes SPK DND VOL A and Digits 0 9 and VOL CL HOLD DC FLSH LND TRFR Ole TOMCINISE ye CHECK and CLEAR Function Keys keys Pause by pressing MIC One Touch Serial Operation is the second level of operation of One Touch keys The user must press the Serial Operation key before the One Touch Key The first level of operation is One Touch Dialing which occurs when the user just presses the key Refer to the One Touch Dialing feature Conditions This feature available for key telephone except DSLT A One Touch Serial Operation does not provide a Busy Lamp Field BLF B Ifa user stores a One Touch Key as part of a serial operation the system uses the first level One Touch function If there is a serial operation stored under the key selected the system ignores it Default Setting No Serial Operation key programmed Service Code for Serial operation registration to one touch key is dial 852 Options None 381 One Touch Serial Operation Cont d Programming gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 43 Serial operation
308. ne Cont d Programming Automatic Extension call Should extension be allowed to use Hot Line Off Hook Access In Program 0406 Item In Program 0406 Item 41 enable ringdown 41 disable ringdown In Program 1005 assign Class of Service that allows Hot Line Off Hook Access Should Hot Line In Program 0405 Item 16 call occur set Hot Line call start immediately or Timer to desired delay delayed interval 64800 seconds In Program 0405 Item 16 Immediate set Hot Line call start timer to 0 Delayed In Program 1013 assign Hot line number 1 50 originator extension number and target extension number 273 Hot Line Cont d Programming Cont d Automatic outside call Assign the Abbreviated Dialing feature Do you finish the setting for Abbreviated Dialing setup Programming In 1024 assign Hot Line Number 1 5 originator extension number and calling common abbreviated number gt 0405 System Timers Item 16 Hot Line Call Start Timer After the user lifts the handset the extension automatically calls the Automatic Extension Call destination after this interval 0 64800 seconds gt 0406 COS Options Item 41 Intercom Hot Line In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Automatic Extension Call If disabled in Class of Service the setting in Program 1013 below has no effect gt 1005 Clas
309. ne Digit Service Code for Voice Over 535 Voice Over Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 11 Called mode setting for override Enter 1 to have off hook signal ring at the called busy extension Enter 0 to have Voice Over to the called busy extension An extension user can override these settings by dialing Service Code 892 for voice over or 893 for off hook signal 0406 COS Options Item 5 Override In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automatically send override call 0406 COS Options Item 6 Automatic Override In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automatically send override call to an extension busy on a handset call 0511 Service Code Setup Item 15 Override Assign a service code for Override 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 83 Setting of signal called for override Assign a service code for setting of signal called override 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 82 Setting of Voice Over called for override Assign a service code for setting of voice announce called for override 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Service No 4 Override Assign one digit service code for override 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for override code 1018
310. ne to be used by another persons During the Dial Block function is being set at an extension the toll restriction class 1 8 shall be defined in the system program in the system wide Dial Block feature can also be set by Supervisor and the Supervisor can manage Dial Block in the system wide Note 1 In case Dial Block has already been set by the extension user Supervisor can not release Note 2 In case Dial Block has already been set by Supervisor the extension user can not release Note 3 This function is not available for S Bus extensions CAUTION This function works under the Password and Class of Service control Supervisor is not assigned by extension base In case Dial Block is available for all Classes everybody may become Supervisor if they know the Password Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone If the system re start by Cold Start Dial Block feature is all cleared Default Setting No Dial Block Toll Restriction Class programmed Service Code for Dial Block is dial 700 An extension s Class of Service does not permit to use Dial Block Options None Programming gt 0406 Class of Service Options Item 121 Dial Block In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Dial Block gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 34 Dial Block Assign a service code for Dial Black gt 0703 Dial Block Restricti
311. neeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 45 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU eeeeeeeteeeeeeees 51 Automatic Repeat Dialing cceeececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 62 BGM Background MUSIC ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 Break AMan alse cheese each eden aa sleet alae 68 Calla D cexecsecs ces E eten E ceve iva O EE AET 72 Call Forward sorn ice et ete etcetera i lett fee aE EEA 73 Call Forward with Personal Message VAU ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 79 Call PUG UO nannan nee cae ceva researc eee 87 Gall TIMGh iattcctett a alate A ath cla Mec i A A 94 CaM PO Waris ca tea ain cn Ne bine NER ala IA Lae al Ae Ma oe Na 96 Class of SCION Fai tee hee ete tee oe ee te tee See a eae eee eta 104 Condition Guidance Message VAU eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeees 114 COMMON SINGS so sesicecettnnceriersersd adie cp cmbertaci dato cesersseesad st ia oe caninieearicdddccepeeidle 116 Continued ANG Meet es eae See eh ee ee ea 120 CTI CApa Duty soascescdysiestadpancdatvonavbetinshRctptibeh dybahddptibedeApberddpeabetuasts 124 Data Communication Interface DCI ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteees 125 Data PHVACY esnan sited e sabia ds vadibed aided Dau aaa e dee dea tie 146 PTO C Ki seann ote aad ead estate hd eet tne oes 149 DID Capability ceii ienien aaaea attend dial ahmed NKEA 153 Direct Inward bine DML eei escent eranan er arata cceesesv
312. nel 4 channels Maximum Number of Mail Box 300 Maximum Number of Message 4000 Note 1 The maximum recording time can be set 32K bps or 16K bps by Programming Note 2 Card Type Voice Mail can not be installed together with previous Voice Mail Box DX2E VM A C Conditions Key Telephone Single Line Telephone and Outside Caller Default Setting Voice Mail is not defined after Voice Mail definition ADPCM type is 32K bps 15 hours Maintenance Time is not set Automatic Message Erasing is not set Option DX2E PVMU S1 527 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Cont d Programming Following 3 programs have to be entered for Voice Mail gt 0509 Voice Mail Group Pilot Number Assign the access number for Voice Mail gt 1407 Mail Box Setup Setup mail box number and password for each extension use gt 1409 Setting Master Slave Voice Mail Assign Master and Slave Voice Mail In case of Slot type VM the slot No 1000 e g slot 4 1004 shall be entered instead of the extension port Following 3 programs are related to the optional functions on Slot type voice mail gt 1417 Maintenance Time Setting for PVMU Assign the Time Hour Minutes for VM maintenance When this time comes VM shall stop about 1 minute and the system shall check the contents of Hard Disk If Automatic Erasing is activated in Command 1419 the applicable messages shall automatically be e
313. new extension Does the system programming show Duplicate Data The extension number you entered is in use by another port You can only use available unassigned extension numbers Do you want to change In 0501 select 1st and 2nd the digit used for digits you want to assign and Trunk line Group then enter the digits and type Routing 6 Trunk line access No In 0510 set the digit used for Trunk Group Access Continued on the next page 229 Flexible System Numbering Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page In 0501 select 1st and 2nd Do you want to change digits you want to assign and the Service Code then enter the digits and type No 1 service code access In 0511 select Service number you want to change and then enter the new Service Code Does the system programming show Duplicate Data The Service Code you entered is in use by another feature port You can only use available unassigned Service Codes In 0501 select 1st and 2nd digits you want to assign and then enter the digits and type 7 Operator access Do you want to change the digit used for Operator access code 230 Flexible System Numbering Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0501 System numbering Assign first and second digits of system numbering feature type of dial and digit length e x Extension number is three digits of first
314. ng Over In Program 0401 Item 11 enter 1 Lo or voice over T 11 enter 0 Set Program 0406 No Should extension be Yes Set Program 0406 Item 5 to 0 ADIE to recsiye Item 5 to 1 i no Off hook Signaling o o Set Program 0406 Manually Should extension send Automatically Set Program 0406 Off hook signal manually Item 6 to 0 Item 6 to 1 or automatically In 1005 assign a Class of Service to an extension Should extension have In Program 1006 assign a one button sending for function key for Override Off hook Signaling code 1018 NoTone In Program 1008 Item 5 enter 1 Should the level of Off hook Signal be normal muted or no tone In Program 1008 Item 5 enter 0 Do you change the yes i Refer to Flexible Service Code for 1 System Numbering Off hook Signaling feature In Program 1008 Nene Item 5 enter 2 In Program 0512 Service No 4 assign a One Digit Service Code for Off hook Signaling Do you use One Digit Service Code for Off hook Signaling 302 Intercom Off Hook Signaling Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 11 Called mode setting for override Enter 1 to have off hook signal ring at the called busy extension Enter 0 to have Voice Over to the called busy extension An extension user can override these settings by dialing Service Code 892 for voice over or 893 for off hook signal 0406 COS Options Item
315. ng lines 0905 Trunk Line Groups For Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines assign Trunk Line to Trunk Line groups This is part of Trunk Line Group Routing programming 0906 Trunk Line Group Routing Dial 9 For Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines program the Trunk Line Group Routing table Auto Answer uses this table to determine the answer sequence for ringing calls 0909 Trunk Line Group Routing for Extension Assign extension to ring groups 1 16 Auto Answer for Non Ringing Lines only works for Trunk Lines that do not ring an extension 0910 Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment Assign Trunk Line to ring groups 1 16 Auto Answer for Non Ringing Lines only works for Trunk Line that does not ring an extension 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Assignment For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines set up the Trunk Line access maps 1 16 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines assign Trunk Line access maps to extensions 1008 Basic Extension Port Setup Part B Item 2 Auto Extension Size Enable 1 or disable 0 Outgoing Intercom Line Preference for extensions See the table below for interaction Outgoing Line Preference Program 1008 item 2 and 3 After lifting handset at idle phone You hear nothing You hear intercom dial tone ltem2 items Coe foo 6 f 4 You hear trunk dial tone follows dial 9 routing eS ae ee Yo
316. nging call for Ringing Line Preference or seizes an idle line for Idle Line Preference The idle line can provide either Intercom or Trunk Line dial tone see Outgoing Line Preference below Ringing Line Preference helps users who s primary function is to answer calls such as a receptionist Idle Line Preference is an aid to users who s primary function is to place calls such as a telemarketer Outgoing Line Preference Outgoing Line Preference sets how a keyset user places calls If a keyset has Outgoing Intercom Line Preference the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset If a keyset has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference the user hears Trunk Line dial tone when they lift the handset Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference The user hears either Trunk Line dial 9 or Intercom dial tone Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines With Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines an extension user can automatically answer Trunk Line calls that ring other extensions not their own This would help a user that has to answer calls for co workers that are away from their desks When the user lifts the handset they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Line Group Routing programming The extension user s own ringing calls however always have priority over calls ringing other co worker s extensions Conditions If a keyset extension has more than one call ringing its line
317. nouncement i o Duration In 0406 Item 22 No Should extension be Yes In 0406 Item 22 entero able to use External enteri T Paging a i In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 do not assign In 1006 assign function assign keys for External Should extension have keys for External Zone Zone Paging code 1004 one button access to Paging code 1004 zone zone and External All External Paging and External All Call Call Paging code 1005 Paging code 1005 Do you change the Yes i Refer to Flexible Service Code for System Numbering External Paging l feature 387 Paging Cont d Programming Cont d extensions to the External Paging Do not assign more than 50 ar same Paging Zone No Yes In 1601 assign an In 1601 enter O ene OPSION Dean extension to an Internal Internal Paging zone Paging zone 1 8 Number When Paging should user see a Paging zone name or the zone number on the telephone display In 1602 program names for the Internal Paging zones 1 8 In 1602 do not program names for the Internal Paging zones 1 8 Turned In 1607 enter 2 for off beeps The system mutes the tones only if the user In 1607 enter 1 for muted volume sets the telephone volume control switch If the interval is too short Internal Paging announcements may be cut off Should the tones that precede an Internal Page be normal volume m
318. nouncement time of automatic answering extension when incoming DUD Trunk line 0 64800 seconds 0405 System Timers Part A Item 55 Talkie ACI disconnect Set the message sending time from ACI 0405 System Timers Part A Item 73 DISA Conversation Set the time by the time heard next 1 sec signal tone after Continued Code dialing when DISA caller use Trunk to Trunk Transfer 0405 System Timers Part A Item 74 DISA Conversation Disconnect Set the waiting time for disconnect if DISA caller should not dial Continued Code 0405 System Timers Part A Item 75 DISA Internal Paging This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this interval 0 64800 seconds the system terminates the DISA call 0405 System Timers Part A Item 76 DISA External Paging This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this interval 0 64800 seconds the system terminates the DISA call 0405 System Timers Part A Item 79 DUD DISA answer delay timer Setup the interval time from the system receive the DUD DISA incoming Call until the system automatically answer 0405 System timers Part A Item 80 DUD DISA Group Hunt no answer time Setup the calling time for department groups pilot number 0412 COS for DISA Passwords Enable or disable the following options for each DISA Class of Service e Rout access fo
319. ns the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Paging code Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting Without leaving the office The system permits up to eight parties to join in a Meet Me Paging Conference Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting The system allows 8 four party conferences Meet Me Paging Conference Time is 90 seconds An extension s Class of Service permits initiating Meet Me Paging Conference No Conference or Paging keys assigned Options DX2E PGDU S1 When you use Meet Me External Paging Conference feature 332 Meet Me Paging Conference Cont d Programming Note For additional programming information on Paging and Conference refer to the Paging Internal Paging External and Conference features gt 0302 Music on Hold and Conference Setup Set the Conference mode The system allows either 8 four party conferences 0 or 4 eight party conferences 1 per option card gt 0405 System Timers Item 9 Privacy Release timer Set the Meet Me Paging Conference Time 0 64800 seconds Once the user initiates Meet Me Paging Conference the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Conference code 1016 External Zone Pagin
320. nswer Trunk Line call 2 Press HOLD 3 Dial co worker s extension number Co worker must lift handset to respond to your announcement 4 Press Series Call key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1035 but do not hang up When your co worker hangs up the call the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your extension 460 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Station Message Detail Recording SMDR provides a record of the system s Trunk Line calls Typically the record outputs to a customer provided printer terminal or SMDR data collection device SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and Trunk Line This makes change back and traffic management easier SMDR provides the following options Abandoned Call Reporting The SMDR report includes calls that rang into the system but were unanswered i e abandoned SMDR can include all abandoned calls or only those abandoned calls that rang longer than the specified duration The Abandoned Call Report helps you keep track of lost business Blocked Call Reporting When Toll Restriction blocks a call you can have the blocked call information print on the SMDR report If you prefer you can have SMDR exclude these types of calls With Blocked Call Reporting you can better customize Toll Restriction for the site s application Customized Date Format The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats American European or Japanes
321. nt extension from Should extension be e allow extension to use using Do Not Disturb to use Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Do you change the Service Code for Do Not Disturb and Common Canceling Service Code Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature 189 Do Not Disturb Cont d Related Features Call Forward If an extension user activates DND option 4 the system prevents other extensions from forwarding calls to them If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4 callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone Call Forward Do Not Disturb Override An extension user can override Call Forward or Do Not Disturb Bypass Call at another extension Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb at your extension 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press DND key OR Press idle CL key and dial 847 3 Dial the DND option code 0 Cancel DND 1 Incoming Trunk Line calls blocked 2 Incoming Intercom and transferred Trunk Line calls blocked 3 Incoming Trunk Line and Intercom calls blocked 4 Transferred calls blocked Confirmation tone is heard To cancel Do Not Disturb 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 720 Common Canceling Service Code 3 Press SPK to hang up When you cancel an alarm dock by dial 720 these features are canceled at same time DND Call Forward Repeat Dial Message
322. nt to change the range In 0902 select the for Trunk line ring tone range for ringing each Trunk line No In 1001 Item 2 select the trunk ring tone for each keyset extension In 1001 Item 3 select In 1001 Item 6 select the Intercom ring tone for the ring cycle for each each keyset extension single line telephone In 1008 set the Do you want to enange incoming call ring cycle the way Intercom for keyset extensions No These settings affect both Intercom and trunk call ringing Should keyset users be Enable changing rones Enable changing rones able to change or check in Class of Service in Class of Service the incoming ring tones Program 0406 Item 59 Program 0406 Item 86 Assign a Class of Service to an extension Program No Do you change the Service Code for Check of Ring Tone and Trunk Line Incoming Ring Tone Switching Yes Refer to Flexible i System Numbering feature No 168 Distinctive Ringing Tone amp Flash Patterns Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 59 Ringing Tone Selection In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to change the incoming ring tones 0406 COS Options Item 86 Checking incoming ring tone In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to check the selectable Ring tones 0511 Service Code Setup Part A
323. nternal calls DDI calls and Tie Line calls to the Voice Mail system Calls presented at the SLT or key telephone as Ringing Groups Department Group calls or ACD group calls are not diverted to the Voice Mail system Conversation recording requires a conference block to be assigned Default Settings No ports are assigned as Voice Mail ports Conversation Recording Warn Tone is off Options DX2E 4ASTU A1 407 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Programming In Program 0401 Item 18 enter 1 to assign the Hooking Service code for SLT answering mode In Program 1001 Item 5 enter 1 for all of PC based voice mail ports In Program 1017 enter the all of PC based voice mail port Number In Program 0516 assign a pilot number to access to PC based voice mail Should change the tone for SLT which is heard if SLT receive a message on voice mail Yes In Program 0108 Item 48 assign a new tone number phould extension have one In Program 1006 assign button access to the voice VMB access code 1059 mail and or conversation and conversation recording recording code 1060 No Should change the duration of the alert tone for the conversation recording No Yes In Program 0405 Timer 65 assign the duration time 408 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Programming Cont d gt gt 0108 Tone 4
324. nward System Access calls from outside the system can provide voice announcement as AA Automated Attendant by the connection of VAU module Up to 3 simultaneous calls can be handled by the VAU And by adding VAU Expansion Board in the module then up to 6 simultaneous calls can be handled AA message can be assigned per trunk for each day night mode refer to DUD and DISA for more details Leave Telephone Number from DUD DISA caller When DUD DISA caller calls to busy extension DUD DISA caller can leave the own telephone number to busy extension if the extension is display type And then the extension user finished conversation he she can check and call back the call s telephone number by simple operation Condition The DUD or the DISA caller must use DTMF type telephone The destination called telephone must be display type for Leave Telephone Number This feature available for outside caller A If DISA DUD caller uses the rotary dial telephone or if the caller does not dial after answering of VAU incoming call will be transferred to pre programmed incoming ring group if you set B If desired extension is idle incoming call will be transferred to that extension However the call will not be attended by VAU even if transferred extension does not answer the call Options DX2E VAU A module VAU Expansion Board 51 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Programming
325. o Toll Restriction programmed Toll Restriction enforced on all Trunk Lines Options None 479 Toll Restriction Cont d Programming For each toll restricted No Is trunk Yes For each toll free trunk trunk in Program 0901 toll free in Program 0901 Item 19 enter 0 oo i ltem 19 enter 1 Review the PBX ee t Compatibility feature a Bence A before programming PBX Toll Restriction In Program 0702 Item 7 enter data into the Do you want to Common Permit Codes allow all users to dial Table There is one certain calls table In Program 0701 Item 5 In Program 0701 Item 5 enable 1 the Common disable 0 the Common Permit Code Table Permit Code Table If you enable just the Common Permit Codes Table but don t make any entries you can t place any trunk calls In Program 0702 Item 8 Do you want to enter data into the prevent all users Common Restrict from aang certain Codes Table There is calls one table In Program 0701 Item 6 In Program 0701 Item 6 disable 0 the Common enable 1 the Common Restrict Codes Table Restrict Codes Table Go to the flowchart on the following page 480 Toll Restriction Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from the previous page Restrict In Program 0702 Item 5 program the Permit Codes Class do you want to tables The system has four allow most calls or tables with 60 entries
326. o answer an override call waiting call 0 Press and release hook switch to pick up waiting call 1 Press and release hook switch and dial Service Code 894 to answer waiting call 0401 System Options Part A Item 19 Transfer to busy extension Prevent 0 or allow 1 extensions to transfer calls to busy extensions If disabled calls transferred to busy extensions recall immediately 0401 System Options Part A Item 21 Retrieve the transferred line Line key Assign enable 1 or disable 0 to retrieve the last transferred Trunk line by pressing the incoming Trunk Line Key 0405 System Timers Item 5 Ring inward recall timer Set the Transfer Recall Time 0 64800 seconds An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this interval 0406 COS Options Item 11 Ring inward transfer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to use Unanswered Transfer 0406 COS Options Item 34 Transfer without holding In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to use Transfer Without Holding 0406 COS Options Item 42 Transfer information display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s incoming Transfer pre answer display 0406 COS Options Item 76 Automatic on hook transfer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to us
327. odes DCI provides numeric result codes instead of verbal result Set codes See also Q0 and Q1 V1 Verbal Result Codes DCI provides verbal result codes instead of numeric result Set codes See also Q0 and Q1 134 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 5 Hayes Commands Page 2 of 2 Result Code Set 0 Enable result code set 0 basic result codes Result Code Set 1 Enable result code set 1 X2 Result Code Set 2 Enable result code set 2 X3 Result Code Set 3 Enable result code set 3 Result Code Set 4 Enable result code set 4 Z Reset Reset the DCI using the last values saved by system programming or the amp W command Initialize Registers The DCI returns all registers to their factory default setting amp W Store Registers The DCI save store the current register values Register values saved are SO S2 S5 S12 S61 S66 135 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Conditions This feature available for PC with DX2E DCI A or DX2E DCI B or DX2E 3DCI A Default Setting No DCIs programmed System and Alarm reports use DCI software port 1 System date is American format No data keys or Telemarketing Dial keys defined Default communication parameters are 1200 baud 1 stop bit 8 data bits with no parity All DCIs are RS 232 C when installed All DCIs are in DCI Department Group 1 All DCIs are Toll Restriction Class of Service 2 No D
328. of the extension s Trunk Line group keys Incoming and Outgoing Access 0 Outgoing 1 Incoming 2 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 28 Line group access Assign a service code for line group access 0905 Trunk Line Group Assign Trunk Lines to Trunk Line Group 1 16 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Setup Assign Trunk Lines to access maps 1 16 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment Assign access maps 1 16 to extensions 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Trunk Line group access code 1012 Related Features Trunk Outgoing Call Instead of using Trunk Line Group an extension user can place a Trunk Line call by Pressing a line key Dialing a Trunk Line access code Dialing a Trunk Line Group Routing code 9 refer to the Trunk Line Group Routing feature Ring Groups Trunk Lines ring extensions according to Ring Group programming 504 Trunk Line Group Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place a call over a Trunk Line group 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 804 3 Dial line group number 1 9 or 01 16 4 Dial number OR 1 Press Trunk Line group key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1012 2 Dial number To answer an incoming Trunk Line group call 1 Lift handset 2 Press flashing Trunk Line group key lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a call over a Trunk Line group 1 Off hook 2 Dial 804 3 Dial line group number 1 9 or 01 16
329. ogram 0401 Item 8 is 1 answers ringing trunk Intercom call then rings second line appearance If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0 answers ringing line appearance Answers ringing intercom call Line appearance 1 x Answers ringing line appearance 2 Answers ringing line appearance lt Chart A gt 316 Line Preference Cont d Programming Cont d In Program 0401 Item 12 enter 0 In Program 0401 Item 13 enter 0 In Program 0401 Item 8 enter 0 Incoming Line Preference When users lift handset should they answer ringing Intercom call When users lift handset should they answer ringing Trunk line call With both Intercom and Intercom Trunk line call ringing which should have priority 317 In Program 0909 assign extensions to Ring Groups In Program 0910 assign Trunk lines to Ring Groups In Program 0401 Item 12 enter 1 In Program 0401 Item 13 enter 1 In Program 0401 Item 8 enter 1 Line Preference Cont d Programming Cont d Outgoing Line Preference Also see the Prime Line Selection feature Intercom Trunk In Program dial tone When user lifts handset dial tone In Program 1008 Item 3 should they get Intercom 1008 Item 3 enter 0 dial tone or trunk dial tone enter 1 Program Trunk Line Group Routing Assign Trunk lines to groups in 0905 Assign Trunk line groups to routes in 0906
330. ol If disabled the DCI enabled control holds CTS on 1 Disabled enabled follows RTS Flow Control Sets flow control 0 No flow 1 control Hardware 1 RTS CTS flow Hardware control flow control enabled 2 XON XOFF between DCI and connected terminal 3 XON XOFF between sender and receiver DCI transparent 130 Data Communication Interface DCI Cont d Description Cont d Table DCI 2 X 25 Packet Switching LAPB Registers LAPB Title Description Range Register Internal Calls 1 T1 Timer After the DCE DCI sends a packet it must 0 65535 mS 500 mS receive a response from the connected DTE within the T1 interval If a response is not received the DCE resends the packet 2 T2 Timer After the connected DTE receives a packet 0 65535 mS 250 mS from the DCE it must respond within the T2 interval T2 must be less than T1 3 N1 The maximum number of bits in an 0 65535 mS 2080 bits Information Transfer frame After T1 expires N2 is the maximum number of 0 65535 times transmissions and retransmissions of a packet allowed The maximum number of Information 0 7 frames 7 frames Transfer frames a connected device may have unacknowledged outstanding External Calls T1 Timer After the DCE DCI sends a packet it must 0 65535 mS 2000 mS receive a response from the connected DTE within the T1 interval If a response is not received the DCE resends the packet 7 T2 Timer
331. old Recall Time 0 64800 seconds A Trunk Line recalling from Hold rings an extension for this interval 0405 System Timers Item 22 Normal Hold Recall Time Set the Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval 0405 System Timers Item 27 Normal Hold Callback Time Set the Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds A Trunk Line recalling from Hold rings an extension for this interval 0405 System Timers Item 40 Forced Release of Long Hold Condition Time Set the Forced Release of Held Calls interval 0 64800 seconds If enabled in Program 0901 Item 20 the system disconnects a call if on Hold longer than this interval 0406 COS Options Item 35 Group Hold Initiate In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate Group Hold Service Code 832 0406 COS Options Item 36 Group Hold Answer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to pick up acall placed on Group Hold Service Code 832 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 57 Group hold Assign a service code of Group hold 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 58 Answer for group hold Assign a service code of answer for group hold 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 96 Enabled on hook when holding SLT Assign a service code of On Hook Holding for SLT 267 Hold Cont d Programming Cont d
332. om status through your phone Between keyphone and keyphone the monitored room status shall be picked up by the integrated microphone and the status shall be heard from integrated speaker of the monitoring keyphone Between SLT and SLT go off hook the handset of monitored phone and call it from the other phone by dialing the Service code then the status of certain area where monitored phone is placed can be heard at the monitoring phone This service is available until the handset of monitored telephone is set to on hook Conditions This feature available for key telephone and Single Line Telephone However the feature is not available in the combination of key telephone and SLT Room Monitor is for listening only It does not allow for conversation between the monitoring and monitored extensions Between keyphone and keyphone a user can only monitor one station at a time However many stations can monitor the same extension at the same time Between SLT and SLT a SLT can monitor more than two SLTs call by call But one SLT cannot be monitored by more than two SLTs Default Setting An extension s Class of Service does not permit initiating Room Monitor An extension s Class of Service does not permit it to be monitored No Room Monitor keys assigned An extension s Class of Service does not permit SLT Room Monitor Service code for SLT Room Monitor is 770 Options None 444 Room Monitor Cont d
333. oming callers when only one extension appearance is busy 0 OR Headset extension is busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy 1 gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 47 Head set mode switching Assign a service code of Head set mode switching gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 10 Common Canceling service code Assign a service code of common Canceling service code gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Headset operation code 1028 Related Features Handsfree Speaker amp Microphone While in the headset mode do not use the Speakerphone for calls Operation While in the headset mode the hook switch is not functional To enable the headset mode 1 Unplug the telephone handset 2 Plug in the headset 3 Press the Headset key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1028 OR Press idle CL key and dial 834 Confirmation tone is heard You hear a confirmation beep The Headset key lights when you enable headset mode When in the headset mode Press a line key to make a Trunk Line call OR Press SPK to get Intercom dial tone OR If on a call press SPK to hang up 260 Headset Operation Cont d Operation Cont d To disable the headset mode 1 Unplug the headset 2 Plug in the telephone handset 3 Press the Headset key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1028 OR Press idle CL key and dial 834 Confirmation tone is heard The
334. on lt Key Telephone gt To store an Abbreviated Dialing number This feature is only available for key telephone with display 1 Press idle CL key Dial 853 for common or 854 for group Dial common 000 399 or group storage code 00 19 RW N Dial telephone number you want to store up to 24 digits Valid entries are 0 9 and To enter a pause press MIC key Press HOLD Enter the name associated with the Abbreviated Dialing number Press HOLD Press SPK to hang up oo N A ae Abbreviated Dialing Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 813 OR Press DC key when initial setting or DC key is setting to Common Abbreviated Dialing key OR Press Common Abbreviated Dialing key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1037 To pre select press a trunk key in step 1 instead of CL before pressing the DC or Abbreviated Dialing key If common ABB bin No is stored on the key then step 3 is not necessary 3 Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code The stored number dials out To dial Group Abbreviated Dialing number 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 814 OR Press DC key OR Press Group Abbreviated Dialing key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1038 To pre select press a line key in step I instead of CL before pressing the DC or Abbreviated Dialing key If Group ABB bin No is stored on the key then step
335. on Class Assign a Dial Block Restriction Class 1 8 gt 0704 Dial Block Release If an extension user forget Dial Block personal password you can release Dial Block for each extension gt 0705 Dial Block Password for Supervisor Assign the Password which is used by Supervisor gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a class of service 1 10 to an extension 149 Dial Block Cont d Programming Cont d Related Features No Should extension be Yes In 0406 Item 121 enter 0 In 0406 Item 121 enter 1 able to use Dial y In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 0703 assign Toll Restriction Class at the Dial Do you need to control the Dial Block by Supervisor Do you change the Yes i Refer to Flexible Service Code for Dial gt _ System Numbering Block feature No Dial Block downs an extension s Toll Restriction Class Toll Restriction 150 Dial Block Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To set the Dial Block 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 700 3 Dial personal password 4 digit 4 Dial 1 Confirmation tone is heard 5 Press SPK to hang up To release the Dial Block 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 700 3 Dial personal password 4 digit 4 Dial 0 Confirmation tone is heard 5 Press SPK to hang up To set Dial Block from the other extension 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 701
336. one Programming gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 27 One touch dial number saving Assign a service code for one touch dial number saving gt 1007 Programming One Touch Keys Set the functions of an extension s One Touch Keys An extension user can also program their One Touch Keys Related Features One Touch Serial Operation An extension user can use One Touch Keys to store a series of operations Programmable Function Key Function keys can also give an extension user one touch access to selected system features Transfer When transferring a call an extension user can press a One Touch Key instead of dialing the extension number Operation To program a One Touch Key for Direct Station Selection extension calling 1 Press idle CL key and dial 855 2 Press One Touch Key you want to program 3 Dial extension number you want assign to that key 4 Press SPK to hang up 378 One Touch Dialing Cont d Operation Cont d To program a One Touch Key for Trunk Line calling 1 Press idle CL key and dial 855 2 Press One Touch Key you want to program 3 Dial general Trunk Line access code 9 OR Dial Specific Trunk Line Service Code 805 plus the Trunk Line number e g 05 OR Dial Trunk Line Group Service Code 804 plus the Trunk Line group number e g 1 4 Dial number you want to call To enter a pause press MIC 5 Press SPK to hang up To program a One Touch Key for
337. ones are assigned to Voice Note2 The mode can not be changed from All Ring Mode to Normal Mode during a call Circular Routing lt Special Note gt This section mainly describes for internal group access However in case of outside caller s access such as DUD DISA DIL DDI to station group the system provides more flexible routing with voice announcement For the details refer to Incoming Queue Message VAU and DID DDI Capability 245 Group Hunt Cont d Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows Group Hunt A call to a Department Group rings the lowest extension first Callers dialing a busy Department Group member hear busy tone Department Group pilot numbers not assigned All extensions are in Extension Department Group 1 with a priority the same as the extension port number Manual All Ring mode by service code is assigned Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 64 Pilot Number Called Extension In an extension s Class of Service allow 1 or prevent 0 Group Hunt gt 0410 Extension Department Group Options Item 1 Pilot Call Set the routing cycle for calls into a department i e when a user dials the department pilot number The system can ring the highest priority extension available Priority Routing 0 or cycle in circula
338. onference key not assigned Service Code of Conference is dial 826 Options None 116 Conference Cont d Programming Cont d Should the system allow eight 4 party conferences or four 8 party conferences In 0302 Item 2 enter 0 In 0302 Item 2 enter 1 In 0406 Item 16 enter Should an extension In 0406 Item 16 enter 0 to prevent initiating be allowed to initiate a 1 to allow initiating Conference Conference Conference In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 assign a function key as a Conference key code 1016 Do you change the yes Refer to Flexible Service Code for System Numbering Conference feature 117 Conference Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0302 Music on Hold and Conference Setup Item 2 Conference mode Set the Conference mode The system allows either 8 four party conferences 0 or 4 eight party conferences 1 0406 COS Options Item 16 Conference In an extension s Class of Service enables 1 or disable O the extension s ability to initiate a Conference 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 24 Conference Assign a Service Code for Conference 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to extension 1006 Programming Function keys Assign a function key for Conference code 1016 Related Features Meet Me Conference Meet Me Conference lets an extension
339. or Fixed Message 5 This line is automatically held 287 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Appendix Incoming Queue Message VAU st Message connection 2nd message connection MSG2_TIME 2nd message sending time DISC_TIME 1st message No MSG1 2nd message No Incoming Ring Group Call Automatic or Manual 1 1 1st message to 2nd message MSG1 1 17 MSG2 1 17 MSG2_TIME 1 64800 A Automatic amp Manual MSG1_TIME 1 64800 Manual Operation p gt MSGI MSGI gt MSG2 y MSG2 MSG1_TIME e CMD_0414 CMD_0414 CMD_0414 ITEM 4 ITEM 4 ITEM 4 2 MSG2_TIME __DISC_TIME 1 e CMD_0405 ITEM43 e B Manual only MSG1_TIME 0 Manual Operation x 5 Sf p MSGI MSGI gt MSG2 _ MSG2 y CMD_0414 CMD_0414 CMD_0414 ITEM 4 ITEM 4 ITEM 4 e _MSG2_TIME DISC_TIME 1 e CMD_0405 ITEM43 288 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Appendix Cont d Notel If DISC_TIME 0 a queuing call will not be cut after 2nd message has been sent and the 2nd message process will be continue Note2 If the preprogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_43 has passed after sending Incoming Queue Message VAU the Queue Message process will finish and the external line will be cut Note3 If the prep
340. ork DCI networking lets system users share common office resources such as PCs and printers Since the phone system handles the network communications you can eliminate the expense of separate wiring network adaptors and network driver software The DCIs can switch asynchronous RS 232 C data at speeds from 300 to 19 2K baud Internal X 25 packet switching ensures maximum data reliability with a minimum of disruption to other system activities There are three types of DCls RS 232 C DCI Module DX2E DCI A The DCI A is a single port data module that installs in a Key Telephone with display for serial RS 232 C communications Although it installs in the phone the DCI A has its own unique port and extension number Use DCI A to easily add RS 232 C data capabilities to any keyset The system can have up to 72 DCI Ports DCI A plus DCI B plus 3DCI X 3 see below Centronics DCI Module DX2E DCI B The DCI B is also a single port data module that installs in a key telephone but it is used for parallel Centronics communication Like the DCI A DCI B also has its own unique port and extension number If you want to connect a parallel printer to your data network use the DCI B instead of a DCI A and a separately purchased serial to parallel converter The system can have up to 72 DCI Ports DCI A plus DCI B plus 3DCI X 3 see below 3 Port DCI Unit DX2E 3DCI A The 3DCI A is a stand alone unit that connects to a single DSTU c
341. ort dX Z96 Euro ISDN Manual Primary Rate Interface 305 Key Touch Tone Description For an extension with Key Touch Tone enabled the user hears a beep each time upon they press a dial key pad This is helpful to users that prefer the additional audible confirmation Conditions This feature available for key telephone Default Setting An extension s Class of Service prevents if from turning Key Touch tone on and off Key Touch Tone is initially off at all extensions Service Code of Key Touch Tone is dial 824 Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 56 Key Touch Tone In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to turn Dial Pad Confirmation tone on and off gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 53 Key touch tone Assign a service code for Dial Pad Confirmation Tone gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features None Operation lt Key Telephone gt To enable disable Key Touch Tone 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 824 Confirmation tone is heard 306 Key Touch Tone Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 56 enter 0 Should extension be able In 0406 Item 56 enter 1 to disable turning Key to turn the Key Touch to enable turning Key Touch Tone on and off Tone on and off Touch Tone on and off In 1005 assign Class of Service to
342. orts can provide External Paging with control independent of the External Paging circuits on the PGDU card 49 _ Audio Communications Interface ACI Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To call an ACI software port 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial ACI software port extension number OR Dial ACI Department Group extension number OR Press One Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group After you call an ACI software part If the port is set for input Program 1301 1 and a music source is connected you hear music OR If the port is set for output Program 1301 2 and External Paging is connected you can page into the external zone OR If the port is set for output Program 1301 2 and a loud ringer is connected you activate the loud ringer lt Single Line Telephone gt To call an ACI software port 1 Off hook 2 Dial ACI software port extension number OR Dial ACI Department Group extension number After you call an ACI software port If the port is set for input Program 1301 1 and a music source is connected you hear music OR If the port is set for output Program 1301 2 and External Paging is connected you can page into the external zone OR If the port is set for output Program 1301 2 and a loud ringer is connected you activate the loud ringer 50 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Description For DUD Direct Universal Dialing and DISA Direct I
343. ot hang up To hold recall in conference 1 Press Conference key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1016 lt Single Line Telephone gt To establish a Conference 1 Establish Intercom or Trunk call 2 Hooking and 826 3 Dial extension you want to add OR Access outside call To get the outside call you can either dial specified line access code or dial a trunk trunk group access code 4 When called party answers hooking twice 5 Repeat steps 2 4 to add more parties To hold all other parties in conference 1 Hooking 2 Do not hang up To hold recall in conference 1 Hooking 119 Continued Dialing Description Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call wait for the called party to answer and then dial additional digits This helps users that need services like Voice Mail automatic banking There are two types of Continued Dialing e Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls Depending on an extension s Class of Service a keyset user may be able to dial additional digits after their Intercom call connects In systems with Special Extension connected to SLT port for example Continued Dialing lets extension users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers Without Continued Dialing extension users cannot access these Voice Mail options e Continued Dialing far Trunk Calls Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking an outside Automated Att
344. ould keyset TRFR Yes In Program 0402 Item key activate Flash 2 enter 2 In Program 0402 Item 2 enter O for Transfer or 1 for Serial Call Do you change the Yes _Referto Flexible Service Code for Flash System Numbering feature No 226 Flash Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 5 Hooking Grounding Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash 0 gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 6 Hooking Type For each Trunk Line indicate if Flash is for Flash 0 or open loop disconnect 1 gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class Of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features PBX Compatibility If the system is behind a PBX Flash normally gives the extension user access to many PBX features Toll Restriction The system applies Toll Restriction if applicable to the number a user dials after flashing a Trunk Line Operation lt Key Telephone gt To flash the Trunk Line 1 Press FLSH lt Single Line Telephone gt To flash the Trunk Line 1 Hooking 2 Dial 806 Confirmation tone is heard 227 Flexible System Numbering Description Flexible System numbering lets you reassign the system s port to extension and Service Code of function assignments This allows an employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office And or usual used Service Code change to two
345. owed to call a enter 1 to allow Group Group Hunt Department Group Hunt In 1005 assign a Class of Service to extensions Priority Circular Should calls into a Department Group use Priority Routing or Circular Routing In 0410 Item 1 Routing enter 0 to enable Priority Routing Routing In 0410 Item 1 enter 1 to enable Circular Routing The system allows up to 8 Department Groups In 1003 assign Should extension be In 1003 assign extension to port of a Department extension to Department Group 0 Group Department Group Extension users dial pilot numbers to call In 0506 assign pilot Department Groups numbers to each Department Group set up in 1003 If you are using Priority Routing use 1003 to set the extension s priority within the group This only applies to Intercom calls to department members not pilot numbers In 0410 Item 2 1 In an extension user calls a busy Department Group number should call overflow or be busy Overflow In 0410 Item 2 0 Continue to A 247 Group Hunt Cont d Programming Cont d Continue from A Automatically In 0410 Item 4 1 Manually When Department Group number is called should call to all of stations manually or automatically In 0410 Item 4 0 Refer to Flexible System Numbering Do you change the Service Code for All Ring mod
346. p Abbreviated Dialing is dial 814 Options None 27 Abbreviated Dialing Cont d Programming Should extension s DC In Program Group keys be for Common or Common In Program 0401 Item 15 Group Abbreviated 0401 Item 15 enter 1 Dialing enter 0 Should extensions be In Program allowed to store In Program 0406 Item 18 Abbreviated Dialing 0406 Item 18 enter 0 entries enter 1 Should extensions be In Program allowed to dial Common In Program 0406 Item 19 Abbreviated Dialing 0406 Item 19 enter 0 numbers enter 1 Should extensions be In Program allowed to dial Group In Program 0406 Item 20 Abbreviated Dialing 0406 Item 20 enter 0 numbers enter 1 In Program 1005 assign a Class of Service to an extension Go to Programming flowchart on the following page 28 Abbreviated Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page In Program 0603 enter Do yeu wall to assigni y Yas a the Common Bi rere and Group Abbreviated Dialing bins Should users have In Program 1006 assign one button dialing or Programmable keys for Single Operation for Common code 1037 Common and Group and Group code 1038 Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing Yes Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature Do you change the Service Code for Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing 2
347. passwords are not defined All passwords are 6 digits fixed All Toll Restriction Classes of password table are Class 8 Service Code of Walking Toll Restriction is dial 763 Options None 539 Walking Toll Restriction Cont d Programming Complete Toll No Do you complete to set ie Toll Restriction programs Restriction Programs E Program 0701 0702 In Program 0203 assign the passwords and its restriction class When Walking Toll Restriction is used is this information printed on SMDR In Program 0404 Item 6 No 11 enter 0 In Program 0404 Item 6 No 11 enter 1 Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature Do you change the Service Code for Walking Toll Restriction gt 0203 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup Assign the table No Password 6 digits and its restriction class which is defined in the Toll Restriction programs command 0701 0702 gt 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 11 Walking Toll Restriction Table No Assign the output condition for printer PC If the data is set to 1 output the symbol of call will be printed as POTW and password table No will be printed as W 3 digits table No at the Account Code area Refer to the following appendix gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 53 Walking Toll Restriction Assign a service code for Walking Toll Restriction 540
348. r 163 Direct Inward Line DIL Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift handset 2 Press flashing line key for DIL If you have Ringing Line Preference lifting the handset answers the call If you don t answer the call it may ring other extensions i e DIL No Answer Ring Group To place a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 805 and the DIL Trunk Line number e g 05 OR Dial 804 and the DIL Trunk Line group number e g 05 OR Dial 9 for Trunk Line Group Access 3 Dial telephone number 164 Directory Dialing Description When you place a call you can choose the destination by the name if your type of phone is Super Display Phone Large Display keyphone Either intercom or trunk line call can be placed by the name directory Conditions Only 24 key Super Display Phone Large Display Keyphone lt see Reference gt Default Setting The feature is provided not optional Options None Programming gt 0502 Extension Number and Name Enter the Name for extension gt 0603 Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name Put the Name on abbreviated number Related Features Abbreviated Dialing The name for each abbreviated number has to be entered Operation Refer to Concise Instruction Manual How To Use The Key Telephone lt attached to each keyphone gt page25 and 26 for the de
349. r trunk lines for each key Does console In 1104 select use Alternate alternate destination s Answering console number In 1104 select 0 for the alternate A Go to B an next page 202 DSS Console Cont d Programming Cont d B From A on previous page Do you want user to Yes Refer to Night Service change Night Service feature for mode i programming details No Refer to Paging External PO VON vant vente Yes and Paging internal make External and feat f Internal Paging eatures for programming details No Do you want user to Yes Refer to Door Box feature call Door Boxes i for programming details No Should the console Yes In 0406 Item 28 enter 1 be able to use Alternate Answer Should the console In 0501 assign be called by unique kind 7 on the digit digit 0 or 9 required In 1105 assign station port In 0406 Item 28 No enter 0 No In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions 203 DSS Console Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 28 Off duty at setting for DSS console In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to use DSS Console Alternate Answer 0501 System Numbering Assign kind 6 on the unique digit maybe 0 or 9 as operator usage 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign Class of Service 1 10 to extensions
350. r Routing each call rings a new extension In a Department Group with extensions 210 Priority 1 211 Priority 2 and 212 Priority 3 The first call rings 210 The second call rings 211 The third call rings 212 The fourth call rings 210 and the cycle repeats Note When programming the high priority extensions have low priority numbers For example priority 1 has a higher priority than priority 10 Priority Routing 244 Group Hunt Cont d Description Cont d Group Hunt also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group If a user directly dials a busy extension within a Department Group the system can optionally route the call to the first available group member Meanwhile All Ring mode is available Department Group Withdrawing A telephone can withdraw from belonging department group An extension can not be hunted at the department call while withdrawing from belonging group Manual All ring Mode During calling to the Department Group only highest order extension shall be ringing Ring Mode can be changed to All Ring Mode by dialing Service Code Automatic All Ring mode The Ring Mode can be fixed to All Ring Mode by programming When the internal caller accesses to the Department Group all extensions which are belonging to the Department Group shall ring without any Service Code dialing Note1 The ring mode of all extensions shall be Signal even if some Key Teleph
351. r Trunk line e Group access for Trunk line e Common abbreviated dialing e Operator call 179 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming Cont d e Internal paging e External paging gt 0414 System timers part B Item 3 DUD DISA busy tome timer Setup the busy tone sending time when outside Caller dial the busy extension gt 0517 DISA Control Code Assign a DISA continue code and DISA disconnect code up to one digit gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 14 17 Service Type For DISA operation set the Trunk Line service type to 02 You can have a different service type for each Night Service mode gt 1801 DISA Password Setup For each DISA user set the 6 digit password and DISA Class of Service for each user There are 15 users with one password and DISA Class of Service for each user This allows for up to 60 assignments The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0 You cannot use Programs 0406 and 1005 to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks gt 1802 DUD DISA Operation Mode Setup Set the operating mode This sets what happens to the call when the DISA caller doesn t dial condition 1 calls a busy or unanswered extension condition 2 dial incorrectly condition 3 The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination 1 Set alternate destination in program 1803 gt 1803 DUD DISA Transfer Ring Group Setup If you set a DISA Trunk Line operatin
352. r it as usual within pre programmed period However if the call is not answered due to busy at Operator etc within pre programmed period the system automatically goes to answer it And outside party shall hear voice message music dial tone according to the following conditions If VAU adaptor is connected The system sends pre recorded message from VAU If DISA Talkie s is are connected The system sends message music from the Talkie s If no equipment is connected for announcement The system sends the unique dial tone to outside caller Note DISA Talkie shall be provided by customer In other words this feature means that the Normal Incoming Call mode will be changed to the DUD mode after the pre programmed period has been passed 1 Digit Access on DUD DISA VAU Any extensions can be defined as 1 digit which to be dialed from outside caller on DUD DISA with VAU Adaptor The outside caller is able to access to the desired extension department group by dialing only 1 digit after the system automatically answered Note If same number is used for 1st digit of extension number and Idigit access code on DUD DISA out side caller can not access directly to the extension Example if 1 digit access code 2 is assigned to department group 300 outside caller can not access to extension 200 to 299 directly Because outside caller tries to dial extension 200 however after dialing 2 it
353. r order through the group Circular Routing 1 gt 0410 Extension Department Group Options Item 2 Extension Call Set how the system routs an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member The caller can hear busy tone 0 or overflow to the first available Department Group member 1 This option is for Intercom calls to an extension not a pilot number gt 0410 Extension Department Group Options Item 4 STG All Ring Mode Assign Manual All Ring Mode 0 or Automatic All Ring Mode 1 for Department Group Calling gt 0506 Department Group Numbers Assign names and pilot numbers to the Extension Department gt 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Item 10 STG All Ring Mode Assign the One Digit Service Code for STG All Ring Mode gt 0514 Service Code Setup part B Item 40 Department group withdrawing Assign a service code of Department group withdrawing gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 60 STG All Ring Mode Assign the Service Code for STG All Ring Mode gt 1003 Extension Department Groups Assign extensions to Department Groups 1 8 gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function keys Assign a function key for Department group withdrawing Code 1074 246 Group Hunt Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 64 Should an extension In 0406 Item 64 enter 0 to prevent be all
354. ram 0512 Service No 7 assign a One Digit Service Code for Message Waiting Do you use One Digit Service Code for Message Waiting 358 Message Waiting Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 15 Message Waiting In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to leave Massage Waiting 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 10 Message Waiting Assign a service code of message waiting 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 11 Cancel All Message Waiting Assign a service code of all message waiting 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 12 Cancel Message Waiting Assign a service code of cancel the message waiting you left at a specific extension 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Service No 7 Message Waiting Assign a one digit service code for message waiting 0514 Service code Setup Part B Item 10 Common Canceling service code Assign a service code of common Canceling service code 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Message Waiting code 1023 Related Features Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing When a user responds to a Message Waiting the system does not cancel the Message Waiting indication if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback The system cancels the indication only if the called party lifts the handset or
355. rammed Options None Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 7 Data Privacy In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to use a Privacy key gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a Privacy key code 1030 Rated Features Conference Voice Call Privacy Release A keyset user can release Privacy on their outside call so a co worker can join in the conversation Programmable Function Key Data Privacy requires a uniquely programmed function key 146 Data Privacy Cont d Programming Cont d Should keyset user be In Program 0401 allowed to enable Item 7 disable Privacy 0 Privacy In Program 0401 Item 7 enable 1 Privacy In Program 1005 assign Class of Service to an extension In Program 1006 assign a Privacy key to an extension 147 Data Privacy Cont d Operation To enable Privacy for the call you are on 1 Press Privacy key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1030 A co worker cannot Break In on your conversation nor send Off Hook Signals 2 Optional Press Privacy key again to release Privacy for the call The system cancels Privacy automatically when you hang up 148 Dial Block Description Dial Block lets a user down an extension s class of Toll Restriction temporary This helps an extension user to block his her pho
356. ransfer by Personal Message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 715 and specified extension number To operate the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 713 3 Hear To re record dial 7 to listen dial 5 to erase dial 3 4 a Dial 3 erase 5 a Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c 4 b Dial 5 listen 5 b Listen the recorded Personal Message for caller 6 b Listen the recorded Personal Message for paging 7 b Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 7 re record go to 5 c 346 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message Cont d 4 c Dial 7 re record 5 c Hear Please start recording lt beep gt 6 c Recording Personal Message for caller 7 c Dial 803 8 c Dial the External Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for All Call 9 c Hear Please start recording lt beep gt 10 c Recording Personal Message for paging 11 c Press SPK to hang up Finish OR Dial 3 erase go to 5 a OR Dial 5 listen go to 5 b 347 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message Off hook Dial 71
357. rased at this time gt 1418 ADPCM Selection Maximum Recording Time Assign the ADPCM type 0 32K bps 1 16K bps This assignment shall relate to the maximum recording time gt 1419 Automatic Message Erasing Setup Assign the length of days for automatic erasing After the assigned day s have been passed all left messages shall automatically be erased For this activation Command 1417 has to be set to 1 Service On Following programs are to be used for the optional setting of VM gt 1403 Voice Mail Options gt 1404 Message Recording Leave Message Setup gt 1405 Call Information Mail Forward Service Setup gt 1406 Voice Mail System Password Setup gt 1408 Voice Mail Feature Data Initialize gt 1410 Delayed Automated Attendant Setup gt 1411 Incoming Call Mode Setup Voice Mail gt 1413 Voice Mail Multiple Address Abbreviated Code Setup gt 1414 Voice Mail Multiple Address Abbreviated Name Setup 528 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Cont d Programming Cont d Which type of In 1409 enter the Box type Voice Mail is Slot type In 1409 enter 10xx port number installed xx slot number In 0509 assign the pilot number to access to the voice mail In 1407 setup the voice mail box and password or each extension Is Slot type Yes x Voice Mail used e s et No For the optional settings refer to program manual
358. rd Bypass Call In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the initiate Call Forward DND Override gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Assign a service code for Bypass call Item 2 dial 807 gt 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Part A Item 6 Bypass Call Assign a One Digit Service Code for Bypass call DND FWD override gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override code 1022 Related Features Programmable Function Keys Function Keys simplify DND FWD Override option 192 Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override Cont d Programming Cont d Should extension be y able to initiate DND Call Forward Override Should extension have one button access to DND Call Forward Override In 0406 Item 4 No enter 0 In 1005 assign In 1006 assign a DND Class of Service to Call Forward Override extensions code 1001 tila ohn bg i Refer to Flexible DND Call Forward Ta oe Override EEE EEE 3 In Program 0512 Service No 7 assign a One Digit Service Code for DND Call Forward Override Do you use One Digit Service Code for DND Call Forward Override 193 Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To override an extension s Do Not Disturb or Call Fo
359. rding Account Codes appear on the SMDR report Operation lt Key Telephone gt To enter an Account Code any time while on a Trunk call The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter 1 Dial 2 Dial your Account Code 1 8 digits using 0 9 and 3 Dial Account Code Optional Forced Cont d Operation Cont d lt Key Telephone gt Cont d To enter an Account Code while placing a Trunk call If your system has Forced Account Codes you must follow this procedure 1 Access Trunk for outside call You can access a Trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code 2 Dial 3 Dial your Account Code 1 8 digits using 0 9 and 4 Dial If the system has Forced Account Codes and you don t enter a code your call cannot go through 5 Dial number you want to call lt Single Line Telephone gt To enter an Account Code any time while on a Trunk call 1 Dial 2 Dial your Account Code 1 8 digits using 0 9 and 3 Dial To enter an Account Code while placing a Trunk call If your system has Forced Account Codes you must follow this procedure 1 Access Trunk for outside call You can access a Trunk by pressing trunk access code 2 Dial Dial your Account Code 1 8 digits using 0 9 and 4 Dial If the system has Forced Account Codes and you don t enter a code your call cannot go through Oo 5 Dial number you want to call eee eee Alarm Clock Description
360. received first Incoming tetor yonr recorden VAU Queue Message VAU from message or 17 for Fixed VAU message Should incoming call be In 2213 MSG1 enter 0 In 2213 MSG1_TIME enter 0 In 2213 MSG1_TIME assign the duration time to send a first delay message after receive a call 0 64800 sec In 2213 MSG2 enter 1 to 16 received second Incoming for your recorded VAU Queue Message VAU from message or 17 for Fixed VAU message In 2213 MSG2 Should incoming call be enter 0 In 2213 MSG2_TIME In 2213 MSG2_TIME assign enter 0 the duration time to send a second delay message after receive a call or after start a first delay message 0 64800 sec Go to the following page A 279 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page A Should incoming call be disconnected after receive second Incoming Queue Message VAU In 2213 DISC_TIME Yes assign the duration time to In 2213 DISC TIME _ No enter 0 disconnect a call after start a second delay message In 0414 Timer 4 assign the interval time between message and message 0 64800 sec Should outside caller listen RBT Int MOH or Ext MOH Ext MOH between message and message RBT Int MOH In 2213 TONE enter 0 to In 2213 TONE enter 1 to In 2213 TONE enter 2 to send a Ring Back Tone send
361. red accordingly In 0406 Item 79 enter 1 In 1006 assign a Call Forward code 1055 In 0925 assign the calling line route for each incoming call In 0517 define continue and disconnect codes In 0405 Item 73 set how long later send a alarm tone to caller In 0405 Item 74 set how long later disconnect line if caller does not dial a continue code In 0921 ltem10 enter 1 for Busy Detection In 0116 ltem19 32 Tone type2 enter appropriate data for your Busy Tone specification Do you want to change the Service code for Call Forward 848 No 220 Refer to Flexible System Numbering feature External Call Forward Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0116 DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Setup Item19 Item32 for Tone type2 If 0921 Item10 is set to 0 for BT detection ON then enter appropriate data of your exchange busy tone 0405 System Timers Part A Item 73 DISA conversation Item 74 DISA conversation disconnect Set the timers for DUD DISA or DIL function on Analogue trunk 0406 Class Of Service Options Item 79 External Call Forward In extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 for the External Call Forward 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 85 Call Forward Assign the Service Code for Call Forward 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 23 Common abbreviated dial Assign the Service Code for Common Abbrevia
362. registration to one touch key Assign a service code for serial operation registration to one touch key gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign a function keys for Serial Operation code 1034 Related Features One Touch Dialing One Touch Dialing gives an extension user one button access to extensions Trunk Line and selected system features Programmable Function Key One touch Serial Operation requires a uniquely programmed function key Operation To store a series of operations in a One Touch key 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 852 3 Press the One Touch Key you want to program 4 Enter the sequence of operations you want to store up to 24 entries You can store the following operations Service Codes Digits 0 9 and SPK DND VOL A and VOL Y CL HOLD DC FLSH LND TRFR CHECK and CLEAR keys One Touch Keys Function Keys Pause by pressing MIC 5 Press the Serial Operations key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1034 6 Press SPK to hang up To dial using One Touch Serial Operation 1 Press Serial Operation key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1034 2 Press One Touch Key The stored serial operation dials out 382 One Touch Serial Operation Cont d Operation Cont d To check the serial operation stored in a One Touch Key 1 2 3 Press CHECK Press One Touch Key twice The stored serial operation displays To check another key press it twice before going to step 3 If the stored number does not
363. reviated dialing 0907 Trunk Group Routing for Extension Assign the Trunk Route for each extension 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Code 1037 Common abbreviated dialing Assign the specified Common ABB dialing or Common ABB Key In case of specified common ABB key the desired ABB No is stored to the additional data area Programming Function Keys Code 1038 Group abbreviated dialing Assign the specified Group Abbreviated Dialing or Group ABB Key In case of specified group ABB key the desired ABB No is stored to the additional data area 1023 Extension Abbreviated Dial Groups Assign each extension to Abbreviated Extension Groups 1 8 30 Abbreviated Dialing Cont d Related Features Trunk Outgoing Call A user can implement Abbreviated Dialing only if their extension has outgoing access to Trunks Trunk Group Routing Unless a user pre selects a Trunk Group Routing selects the Trunk for Abbreviated Dialing One Touch Dialing An extension can have a One Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing Operation PBX Compatibility If you enter a PBX trunk access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin the system automatically share bins Programmable Function Key Function keys simplify Abbreviated Dialing operation Toll Restriction Toll Restriction may prevent a user from using a stored Abbreviated Dialing number Operati
364. revious page page B A In 0412 Item 4 enter Should DISA Caller s Yes In 0412 Item 4 enter 0 to prevent DISA Class of Service allow 1 to allow DISA caller to use Common use of Common caller to use Common Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing In 1811 set the Trunk line Group Route the DISA caller access when Common Abbreviated Dialing Should DISA Caller s Class of Service allow caller to dial telephone system operator In 0412 Item 6 enter 0 to allow DISA caller to dial telephone system operator In 0412 Item 6 enter 1 to allow DISA caller to dial telephone system operator Should DISA Caller s Class of Service allow caller to use Internal Page In 0412 Item 7 enter 0 to allow DISA caller to use Internal Page In 0412 Item 7 enter 1 to allow DISA caller to use Internal Page Should DISA Caller s Class of Service allow caller to use External Page In 0412 Item 8 enter 0 to allow DISA caller to use External Page In 0412 Item 8 enter 1 to allow DISA caller to use External Page Continued on following page 176 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Should the system Toll In 1812 enter a Toll Restrict calls the DISA Restriction Class 1 8 caller places over for each DISA Class of system trunks Service 1 10 No Set Toll Rest
365. riction in In 1804 Item 1 enter 0 to Programs 0701 and 0702 no setting for DISA Talkie In 1804 Item 1 enter 2 ACI to allow using ACI In 1804 Item 2 enter a In 1804 Item 2 enter a DISA Talkie ACI group In 1804 Item 1 enter 4 DISA Talkie extension group for each Trunk line to allow using VAU for each Trunk line In 1303 assign ACI Group for DISA Talkie In 0405 Item 55 enter the Talkie ACI disconnect interval Which DISA Talkie does DISA caller need better ie Un ESOS E VAU Automatic Answering Telephone or ACI to allow using Automatic Answering Telephones In 1003 assign Extension In 2205 assign VAU Group for Automatic Message Answering Telephones In 0405 Item 53 enter the Automatic Answering Telephone set no answer interval In 0405 Item 54 enter the Automatic Answering telephone set disconnect interval Continued of following page 177 DISA Direct Inward System Access Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page After the system answers does DISA caller have adequate time to dial their number Yes Check the settings of 0405 Item 17 DTMF Receiver Active Time 0405 Item 34 DISA Dial Tone Time When DISA caller rings an extension does the system In 0405 Item 35 ring for an adequate time change the DISA No before setting the call as Answer Time Ring No Answer When DI
366. rime Line to a ring group 1 16 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Setup For outgoing Prime Line selection assign each Prime Line Trunk Line to a different access map 1 16 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment Set assignment so extension s can have access to Prime Line Deny outbound access to extensions that should not have Prime Line 1008 Basic Extension Port Setup Part B Item 3 Auto Trunk Line Seize Enter 1 for this option so extension user seizes Prime Line when they lift the handset 430 Prime Line Selection Cont d Related Features Direct Inward Lines Direct Inward System Access DILs and DISA calls also ring extensions directly even if not allowed in ring group programming Line Preference Prime Line Selection directly interacts with Line Preference Operation To place a call on your Prime Line 1 Lift handset You hear dial tone on your Prime Line To answer a call on your Prime Line 1 Lift handset Depending on your Line Preference programming you ll either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance 431 Privacy Release Meet Me Conference Description Privacy Release lets extension user s in the same work area join in a Trunk Line Conference To initiate a Privacy Release an extension user just presses the Meet Me Conference key and tells their co workers to join the call The system releases the privacy on the Trunk Line and other users can just pr
367. rivate Line Outgoing only The keyset has a Private Line only for outgoing calls The Private Line does not ring for incoming calls Both ways The extension has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting No Private Lines programmed All extensions assigned to ring group 1 Extension port 001 has option 1 all other extensions have option 0 All Trunk Lines assigned to ring group 1 All Trunk Lines in access map 1 have option 7 full access All Trunk Lines in the other access maps have option 0 no access All extensions use Access Map 1 Options None 435 Private Line Cont d Programming In Program 0910 assign In Program 0912 assign Private Line to an unused In Program 1006 make sure extension s Private Line is assigned to a key i extension to an unused Private Line ring group i e Private Line access map just for the Private Line Remove the key assignment for other extensions This allows for up to 52 different Private Lines In Program 0911 assign m Program 0909 assign Private Line to the Is Private Line extension wii option K Private Line access map tor lncoming Oniy to Private Line s ring see step 3 Use option 5 g y group see step 4 incoming and Hold access No In Program 0911 assign In Program 0909 assign Private Lin
368. rnal Call Forward In extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 for the External Call Forward Note This item should be set to 1 153 DID Capability DDI Capability Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0414 System Timers Part B Item 9 DDI pilot call no answer timer Define no answer timer for DID DDI call to STG pilot number gt 0414 System Timers Part B Item 18 DDI Incoming Ring Group no answer timer Define no answer timer for DID DDD call that is transferred to IRG gt 0604 Trunk Group for Abbreviated Dial Assign the Trunk Group for ABB outgoing call for ABB Bin base gt 0605 Destination Setup for MSN DDI Flexible Transfer Assign the ABB No which is used as destination of MSN DDI Flexible Transfer gt 0905 Trunk Group Assign the Trunk Group for the command 1808 1 16 gt 1805 DDI Conversion Table Area Define the DDI Conversion Table Area 1 8 gt 1806 DDI Conversion Table Data Setup Enter the receive number transferring number and the name per Conversion Table 1 400 gt 1807 DDI Receiving Digit Setup Assign the receiving digits 1 8 to be referred in the Conversion Table Area 1 8 gt 1808 Conversion Table Area Number Setup for Trunk Line Group Assign the Trunk Group number for Conversion Table Area 1 8 gt 1809 DDI Transferred Destination Setup Assign the final destination Incoming Ring Group Department Group or DUD DISA for each Conve
369. rnal Paging with personal message is dial 713 Service Code for Direct Extension call pickup is dial 715 Options DX2E VAU A DX2E 4PGDU S1 When you use Meet Me External Paging Transfer with Personal message 341 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Programming Assign the Paging External Meet Me Paging Call Forward and Call Pickup features In 0401 Item 31 enter 0 In 0406 Item 99 enter 1 Do you finish the setting for Paging External Meet Me Paging Call Forward and Call Pickup setup programming Should extensions be able to use Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message In 0401 Item 31 enter 1 In 0406 Item 99 enter 1 If the all VAU path are busy when the VAU send the In 2204 enter 0 to transferring message to In 2204 enter 0 to does does not allow the DUD DISA caller does the not allow the transfer transfer system allow automatic enter 0 transfer to incoming ring group In 0405 Timer 63 enter DUD DISA calling set transferring interval when VAU path are busy Continued on next page 342 Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d Continued from previous page Yes Does the all VAU Personal Message clear No Does the system allow the Yes Personal Message for adequate duration No When nobody answer to pag
370. rogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_62 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 0919 1 2 1st message only MSG1 1 64800 MSG2 0 or MSG2_ TIME 0 A Automatic amp Manual MSG1_TIME 1 64800 Manual Operation gt MSGi MSG m MSGi _ CMD_0414 CMD_0414 mema ITEM4 MSG1_TIME CMD_0405 ITEM43 B Manual only MSG1_TIME 0 Manual Operation 3 gt MA MSG o MSGi CMD_0414 CMD_0414 ITEM 4 ITEM 4 e CMD_0405 ITEM43 Notel If the preprogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_43 has passed after sending Incoming Queue Message VAU the Queue Message process will finish and the external line will be cut Note2 If the preprogrammed time Command 0405 Timer_62 has passed after received an incoming call the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be transferred by Command 0919 289 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Appendix Cont d 1 3 2nd message only MSG1 0 MSG2 1 17 A Automatic amp Manual MSG2_TIME 1 17 Manual Operation gt MSG2 MSG2 p gt MSG2 p gt CMD_0414 CMD_0414 TEM4 ITEM4 MSG2_TIME DISC_TIME 1 CMD_0405 ITEM43 B Manual only MSG2_TIME 0 Manua
371. roup Assign Trunk line to Trunk Line Group and set the priority assignment gt 0906 Trunk Line Group Routing Dial 9 Set up an outbound routing table 1 36 for Trunk Line Group assigned in Program 0905 gt 0907 Trunk Line Group Routing for Extension Assign the routes set in Program 0906 to extensions gt 0911 Trunk Line Access Map Setup Set up the Trunk Access Maps 1 16 This sets the access options for Trunk lines gt 0912 Extension Access Map Assignment Assign Trunk Line Access Maps 1 16 to extensions gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 510 Trunk Outgoing Call Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1006 Programming Function Keys To simplify placing calls assign function keys for placing Trunk Line calls Line keys code 0001 0052 Trunk Line Group Access code 1011 and Trunk Line Group code 1012 gt 1008 Basic Extension Port Setup Part B Item 3 Auto Trunk line Seize For each extension enabled 1 or disabled 0 Automatic Trunk Line Group Seize Related Features Alphanumeric Display Call Timer If the Trunk Line name seize display is enabled in programming Program 0406 item 37 1 Call Timer starts automatically after the user places a Trunk Line call Disabling the Trunk Line name seize display Program 0406 Item 37 0 also disables the Call Timer Automatic Handsfree One touch line key access With Auto
372. rsion Table Area 1 8 gt 1810 DDI Operation Mode Setup Assign the operation mode disconnect or transfer for each status vacant number busy no answer per each Conversion Table 1 400 gt 1814 DDI Transfer Table 1 1st Step Assign the Ist destination Incoming Ring Group Department Group DUD DISA or Outside Party for each Conversion Table 1 400 gt 1815 DDI Transfer Table 2 2nd Step Assign the 2nd destination Incoming Ring Group Department Group DUD DISA or Outside Party for each Conversion Table 1 400 154 DID Capability DDI Capability Cont d Programming Cont d In 0901 Items 14 17 set the circuit type for DID trunks type 3 Should make more than In 1805 create two Conversion Table Conversion Table Area In 1806 enter the conversion data per Table Area Should change the In 1807 enter the receiving digits from number of network receiving digits In 1808 assign Trunk Group on each Conversion Table In 0905 make Trunk Group for DID lines Confirm the appropriate timers are assigned for No answer in 0405 Timer31 0414 Timer9 and 0414 Timer18 Go to operation flow To next page 155 DID Capability DDI Capability Cont d Programming Cont d Incoming DDI From previous Call page Route Call Cmd 1806 Station Group External Number Route the call to the external destination Extension Vacan
373. rt A Item 63 VAU no answer time VAU Set the waiting time 0 64800 seconds of automatic answer for incoming call when All VAU paths are busy If all VAU paths are busy while waiting time incoming call transfer to transferring ring group CMD 2204 gt 0406 COS Options Item 96 Operation for VAU message VAU In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the initiate operation for Automated Attendant Message gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 4 Leave telephone number from DUD DISA VAU Assign a service code for Leave Telephone Number from DUD DISA gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 6 Operation for VAU message VAU Assign a service code for Operation for VAU message gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 33 Check leave number VAU Assign a service code leave telephone number received key telephone user call and erase the left telephone number gt 1804 DUD DISA Talkie Assign DUD DISA Talkie type and extension group for Talkie for each Trunk And each night mode When you use Automated Attendant features enter 4 V AU to Target Trunk and night mode gt 2201 VAU Reset When you use to erase the VAU Personal Message and VAU Message gt 2202 Message Length Assignment for VAU Set the maximum length of message length for VAU Message and Personal Message gt 2204 Transfer Ring Group Setup When VAU No Answer Assign a transfer ring group number when VAU will be no answer Auto
374. runk ZZZ Called Extension TTT Trunk Number 415 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Appendix Cont d Hold and Transfer Hold Timed Break Recall Screened Transfer Recall dial 1 XXX either wait for answer or go on hook forced transfer Unscreened Transfer Recall dial XXX either wait for answer or go on hook forced Transfer If the called extension answers the held call is automatically transferred by the DX2E Retrieve from hold Recall pause 7 Please note 7 is not always required For clarification of the hold transfer operation please refer to the attached sheets XXX Called ext number 416 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Appendix Cont d Incoming Trunk Answered and Unscreened Transferred to Ext 200 Hold and retrieve Hold enquiry call to RNA Busy retrieve call Hold forced transfer to ext 200 which is RNA Busy Hold enquiry call to ext 200 and extension 200 answers 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT SLT presses Recall SLT presses Recall SLT presses 7 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT SLT presses Recall SLT dials 200 Ext 200 is Ring No Answer Busy SLT presses Recall SLT presses 7 1 Incoming call on TRK1 answered by SLT 2 SLT presses Recall 3 SLT dials 200 4 Ext 200 is Ring No Answer Busy 5 SLT goes on hook 6 Transfer recall timer expires default 30 secs 7 SLT
375. runk name On off the Ringing Trunk name display If display on second line of display shows recall source pare 92 3 9 95 Operation for VAU On off an extension s ability to operate Automated massage VAU messages Attendant for DUD and DISA 97 General message On off an extension s ability to listen General Message 1 on playback General massage VAU General message On off an extension s ability to control General Message 1 on record and erase General message VAU Personal greeting On off an extension s ability to use Call Forward with 1 on message Personal greeting message VAU Personal Message 1 SMDR printout On off an extension s ability to output the SMDR 0 off accumulated accumulated data per extension base extension data SMDR printout On off an extension s ability to output the SMDR 0 off accumulated STG __ accumulated data per station group base data SMDR printout On off an extension s ability to output the SMDR 0 off accumulated accumulated data per account code base account code data 105 Group listening On off an extension s ability to use Group Group Listening 0 off service Listening Note on gt Enable off Disable ojo N 112 Class of Service Cont d Class of Service Options Program 0406 Page 8 of 8 This option Is used with Default 108 Notused 107 Long conversation On off the long conversation automatic Long Conversat
376. rward 1 DND extension or Call the forwarding 2 Press Override key PGM 1006 or SC 1022 OR Dial 807 OR One Digit Service Code lt Single Line Telephone gt To override an extension s Do Not Disturb or Call Forward 1 DND extension or Call the forwarding 2 Dial 807 OR One Digit Service Code 194 Door Lock Control Description A customer provided Door lock device can be installed with one of the Doorphone boxes You can connect each circuit s control relay to an electric door strike So that the extension user to remotely activate the door strike while taking to a visitor at the doorphone The control relays are normally open Conditions Door lock control requires a customer provided Electric door lock device connected to the PGDU card Refer to the System Hardware Manual Default Setting Duration time for Door lock open is 10 seconds Option DX2E 4PGDU S1 and NT S D6 Doorphone Programming gt 0405 System Timers Item 59 Door lock control time Set the duration time for door lock open 195 Door Lock Control Cont d Programming Cont d Do you complete to installed the Doorphone box and set the basic programming for Doorphone function Complete Doorphone Installation and Programming Do you complete to Installed the Electric door strike Refer to the Hardware Manual for Door Lock control Relays Do you want to
377. s Escape from Voice Mail Box In case the outside caller entered to the Voice Mail Box Service through DUD DISA DIL or DDI the outside caller can escape from VMB Service to DUD mode by dialing the Service Code 50 This function is available in case the outside caller entered to the Voice Mail Service by dialing VMB extension No the outside caller is recording the message on Automated Attendant for the System mode the outside caller is recording the message on Automated Attendant for the Extension mode After escaping to DUD mode the outside caller should operate in accordance with usual DUD feature The Talkie Answering Machine VAU etc is also work same like usual DUD feature 526 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Cont d Description Cont d Escape from Voice Mail Box Cont d In case the outside caller entered to the VMB Service through E amp M Tie Line and dials the Service Code 50 to escape from VMB the outside caller can return to the Extension Dialing Mode instead of DUD mode In Addition in case the outside caller entered to the VMB Service through DDI Line then another Service Code 51 can be used to escape from VMB and shall be transferred to specified destination in accordance with DDI Transfer function The details of Specification for Slot type Voice Mail are as below Maximum Recording Capacity 15 hours 32K bps 30 hours 16K bps Voice Chan
378. s None 34 Account Code Optional Forced Cont d Programming Cont d Should the system have Account Codes enabled disabled or forced required Enabled In 0407 enter 1 to enable Account Codes In 0407 enter 0 to disable Account Codes In 0407 enter 2 to force users to enter Account Codes In 0406 Item 84 NO epee In 0406 Item 84 enter 0 to disable be able to enteran enter 1 to enable Account Code entry a Account Code Ti Account Code entry In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Always enable this option if your system has Forced Account Codes Account Code Optional Forced Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 84 Account code service In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to enter Account Codes gt 0407 Mode Selection of Account Code Set Account Code operation The options are 0 Account Codes disabled 1 Account Codes enabled but not required 2 Account Codes required forced gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 86 Account code Assign a service code for account code gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features One Touch Dialing To simplify Account Code entry store the Account Code e g 1234 in a One Touch key Just press the key instead of dialing the codes Station Message Detail Reco
379. s Toll Restriction This helps a user that must place an important call while at a co worker s phone Toll Restriction Override lets the user 1 Go to a Co worker s phone 2 Implement Toll Restriction Override 3 Place a Trunk Line call the extension normally restricts lt Note gt Station based password must be programmed per a Station Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone Default Setting Toll Restriction Override password is not setting The Toll Restriction Override Time is 10 seconds Service Code for Toll Restriction Override is dial 875 Options None Programming gt 0405 System Timers Item 38 Toll restriction override time Set the Toll Restriction Override codes the system removes Toll Restriction for this interval gt 1025 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Set the different password for each extension user must dial for Toll Restriction override Related Features Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Override temporarily overrides an extension s Toll Restriction 487 Toll Restriction Override Cont d Programming Cont d Do you want to change the default password users must dial when implementing Toll Restriction Override In 0202 Item 3 change the Toll Restriction Override password After the system implements Toll Restriction Override do users have adequate time to dial their number In 0405 I
380. s is one of Override functionality that is not cut in to the established conversation on the handset but to send his her voice to the speaker of keyphone lt Note gt By the same operation procedure but it may send the ring to the speaker of keyphone This is because CDHF A is not installed in the keyphone at the called side The functionality is described as Intercom Off hook Signaling in this issue The system provides the following Voice Over options Called Extension Block The called extension s Class of Service may block incoming Voice Over attempts This is beneficial to users that don t want to have interruptions while on a call Automatic Voice Over Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Voice Over This option is set in the calling extension s Class of Service Manual Voice Over When the above option is not set then system provides this option In case of reaching to a busy extension the caller can dial service code or press function key to perform Voice Over to the called keyphone manually Prefer Off hook Signaling at the keyphone with CDHF A If the keyphone with CDHF A user sets this mode by service code called mode shall be changed to Off hook Signaling not Voice Over Conditions The Voice Over call is available for key telephone and single line telephone The called keyphone has to be installed CDHF A inside lt Note gt If your keyphone is Ist generation type then
381. s not have to manually retry their call later Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same Trunk or Trunk group When a Trunk becomes free the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time 96 Camp On Cont d Default Setting Calling Automatic Answer enabled Callback ring is 15 seconds long The system cancels Callback requests after 64800 seconds Callback key not assigned An extension s Class of Service allows Camp On Callback Service Code of Camp On Callback is dial 850 Service Code of Cancel Camp On Callback is 870 Options None 97 Camp On Cont d Programming for Callback Extension In 0406 Item 24 No Should extension be able Camp Yes In 0406 Item 24 enter 0 On Callback a busy extension n enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions No Should users be able to just Yes n pee a i lift the handset to answer the in see cel es legis Callback ring f In 0405 Item 6 set how long Callback rings an extension In 0405 Item 29 enter the interval after which the system cancels Callback requests This key is also used for Camp On Callback Sannia extant A Ves In 1006 assign a Camp have one button Camp On _ On key code 1020 No
382. s of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension gt 1013 Hot Line Assignments Program the Hot Line source and destination target extension numbers The allows up to source target pairs gt 1024 External Hot Line Set the calling common abbreviated number and originating extension number which is use External Hot Line The system can be set up to five External Hot Line originator External Hot Line originator can be call to setting outside caller by just lift the handset 274 Hot Line Cont d Related Features Call Forward Hot Line follows Call Forwarding For example the Automatic Extension Call destination can forward their calls When the Hot Line user lifts the handset they can Camp On to the destination leave a Callback or activate Off Hook Signaling Camp On Intercom Off Hook Signaling If the Hot Line user hears busy tone when they lift the handset they can Camp On to the destination leave a Callback or activate off hook signaling Do Not Disturb The Automatic Extension Call destination user can activate Do Not Disturb When the Hot Line user lifts the handset they hear DND If the destination extension has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled the call will ring Operation lt Key Telephone gt To place a call if your extension has Automatic Extension programmed 1 Lift handset If you want to place a Trunk Line follows call press a line key before lifting the h
383. sage VAU key program a line key it code 1082 2213 VAU Incoming Queue Message Setup for IRG Define the several timers Ist message connection timer etc and assign the VAU Message No which is used for 1st 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone for each Incoming Ring Group Case 3 gt 0414 System Timers Part B Timer_04 VAU overflow message interval Define the duration time between message and message 0414 System Timers Part B Timer_09 No answer time at Station Group DDI call Define the duration time between receive a incoming call and transferring a call 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item_06 Operation for VAU message By using this service code all VAU messages are operated recording listening erasing 285 Incoming Queue Message VAU Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0901 Basic Trunk Port Setup Part A Item_14 17 Service type Day Night Midnight Rest Assign the service type of each exchange line gt 2214 VAU Incoming Queue Message Setup for Extension Group Define the several timers 1st message connection timer etc and assign the VAU Message No which is used for Ist 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone for each Department Group gt 1809 DDI Transfer Ring Group Trunk Group basis gt 1810 DDI Operation mode Setup gt 1814 DDI Transfer Ring Group Table 1 Trunk Group basis gt 1815 DDI Trans
384. sations with external callers to the Voice Mail system 409 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Operation lt Key telephone gt To Activate Call Forward to Voice Mail System 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial call forwarding code 843 for Divert on Busy 845 for Divert on Ring No Answer 848 for All Call Forward OR Press Call Forwarding key PGM 1006 or 851 code 1002 for Divert on Busy PGM 1006 or 851 code 1003 for Divert on Ring No Answer PGM 1006 or 851 code 1055 for All Call Forward 3 Dial 1 plus the pilot number of the Voice Mail system 4 Press SPK to hang up To Cancel Call Forwarding 1 Press an idle CL key 2 Dial call forwarding code 843 for Divert on Busy 845 for Divert on Ring No Answer 848 for All Call Forward OR Press Call Forwarding key PGM 1006 or 851 code 1002 for Divert on Busy PGM 1006 or 851 code 1003 for Divert on Ring No Answer PGM 1006 or 851 code 1055 for All Call Forward 3 Dial 0 to cancel 4 Press SPK to hang up 410 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Cont d Operation Cont d lt Single Line Telephone gt To Activate Call Forward to Voice Mail System 1 Off Hook 2 Dial call forwarding code 843 for Divert on Busy 845 for Divert on Ring No Answer 848 for All Call Forward 3 Dial 1 plus the pilot number of the Voice Mail system 4 On Hook To Cancel Call Forwarding 1 Off Hook 2
385. se Automatic Repeat Dialing gt 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 10 Common Canceling service code Assign a service code of common Canceling service code gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 62 Automatic Repeat Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 74 No Should extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 74 enter 0 to use Automatic Repeat enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Is the interval between No In 0405 Item 36 Automatic Repeat Dialing change the Repeat attempts adequate i Redial Time Yes When Automatic Repeat Dialing retries a call and the called party is In 0405 Item 37 busy or doesn t answer does the change the Repeat system wait an adequate interval Redial Enable Time before hanging up and trying again Yes Do you change the Yes Refer to Flexible Service Code for Common 1 System Numbering Canceling code feature Yes 63 Automatic Repeat Dialing Cont d Related Features Last Number Dialing Save Last Number Dialing An extension user can quickly redial their last call Operation To use Automatic Repeat Dialing if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy 1 Place Trunk call Listen for busy tone or ring no answer 2 Press DC 3 Press LND 4 Press SPK to hang up The system periodically redials the call To cancel Automatic Repeat Di
386. se that the voice message guidance function is required VAU assignment should be set Operation To place a DUD call into the system from any telephone with DTMF sender 1 2 3 Dial the telephone number that rings the DUD Trunk line Wait for the DUD Trunk line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone Dial a system extension directly When the system has DUD Talkie Le Wait for the DUD Talkie automatically answer nA A U N Dial the telephone number that rings the DUD Trunk line Hear the automatic announcement Wait for a unique dial tone Dial a system extension directly 215 External Alarm Sensor Description The system provides up to 8 alarm sensors that you can connect to customer provide alarm contacts When the alarm contact activates designated extensions broadcast a unique alert tone This lets the extension users know that the alarm has been activated External Alarm Sensors could help a receptionist for example that frequently has to leave the reception desk to do some filing When a visitor opens the company s door an alarm contact on the door could signal a telephone in the filing area When the receptionist hears the alarm alert tone they know it s time to return to the reception area and greet the visitor The alarm alert tone continues as long as the door remains open Conditions Each external alarm uses an alarm sensor circuit in the PGDU card The PGDU alarm sensor c
387. se the Call Timer gt 0901 Basic Trunk Port Setup Item24 Answering Condition Enter 0 to start the Call Timer only when Polarity Reverse Signal is detected from network Enter 1 to start call timer either trunk inter digit time over or the reception of Polarity Reverse Signal whichever comes faster gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension Related Features Alphanumeric Display Disabling the trunk name seizes display Program 0406 Item 37 0 also disables the Call Timer Operation lt Key Telephone with Display gt To time your trunk calls 1 Place trunk call The timer starts automatically 94 Call Timer Cont d Programming Cont d In 0406 Item 46 No Should extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 46 enter 0 o to use Call Timer o enter 1 Should the Call Timer start only when Polarity Reverse Signal is detected In 0901 Item 24 No enter 1 Check the timer in 0405 Timer 30 In 0901 Item 24 enter 0 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Camp On Description Camp On Callback Extension When an extension user calls a busy extension the user may leave a Callback request for a return call The user does not have to repeatedly call the busy extension back hoping to find it idle or automatic recall The system processes Camp On Callback requests as follows 1 Caller at extension A leaves a Camp On Callba
388. sed for accessing the zone 1607 Internal Paging Group Splash Tone Setup For each Internal Paging Group 1 8 have normal 0 muted 1 or no 2 Internal Paging alert tones If enabled 0 or 1 extensions hear two beeps before Paging announcements If disabled the extensions hear the announcement without the beeps Muted tones can occur only if the extension user sets the telephone volume control switch to medium or high 390 Paging Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1608 Internal All Call Paging Setup Allow 1 or prevent 0 All Call Internal Paging for each extension If allowed extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements If prevented extension can only make All Call Internal Paging announcements Do not assign more than 50 extensions to the same All Call Paging Group Internal All Call Paging Group member must participated in the normal internal paging groups gt 1609 Internal All Call Paging Name Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging Group The name shows on the display of the telephone making the announcement Operation Internal Paging lt Key Telephone gt To Page a Paging Group 1 Press idle CL key 2 Press the group s Internal Paging key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1006 or SC 851 1006 1 8 OR Dial 801 and the Paging group number 1 8 3 Make announcement 4 Press SPK to hang up To Page a Internal All Call Paging 1 Press idle CL key 2 Press the
389. sed for setting the Time and Date i e with Service Code 828 474 Time and Date Cont d Programming Cont d No Should extension user be Yes i pe P i able to set the Time and ii a ri ene z Date Service Code 828 m i In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Do you want to change the default password users dial when changing the Time and Date In 0202 Item 1 change the Time and Date and The default passwords MOH password is 0000 If the system prevents all extensions from dialing Service Code 828 this is the only way to change the Time and Date Do you want to set the Yas In 0003 change the system Time and Date from svat m Time and Date No You have 8 different formats from which to choose Do you want to change the way Time and Date display on telephone displays No In 0103 select the new Time and Date format 1 8 Do you change the Yes i Refer to Flexible Service Code for Time 1 System Numbering And Date Setting feature 475 Time and Date Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0406 COS Options Item 71 Time and Date setting In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to set the Time and Date gt 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 39 Time and date setting Assign a service code for time and date setting gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign
390. separate power supply When one DSS Console is connected to a keyphone the appearance with EXT 1 key shows for DSS key and EXT 2 key appearance is for DLS key usage In case of two DSS Consoles are connected to a keyphone the Ist Console shows DSS key appearance regardless EXT 1 or EXT 2 key and 2nd Console shows DLS key appearance Conditions Only 24 key type of keyphones have connectivity of the DSS console 24 Key Super Display Phone amp 24 Key Executive Phone lt Note gt For previous keyphone models 16TXH 24TXH 24TSXH and 32TXH provide the connectivity Default Setting An extension s Class of Service allows DSS Console Alternate Answer No DSS Consoles assigned All console key ranges are 1 extension ports 1 200 Console cannot change Night Service mode The system has 8 External Paging zones Each zone requires customer provided equipment The system has no Internal Paging zones programmed No Doorphone installed Options DX2E 110D DSS 201 DSS Console Cont d Programming In 1101 assign DSS number corresponds to console DSS Consoles to installation number There are four extensions installations with up to two consoles connected at each installation Do you want to customize the DSS Console s keys for extensions In 1103 enter extension numbers Do you want to customize the DSS In 1106 enter Console s keys for trunk line numbe
391. sion 1 2 DAU T 8 Dial busy extension key telephone with display number Hear Station AAAA is not available please dial a new station or dial BBBB to wait or dial 714 to leave number AAAA is extension number BBBB is service code for Camp On 714 is service code for Leave Telephone Number Dial 714 Hear Please enter your area code and telephone number Dial own telephone number maximum 14 digits Hear Dial to call you back at CCC CC CCC CC is left telephone number Dial Hear Good by For key telephone with display user To call the telephone number which is left from outside 1 2 3 4 Press idle CL key Dial 743 Dial 2 The system calls to the left telephone number automatically To erase the telephone number left l 2 3 4 Press idle CL key Dial 743 Dial 3 Press SPK to hang up 57 Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA VAU Cont d Operation Cont d Automated Attendant Message Control lt Key Telephone gt To operate the VAU message Automated Attendant Message and Automated Attendant Error Message 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 716 3 a Dial 3 erase 4 a Dial message number 01 16 5 a Press SPK to hang up finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 3 b Dial 5 listen 4 b Dial message number 01 16 5 b You hear recorded VAU message 6 b Press SPK to hang up fin
392. sion s ability for Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls Service Code 812 0408 System Cycle setup Item 3 Intercom call Set the ring cycle for Intercom calls 0501 System Numberring Assign first digit and second digits for extension number 0502 Extension Numbers and names Assign an extension number and names for each extension port 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 32 Incoming intercom mode setting voice Assign a service code of handsfree answerback for your incoming intercom calls 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 33 Incoming intercom mode setting signal Assign a service code of forced intercom ringing for your incoming intercom calls 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 40 switching of voice call and signal call Assign a service code of change the way your intercom call signals the extension you are calling 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup Service No 3 Switching of voice signal call Assign a one digit service code of switching of voice signal call 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class Of Service 1 10 to an extension 1105 Operator s Extension Assign the operator s extension 294 Intercom Cont d Programming Cont d In 0501 select 1st and 2nd digits you want to assign and then enter to digits and type 2 extension access In 0502 select telephone port you want to change and then enter the new extension
393. sion s number simplify operations for busy users For example the user can easily process a new call on one appearance with a call in progress on the other Conditions This feature available for Key Telephone Without LC2 type key telephones Default Setting All keysets have Dual Line Appearance Options None Programming None Related Features Override Override call rings an extension s second line appearance when the first appearance is busy Operation None 208 DUD Direct Universal Dialing Description DUD permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions This helps outside callers that know the extension numbers of the people they want to reach For example a salesperson can call their in house assistant directly without going through a company operator To use DUD the outside caller Dials the telephone number that rings the DUD Trunk Line Waits for the DUD Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone Dials the system extension directly DUD DISA Talkie This system can be automatic announce to DUD caller from DUD DISA Talkie DUD DISA Talkie can be assigned 3 port ACI or SLT port Audio system ex Tape recorder connected to 3 port ACI Automatic answer system ex Automatic answering telephone connected to SLT port DUD DISA Talkie announce extension number to DUD caller practical use To use DUD with DUD DISA Talkie the outside caller Dials the telephone num
394. splay Phone amp 24 Key Executive Phone lt Note gt For previous keyphone models 16TXH 24TXH 24TSXH and 32TXH provide the connectivity Default Setting No DLS Consoles assigned Options DX2E 24DL DLS 184 DLS Console Cont d Programming In 1101 assign DLS Consoles to extensions Do you want to In 1103 enter customize the DLS extension number Console s keys for for each key extensions Do you want to In 1106 enter customize the DLS Console s keys for trunk lines trunk line number for each key In 1006 enter code1086 24DLS Range Selection for any key Should the console In 0501 assign be called by unique kind 7 on the digit digit 0 or 9 required In 1105 assign station port 185 DLS Console Cont d Programming Cont d gt gt 0501 System Numbering Assign kind 7 on the unique digit maybe 0 or 9 as operator usage 1006 Programming Function Keys Code1086 24DLS Range Selection Assign the function key on keyphone for DLS Console in case that 2nd page data key101 124 are used 1101 DSS Console Extension Assignment Designate the DLS Console installations i e the extensions that have DLS Consoles connected to them 1103 DSS Console Key Assignment Assign Extension number to each DLS console keys 1105 Operator s Extension Enter extension port number for operator s position to be called by un
395. st Dialing REDIAL digits number you dialed Last Number You press CHECK and LND to check the Rare REDIAL on Dialing digits stored Last Number Dialing entry where g digits is the stored entry Last Number Time and Day You dial Service Code 876 to clear the Last Dialing CLEAR REDIAL Number Dialing entry Memo Dial MEMO DIAL You press the Memo Dial key to check the digits Memo Dial entry before dialing it out Memo Dial CHECK LINE KEY nn You press CHECK and the Memo Dial key MEMO aL Memo Dial MEMO DIAL You press the Memo Dial key while on hook to digits check the stored number Message Waiting Time and Date You dialed Service Code 841 and left a MSG gt gt gt extname message at the extension shown in ext name Message Waiting Time and Date You dialed 871 to cancel a message you left at CANCEL MESSAGE another extension Music on Hold SET HOLD TONE You dial Service Code 881 and the password 0 TN O 1 TN 1 2 TN 2 normally 0000 to set the MOH tone Music on Hold SET HOLD TONE You set the MOH tone where n is the MOH SET nTONE tone number 0 2 Name Storing ENTER NAME eka Service Code 800 to program your Last Number PREVIEW REDIAL You press LND to check your stored Last Dialing digits Number Dialing entry 18 Introduction Cont d Table 1 4 Digital Key Telephone Displays Page 8 of 13 With this feature You ll see this display Voice Over Time and Date You dial Service Code 892 to
396. stination extension number If co workers want Secretary Call both must have buzzer keys for each other Related Features Programmable Function Key Secretary Call requires a uniquely programmed function key Operation To buzz your secretary or boss 1 Do not lift handset 2 Press buzzer key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1031 ext Your boss or secretary hears a splash tone Your buzzer key lights steadily Your boss s or secretary s buzzer key flashes fast To check to see who left you a Secretary Call 1 Do not lift handset 2 Press CHECK 3 Press flashing Secretary Call key 4 Press CLEAR To answer your Secretary Call indication 1 Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension 1 Press your lit Secretary Call key To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension 1 Do not lift handset 2 Press flashing Secretary Call key 453 Secretary Call Pickup Description Secretary Call Pickup lets an extension user easily reroute calls intended for a co worker to themselves By pressing a Secretary Call Pickup key the user can have all calls to a co worker s phone ring or voice announce theirs instead Secretary Call Pickup is a simplified type of Follow Me for employees that work closely together This feature could be helpful to customer service representatives leaves their desk an associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup key to
397. t RNA Cmd 0405 Timer 31 Disconnect Route Call Cmd 1814 Station Voice Mail DUD DISA Trunk do Ga RG No Entry IRG Trunk P Ring IRG i DUD DISA CE RNA Cmd operation using 0414 Timer Cmds 1802 18 expires 1803 1804 and 2205 Do not CE 156 DID Capability DDI Capability Cont d Programming Cont d Route Call Cmd 1815 Station Voice Mail DUD DISA Trunk to Group IRG No Entry IRG Trunk Ring Voice DUD DISA Mail Ports operation using RNA Cmd 0414 Do not step Cmds 1802 Timer18 expires on to 1809 1803 1804 and 2205 Do not Ce step on to 1809 Route Call Cmd 1809 No Entry IRG Ring IRG Ring Voice Continue to ring IRG or station Mail Ports group set in 1814 or 1815 r DID Capability DDI Capability Cont d Programming Cont d A D Baa E CF Station All extensions busy Group Status At least 1 7 3 eiension Wait for Station Group idle extension to become free Ring the extension in the Station Group Timer Cmd 0414 Item 9 expires Is it possible to route the Route the call to Continue to Ring the external IRG or Ring Ext destination 158 DID Capability DDI Capability Cont d Related Features DUD Direct Universal Dialing As one of the option for DDI conditional transfer vacant busy no answer DUD feature can take place DISA Direct Inward System Access As one of the option
398. t Me External Page 1 Off hook 2 Dial 803 And then the External Paging Group Code 1 4 or 0 for All Call 3 Announce the zone 330 Meet Me Paging Answer Cont d Operation lt Single Line Telephone gt Cont d To join a Meet Me External Page 1 Off hook 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone 0 4 You connect to the other party Meet Me Internal Page lt Key Telephone gt To make a Meet Me Internal Page 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 801 3 Dial the Internal Paging Group code 1 8 4 Announce the zone To join a Meet Me Internal Page 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 863 Gf your extension is in the group called OR Dial 864 and the group number if your extension is not in the group called OR Press the Internal Paging Group Answer key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1010 if your extension is in the group called lt Single Line Telephone gt To make a Meet Me Internal Page 1 Off hook 2 Dial 801 3 Dial the Internal Paging Group code 1 8 4 Announce the zone To join a Meet Me Internal Page 1 Off hook 2 Dial 863 Gif your extension is in the group called OR Dial 864 and the group number if your extension is not in the group called 331 Meet Me Paging Conference Description With Meet Me Paging Conference an extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other inside parties Each party joi
399. t calls on the PBX Trunk Line to outside calls only Enter 0 to allow users to dial PBX extensions gt 0702 Toll Restriction Tables Item 9 Trunk Line Access Code of PBX Enter the system PBX access codes The system can have up to 10 codes A code can be one or two digits long Valid enters are 0 9 and Use the FLSH key as a don t care digit gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Items 1 DP DTMFP 2 Incoming Type and 3 gt CODEC Cain Type Set these options for compatibility with the connected PBX gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Items 7 10 Behind PBX For each PBX Trunk Line port enable 0 or disable 1 Toll Restriction gt 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 19 Restrict Assign a restrict or non restrict for each PBX line Trunk line gt 1004 Toll Restriction Assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 8 to each extension 400 PBX Compatibility Cont d Related Features Abbreviated Dialing e The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin e If Abbreviated Dialing routes a call to a PBX Trunk Line it does not automatically insert a PBX access code It outdials the digits just as they are stored Trunk Line Calls Answering and Ring Groups Users answer incoming calls on PBX Trunk Lines it does not automatically insert a PBX access and Ring Group programming applies Refer to these features for more details Trunk
400. t other extensions key telephone only An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions Also any number of extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone A key telephone can be received Message Waiting A single line telephone cannot be received Message Waiting Default Setting An extension s Class of Service permits leaving Message Waiting Service Code of Message Waiting is dial 841 Service Code of Cancel All Message Waiting is dial 873 Service Code of Cancel Message Waiting is dial 871 Service Code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720 Not setting a One Digit Service Code of Message Waiting Options None 357 Message Waiting Cont d Programming In 0406 Item 15 No Should extension be able to Yes In 0406 Item 15 enter 0 i leave a Message Waiting T enter 1 Assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 do not In 1006 assign a assign a function Ng SHGUIGLe stems ior Have Yes function key for key for Message Orie DULOTRACE SSS to Message Waiting m iting _ Waiting code 1023 Message Waiting code 1023 Do you change the Service p Code for Message Waiting i Refer to Flexible Cancel All Message Waiting 1 System Numbering Cancel Message Waiting and feature Common Canceling Code a z In Prog
401. tails lt Reference gt For the future enhancement this function for trunk call with the name of abbreviated number will be provided to Executive Keyphone with standard display with referring to the alphabet character on the keypad 165 Direct Station Selection Description Direct Station Selection key DSS key shall be assigned to the function key on any keyphone The key shows idle busy status of the programmed extension by BLF Busy Lamp Field indication LED ON busy LED OFF idle When the key LED shows off state the programmed extension can be called by simply pressing the key Conditions This feature is available only for key telephone Default Setting No DSS key is assigned Options None Programming gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign DSS keys Code 1058 extension number for DSS key Related Features DSS Console DLS Console For these consoles the key for extension line assignment have to be programmed in the system programming But DSS key can be set at the keyphone as he she likes Operation lt Key Telephone gt To monitor the extension s status 1 Look at the DSS key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1058 xxx xxx extension number lt Status gt LED ON busy ring LED OFF idle To place intercom to the extension When the LED shows OFF 1 Press the DSS key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1058 xxx xxx extension nunber 166 Distinctive Ringing Tone amp Fl
402. ted Dial 0517 DISA control code Assign the code for continue disconnect the conversation 0921 Basic Trunk Port Setup Part B Item10 Busy Tone Detection Enable 0 or disable 1 for busy tone detection for cutting off the paths 0925 Route Table Setup for Trunk on External Call Forward Assign the Exchange Line Route for External Call Forward for each incoming call 1006 Programming Function Keys Function No 1055 One of the idle Function key is assigned as Call Forward key Related Features Abbreviated Dialing The destination telephone number for External Call Forward is stored in Common Abbreviated Dial area 221 External Call Forward Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate External Call Forward 1 Press idle CL key Dial 848 for Call Forward OR Press Call Forward key Command 1006 code 1055 2 Dial 1 to setup 3 Dial 813 for Common Abbreviated dial access instead of extension No entering 4 Dial target abbreviated dial number Confirmation Tone will be heard 5 Press SPK to finish To cancel External Call Forward 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 848 for Call Forward OR Press Call Forward key Command 1006 code 1055 3 Dial 0 to cancel Confirmation Tone will be heard 4 Press SPK to finish lt Single Line Telephone gt To activate External Call Forward 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 848 for Call Forward 3
403. ted Dialing Each bin can contain a stored number up to 24 digits long Abbreviated Dialing by Single Operation Abbreviated dialing also provided that the specified common group ABB No can be stored to an unused programming key The Key Telephone user can place an outgoing call only by pressing this key These keys can be used as same like One Touch key This feature provides the benefit in case all One Touch keys have already been occupied but the other Telephone Nos are wanted to be stored to the One Touch keys There are 2 types of function keys Specified Common Abbreviated Dial key Function Code 1037 ABB No Specified Group Abbreviated Dial key Function Code 1038 ABB No Conditions This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone The OT TEL and SLT are not available for the single operation feature Default Setting Extension s DC key is for Common Abbreviated Dialing An extension s COS allows entering and using Abbreviated Dialing entries Bins 0 400 assigned for Common Abbreviated Dialing 160 bins assigned for Group Abbreviated Dialing No Abbreviated Dialing numbers entered All extensions in Extension Abbreviated Dial Group 1 No Abbreviated Dialing keys programmed Service Code of Common Abbreviated Dial Setting is dial 853 Service Code of Group Abbreviated Dial Setting is dial 854 Service Code of Common Abbreviated Dialing is dial 813 Service Code of Grou
404. tem 38 change the Toll Restriction Override Time 488 Toll Restriction Override Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To temporarily override a restricted extension s Toll Restriction 1 Press idle CL key Dial 875 Dial password default 0000 Press idle line key Sd aE aie oS Dial number without restriction lt Single Line Telephone gt To temporarily override a restricted extension s Toll Restriction 1 Off hook Dial 875 Dial password default 0000 Dial 9 Trunk Line Routing Code Dial number without restriction Oise 489 Transfer Description Transfer permits an extension user to send i e extend an active Intercom or outside call to any other extension in the system With Transfer any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co worker A call a user transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination extension This assures that users do not lose or inadvertently abandon their transfers For the retrieve operation the extension user can retrieve the last transferred line by pressing the Trunk Line Key The system allows the following types of transfers Screened Transfer The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up Unscreened Transfer The transferring party extends the call without an announcement Extension Department Groups Transfer The transferring party sends the call
405. tem 9 Call Pick up for another group In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to pickup calls ringing telephones that are not in their pickup group Service Code 869 0406 COS Options Item 10 Call Pick up for specified group In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to pickup calls ringing a specific group Service Code 869 0406 COS Options Item 51 Call Pick up information display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s Call Pickup display If disabled extension s display shows the number of the Trunk intercepted not the pickup group 0406 COS Options Item 63 Call Pick Upped In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to be Call Pick Upped 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 8 Call pick up for specified group Assign service code of call pick up for specified group 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 16 Call pick up Assign service code of call pick up 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 17 Call pick up for another group Assign service code of call pick up for another group 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 95 Direct call pick up Assign service code of direct call pick up 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 5 Direct extension call pickup Assign service code of direct extension call pickup 1005 Class of Service for Extension
406. tendant software in the PC then the PC can be performed as computer assisted operator console Conditions This feature is specially available for PC Attendant package Default Setting No PC Attendant is set Options PC Attendant package Related Features None Programming gt 1101 DSS Console Extension Assignment Enter extension port number for PC Attendant interface board is connected on DSTU gt 2501 PC Attendant Port Setup Enter extension port number for PC Attendant interface board is connected on DSTU gt 2503 PC Attendant Operation Item1 Attendant Camp on Enter disable 0 or enable 1 for Attendant camp on function 404 PC Attendant Cont d Programming Cont d Should PC Attendant In 2501 assign extension DSTU port Console is installed number In 2503 Item 1 enter 0 In 2503 Item 1 enter 1 Should PC Attendant activate camp on In 1101 assign PC Attendant port number Operation Refere to PC ATTENDANT CONSOLE USER S MANUAL for the details 405 PC Based Voice Mail Connection NVM Series Description The Voice Mail Integration feature allows a third party Voice Mail system to be connected to the dX Z system The third party Voice Mail system must be connected to the analogue extension ports of the dX Z system The analogue extension ports must be configured as VX ports Voice Mail ports The dX Z can be configured to provide
407. tension appearance for extension number assigned code 1036 Virtual Extension key in 0502 In 1016 select the In 1016 select the Virtual Extension ae ining Virtual Extension key and enter 0 i key and enter 1 In 1018 select the tone pattern for the extension port In 0111 refer to the tone pattern configuration In 1019 select the order of the tone pattern 524 Virtual Extension Cont d Related Features Class of Service Class of Service options apply to Virtual Extension Appearances Department Calling Virtual Extension Appearances can be in Department Calling Groups Group Call Pickup Virtual Extension Appearances can be in Call Pickup Groups Toll Restriction The system restricts calls made from Virtual Extension Appearance keys Operation lt Key Telephone gt To answer a Call ringing a Virtual Extension number 1 Lift handset 2 Press flashing Virtual Extension key To place a call to a Virtual Extension Number 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial Virtual Extension number lt Single Line Telephone gt To answer a Call ringing a Virtual Extension number This feature only available for key telephone To place a call to a Virtual Extension Number 1 Off hook 2 Dial Virtual Extension number 525 Voice Mail Box Box type Slot type Description The system provides the connectivity of proprietary voice mail In the first release box type of voice m
408. tensions 323 Long Conversation Cutoff Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0405 System Timers Item Timer 77 Long conversation Cutoff timer for incoming After a user answers a Trunk Line call the system forcedly disconnect for incoming Trunk line after the interval 0 64800 seconds 0405 System Timers Item Timer 78 Long conversation Cutoff timer for outgoing After a user places a Trunk Line call the system forcedly disconnect for outgoing Trunk line after the interval 0 64800 seconds 0406 Class of Service Options Item 107 Long conversation Cutoff for incoming In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 long conversation Cutoff for incoming 0406 Class of Service Options Item 108 Long conversation Cutoff for outgoing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 long conversation Cutoff for outgoing 0921 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part B Item 1 Long conversation Cutoff For each Trunk line allow 1 or prevent 0 long conversation Cutoff 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a class of service 1 10 to an extension Related Features None Operation None 324 Long Conversation Warning Description The system can broadcast warning tones to a Trunk Line caller warning them that they have been on the call too long The tones are just a reminder the user can disregard the tones and continue talking if they choose The outs
409. ter 1 to printout the extension status by extension number 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 10 Assign output 0 or Not output 1 for ALB information 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 12 Assign output 1 or Not output 0 for Conversion table name information in case of MSN DDI call 0404 SMDR Options Item 6 Printer output options 14 Assign output 1 or Not output O for Date information 0503 DCI Extension Number Assign an unused extension number e g 500 to the DCI port assigned to SMDR 0901 Basic Trunk Line Port Setup Part A Item 13 SMDR print out For each Trunk Line enter 0 if Trunk Line s calls should appear on SMDR report Enter 0 if extension s calls should not appear on SMDR report 1008 Basic Extension Port Setup Part B Item 1 SMDR printout For each Extension enter 1 if extension s calls should appear on SMDR report Enter 0 if extension s calls should not appear on SMDR report 1201 DCI Internal Pattern Setup Type 1 Item 1 S register 65 Set the DCI communications parameters to match the SMDR device 1202 DCI Port Type Set this option to 1 if the SMDR device is serial Set this option to 2 if the SMDR device is Centronics parallel 1206 Initialize DCI Initialize the DCI port selected for SMDR Related Features PBX Compatibility To use the PBX Call Reporting option program system for behi
410. ternate destination in program 1802 214 DUD Direct Universal Dialing Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1803 DUD DISA Transfer Ring Group Setup If you set a DISA Trunk Line operating mode at 1 use this program to assign the ring group that is the transfer destination You make a different entry for each Night Service mode 1804 DUD DISA Talkie If you want to automate announcement to DUD caller when incoming DUD call use this program to assign connected port of the automated announcement extension ACI or SLT type e x Automatic answering telephone 2205 Automated Attendant Message assignment Assign the VAU message number which is used Automated Attendant Message for DUD caller from VAU 2210 VAU 1 Digit Code Assign extension department group to be called by 1 digit 1 to 0 and from outside caller per each VAU message Command 2205 Related Features Trunk Outgoing Call An outside caller cannot use DUD to place Trunk line through the system Direct Universal Dialing DUD Outside caller can call to the desired extension directly from outside by adding the extension number after the system automatically answered Delayed DUD feature should require the basic DUD assignment Automated Attendant for DUD DISA VAU When the system answered for incoming call automatically on DUD DISA Line pre recorded voice message guidance can be sent to caller if VAU is connected In ca
411. the Intercom callers is using Handsfree Answer back Both Intercom parties must have either lifted the handset or pressed SPK Intercom Off hook Signaling Voice Over If the system provides Automatic Override 0406 Item6 1 an extension caller cannot Break in to the busy keyphone unless the called keyphone is being received the 2nd call in the time It means both CL1 and CL2 should be busy at the receiving side for the Break In attempt Privacy Data Privacy blocks Bleak In attempts Programmable Function Key Function keys simplify Break In operation 70 Break In Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To Break In on a conversation in progress 1 Call busy extension 2 Press Break In key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1019 OR Dial 810 OR Dial One Digit Service Code lt Single Line Telephone gt To Break In on a conversation in progress 1 Call busy extension 2 Dial 810 OR Dial One Digit Service Code 71 Caller ID Description In case of receiving the Caller ID information from public network on the incoming trunk the system can indicate the information on the keyphones display and SMDR output The system supports both Caller ID reception from ISDN trunk and analogue trunk with Bellcore specification For more details refer to separate issue of Caller ID manuals 72 _ Call Forward Description Call Forward permits an extension user to redirect their ca
412. the call to the first free phone in the department 3 Dial 780 or One Digit Access code to call all of stations in the group lt Single Line Telephone gt To call a department 1 Off hook 2 Dial department s extension number The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department To withdraw from department group 1 Off hook 2 Dial 750 3 Dial 1 4 On hook To cancel the withdrawing from department group 1 Off hook 2 Dial 750 3 Dial 0 4 On hook To use Manual All Ring Mode 1 Off hook 2 Dial department s extension number The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department 3 Dial 780 or One Digit Access code to call all of stations in the group 250 Group Listening Description This feature enables you to listen the speech of other party through the speaker of digital key telephone during handset conversation Caution This feature is recommended to be used at ISDN lines or other Digital lines The speech quality shall not be guaranteed if this feature is used at Analogue trunk lines Conditions This feature is available only for digital key telephone Default Setting This feature is not assigned Options None digital key telephone Programming gt 0406 Class of Service Options Item_105 Group listening In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to initiat
413. this feature for example to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting After being alerted the boss could call the secretary when it s most convenient An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions A Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users B Secretary Call does not set up an intercom call C When assigning Secretary Call from their own extension a user enters the associated extension numbers When assigning Secretary Call from system programming use the associated extension port number Default Setting No Secretary Call Buzzer keys defined Options None 451 Secretary Call Buzzer Cont d Programming In 0406 Item 67 No Should extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 67 enter 0 n to use Secretary Call n enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 assign a function key as a Secretary Call key code 1031 extension port number 452 Secretary Call Buzzer Cont d Programming gt 0406 COS Options Item 67 Buzzer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Buzzer gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign Class of Service 1 10 to extensions gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Secretary Call buzzer code 1031 plus the de
414. to Trunk Transfer call DUD Direct Universal Dialing Direct Universal Dialing also allows outside callers to directly access system extensions Trunk Outgoing Call An outside caller can use DISA to place Trunk Line calls through the system Paging External An outside caller can announcement for External Paging from DISA Paging Internal An outside caller can announcement for Internal Paging from DISA Automated Attendant for the DUD DISA When the system answered for incoming call automatically pre recorded voice guidance message can be sent to caller Operation To place a DISA call into the system from any SLT with DTMF sender when without DISA Talkie Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line Wait for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone Dial the 6 digit DISA password access code Used DTMF tone Wait for a second unique dial tone nA BW NY Re Dial the system extension number or feature access service code Used DTMF tone To place a DISA call into the system from any SLT with DTMF sender when with DISA Talkie 1 Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line 2 Wait for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone 3 Dial the 6 digit DISA password access code Used DTMF tone 4 Hear guidance message from DISA Talkie e x extension numbers for each member and feature access service code Hear second unique d
415. to join a Meet Me set the Meet Me the following function keys in Page adequate Ti Paging Time 1006 External Zone Paging code 1004 External All Call Paging code 1005 and Internal Pee eaaa eae eaae iA Zone Paging Answer code 1006 Do you change the Yes Refer to Flexible Service Code System numbering feature 329 Meet Me Paging Answer Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for External Zone Paging code 1004 zone External All Call Paging code 1005 and Internal Paging Zone Answer code 1006 zone Related Features Meet Me Paging Answer Conference An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other inside parties Programmable Function Key Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging Answer operation Operation Meet Me External Page lt Key Telephone gt To make a Meet Me External Page 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 803 And then dial the External Paging Group code 1 4 or 0 for all Call OR Press the External Paging Zone key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1004 amp 1005 3 Announce the zone To join a Meet Me External Page 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone 0 4 You connect to the other party lt Single Line Telephone gt To make a Mee
416. troduction Cont d Table 1 1 Service Codes by Number Page 3 of 6 Service Code When you are For this feature nee Function Key G2 808 Step Calling through a Department Group Hunt 1021 Group 809 Sending voice over to busy extension Voice Over Intercom 1018 or send off hook signal Off hook Signaling 810 Break in on an extensions call 1019 811 Listening to the incoming ring choices Check of ringing tone a i 812 Switching the way your extension Intercom signals the extension you are calling 813 bin Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing number 000 199 814 bin Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing 1038 number 00 19 815 Saving a number or dialing a saved Saved number redial 1014 number Activating Last Number Dialing Last Number Dialing C Night Service 1039 P 1040 P 1041 P 1042 P Incoming intercom called mode setting Intercom Talkback to voice announce Forced Intercom Ringing Incoming intercom called mode setting Intercom Talkback to signal call Forced Intercom Ringing Enabling disabling Key Touch Tone Key Touch Tone Turning Background Music on and off Background Music 826 o Activating Conference from a S L T Setting or cancel an alarm External Alarm Sensor 1 or 2 time Note P is user password Introduction Cont d Table 1 1 Service Codes by Number Page 4 of 6 Service Code
417. turning 3 OUT PLEASE CALL 9 digits phone number 4 PLEASE CALL ME ON 9 digits phone number 5 BUSY CALL AFTER 9 digits 6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK AT Time when returning T BUSINESS TRIP UNTIL Date when returning 8 BUSINESS TRIP CALL 9 digits where returning 9 GONE FOR THE DAY 10 ON VACATION UNTIL Date when returning 11 20 MESSAGE 11 20 An extension s Class of Service allows using Text Message No Text Message keys programmed Service Code of Text Message is dial 836 Service code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720 470 Text Message Cont d Programming Do you want to change In 0403 change the default display the default Text messages Messages Yes In 0406 Item 75 enter 1 Should an extension be able to use choose a Text Message In 0406 Item 75 No enter 0 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions In 1006 do not assign a function key for Text Message code 1027 In 1006 assign a function key for Text Message code 1027 Should extension have one button access to Text message Do you change the Refer to Flexible Service Code for Text Yes Message and Common E ng Canceling code 471 Text Message Cont d Options None Programming Cont d gt 0103 Time and Date Display Mode Enter 1 4 12 hour mode display on Text Message Enter 5 8 24 hour mode display on Text Message gt 0403 Text
418. types for External Page and Door Box ports 0120 External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Setup Assign a CODEC gain type from Program 0119 to external Page and Door Box Ports 0405 System Timers Item 18 Paging announcement duration Set the maximum allowable duration for a Paging announcement 0406 COS Options Item 22 External Paging In an extension s COS enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to use External Paging 0406 COS Options Item 52 Internal Group Paging In an extension s COS enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Internal Paging 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 19 External paging Assign a service code for external paging 0511 Service Code Setup Part A Item 26 Internal group paging Assign a service code for internal group paging 1005 Class of Service for Extension Assign a Class of Service 1 10 to an extension 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for External Paging zones 1004 and External All Page 1005 1601 Internal Paging Groups Assign a extensions to use of 8 Internal Paging Groups 1602 Internal Paging Group Names Program names for the Internal Paging Groups 1604 External Paging Zone Control Assign options for each External Paging Zone 1 8 Splash Tone before Page Background Music when idle and Alarm 1 8 1606 External Paging Zone Group Assign each External Paging Zone 1 8 to an External Paging Group 1 8 u
419. u hear trunk dial tone follows dial 9 routing lt Chart B gt 320 Line Preference Cont d Programming Cont d gt 1008 Basic Extension Port Setup Part B Item 3 Auto Trunk Line Size Enable 1 or disable 0 Outgoing Trunk Line Preference for extensions See the table below for interaction gt 1015 Ringing Line Preference For each extension select the route that it will use for Auto Answer for Non Ringing Lines The routes correspond to the Trunk Line Group Routing table set in Program 0906 Related Features Direct Inward Line DILs do not affect Incoming Line Preference operation Ring Groups Trunk Line ring extensions according to Ring Group programming Trunk Line Group Routing If an extension gets Trunk Line dial tone when the user lifts the handset the system uses the dial 9 routing to select the Trunk Line Operation To answer a ringing call if your phone has Ringing Line Preference 1 Refer to lt Chart A gt To place a call if your phone has Outgoing Line Preference 1 Refer to lt Chart B gt 321 Long Conversation Cutoff Description This system can forcedly disconnect for Trunk Line caller that they have been on the call longer duration Setting of Long Conversation Cutoff needs for extension and Trunk line There are two types of Long Conversation Cutoff One of the conversation Cutoff for incoming call another one for outgoing call Conditions T
420. umber 1 8 3 Announce call 4 Hang up when Extension Group user answers your announcement The answering party connects to the Trunk Line call when you hang up 494 Transfer Cont d Operation Cont d gt Transferring Trunk Line Calls Cont d To pick up a call transferred to an Extension Group Pickup key PGM 1006 or C851 1010 The phone you use must be in the group paged 1 Press idle CL key 2 Press Extension Group Pickup key PCM 1006 or SC 851 1010 OR Dial 863 3 Respond to the announcement You connect to the Trunk Line when the announcing party hangs up Transferring Without Holding 1 Lift handset 2 Press busy line key 3 When original caller hangs up you are connected To retrieve the transferred Trunk Line 1 Press idle CL key or lift handset 2 Press the last transferred Trunk line key green flashing Transferring intercom Calls gt 1 Press HOLD 2 Dial extension to receive your call 3 Announce your call and hang up If the called party lifts the handset to answer your announcement they automatically connect to the Transferred call when you hang up If the called party answers Handsfree the transferred Intercom call rings their phone when you hang up If the called party doesn t want the call press you illuminated CL key to retrieve it 495 Trunk Incoming Call Description The system provides flexible routing of incoming Trunk Line calls to meet the
421. ups If extension rings for other ring group calls user can t identify Prime Line calls In Program 0401 Item Yes No In Program 0401 Item 13 enter 1 13 enter 0 Prime Intercom In Program 0401 Item ane In Program 0401 Item 8 enter 1 8 enter 0 When Prime Line rings should lifting the handset answer the call With both Intercom and Prime Line ringing should lifting the handset answer Intercom or Prime Line 429 Prime Line Selection Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0401 System Options Part A Item 8 Priority for Incoming Call Set incoming Prime Line preference Enter 1 to answer ringing Prime Line enter 0 to answer ringing Intercom call 0401 System Options Part A Item 13 Auto Answer to Incoming Call from Trunk Line Enter 1 if lifting the handset should answer ringing Prime Line enter 0 to seize idle line appearance 0905 Trunk Line Groups Assign Prime Line to Trunk Line group for outgoing Prime Line selection Also see 0906 and 0907 below 0906 Trunk Line Group Routing Dial 9 Set up outbound route for Trunk Line group that contains the Prime Line Also see 0905 and 0907 0907 Trunk Line Group Routing for Extension Assign extension s to a Prime Line route 1 36 for outgoing Prime Line access 0909 Trunk Line Group Assignment Assign extension s to a ring group 1 16 that consists of a Prime Line 0910 Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment Assign a P
422. uted or turned off Normal In 1607 enter 0 for normal volume to medium or high Is the maximum duration In 0405 Item 18 set the setting for Internal Page Announcement Paging adequate Duration Yes Continued on following page 388 Paging Cont d Programming Cont d External Paging Cont d Continued from previous page In 0406 Item 52 No Should extension be able Yes In 0406 Item 52 enter 0 to use Internal Paging a enter 1 In 1005 assign Class of Service to extensions Should extension have yes one button Internal Zone Paging In 1006 do not assign function keys for Internal In 1006 assign function keys for Internal Paging Paging Zones code 1006 Zones code 1006 1 8 1 8 In 1608 for each extension enter 0 Should extension be able to use All Call All Zone Internal Paging In 1608 for each extension enter 1 Standard When All Call Paging In 1609 do not assign Display should extension In 1609 assign a a name to the All Call paging see All Call name to the All Call Internal Paging Zone Paging name or Internal Paging Zone standard display Do you change the Service Code for Refer to Flexible i Internal Group 1 System Numbering Paging feature 389 Paging Cont d Programming Cont d gt 0119 External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Type Set the five CODEC gain
423. utomatic Answer you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset If you don t have Callback Automatic Answer you must press the ringing CL key appearance to place the call To place a Camp On Extension 1 Call busy extension 2 Dial 850 or press Camp On key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1020 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Do not hang up To cancel a Camp On Callback Extension 1 Press idle CL key and Dial 870 OR Press Camp On key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1020 lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a Callback Extension 1 Call busy extension 2 Dial 850 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Hang up 4 Lift handset when busy extension calls you back 101 Camp On Cont d Operation Cont d Callback Extension lt Single Line Telephone gt To place a Camp On Extension 1 Call busy extension 2 Dial 850 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Do not hang up To cancel a Camp On Callback Extension 1 Off hook 2 Dial 870 3 On hook Callback Trunk lt Key Telephone gt To queue for a busy Trunk 1 Try to access busy Trunk 2 Dial 850 or press Camp On key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1020 Confirmation tone is heard 3 Hang up to leave a Callback request OR Wait off hook to Camp On to the Trunk To answer when Callback Trunk calls you back 1 Lift handset To cancel a Camp On Callback Trunk request 1 Press idle
424. xample 2 When outgoing call is restricted even through Walking Toll Restriction is performed the call shall be printed to SMDR as follows CLASS TIME LINE DURATION STATION DIALED No CLI RD COST ACCOUNT 01 BRD 10 10 LINE001 00 00 00 200 009714816958 0 W 001 542 Manufacturer Nitsuko Corporation 2 6 1 KITAMIKATA TAKATSU KU KAWASAKI 213 8511 JAPAN TEL 81 44 813 7104 FAX 81 44 813 7300
425. xtension individually Calls to 470 ring the Virtual Extension key on the three keysets simultaneously It seems to be main pilot number 470 for Account group Conditions A More than one extension can share the same Virtual Extension Number B An extension can have more than one Virtual Extension Number limited only by the number of available function keys Default Setting No virtual extensions assigned i e virtual extensions do not have extension numbers or names Virtual Extension keys not assigned Options None Programming gt 0502 Extension Numbers and Names Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extensions ports 73 96 gt 1006 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Virtual Extension code 1036 extension number gt 1016 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Set ringing for an extension s Virtual Extension keys gt 1018 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Set ring tone for an extension s Virtual Extension gt 1019 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Set ringing for an extension s Virtual Extension keys 523 Virtual Extension Cont d Programming Cont d In 0502 assign unused extension numbers e g 500 to virtual extension ports 73 96 In 1006 assign function key for Virtual Extension In 1006 do not Should extension assign a function key have function key code 1036 virtual port s for Virtual Ex
426. xternal Paging an extension user just dials the ACI audio port extension number and makes the announcement The system broadcasts the announcement from the ACI audio port and simultaneously closes the associated ACI relay You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging amplifier if required For External Paging connect the Paging amplifier to the ACI audio port OUT output jack Connect the amplifier control leads to the CTL control relay jack Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details 45 Audio Communications Interface ACI Cont d Description Cont d Auxiliary Device Control The ACI can control a customer provided tape recorder When an extension user dials the ACI audio port extension number they can automatically start the recorder and activate the record function When the user hangs up the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off For tape recording connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the ACI audio port OUT output jack Connect the recorder control leads if available to the CTL control relay jack Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details By using Group Hunt you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool When an extension user dials the department Group pilot number they reach the first available tape recorder in the pool The relays on the ACI can optionally control customer provided external ringers loud bells and buzzers When an extensio
427. xternal Paging Zones Programmable Function Key For each Night Service Mode assign which Trunk lines should ring which External Paging Zones 375 Night Service Manual Auto Cont d Operation lt Key Telephone gt To activate Night Service by dialing codes 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 818 3 Dial Night Service Password default 0000 4 Dial Night Service code 0 Day mode 1 Night mode 2 Midnight mode 3 Rest mode Confirmation tone is heard 5 Press SPK to hang up To activate Night Service by using programmable keys 1 Press Night Service key see below Day mode key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1039 password Night mode key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1040 password Midnight mode key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1041 password Rest mode key PGM 1006 or SC 851 1042 password Confirmation tone is heard lt Single Line Telephone gt To activate Night Service by dialing codes 1 Off hook 2 Dial 818 3 Dial Night Service Password default 0000 4 Dial Night Service code 0 Day mode 1 Night mode 2 Midnight mode 3 Rest mode Confirmation tone is heard 5 On hook To activate Night Service by using programmable keys This feature only available for key telephone 376 One Touch Dialing Description One Touch Dialing gives an extension user one button access to extensions Trunk Lines and selected system features This saves users time when accessing co workers clients and
428. ystem Options Part A Item 31 VAU fixed message Set the use 0 or not use 1 VAU fixed message for VAU features When you set to not use 1 you can not use Preamble Message feature 0514 Service Code Setup Part B Item 6 Operation for VAU message VAU Assign a service code for operation for VAU message 2201 VAU Reset Erase the Preamble Message and VAU message 2202 Message Length Assignment for VAU Assign the maximum message length for VAU message and Personal message 2207 Preamble Message Each extension line assign the VAU Message number is used by Preamble Message Related Features None Operation To Answer with Preamble Message to Trunk Line lt Key Telephone gt lt Single Line Telephone gt To answer with Preamble Message to Trunk Line l 2 3 Incoming Trunk line comes Answer the incoming Trunk line Trunk line caller hears the Preamble Message from VAU after Preamble Message is over Starts to talk to Trunk line caller 422 Preamble Message VAU Cont d Preamble Message Control lt Key Telephone gt To operate the VAU message Preamble Message Note Message Number refer to 4 a 4 b and 4 c should be assigned under CMD 2207 1 Press idle CL key 2 Dial 716 3 a Dial 3 erase 4 a Dial message number 01 16 5 a Press SPK to hang up finish OR Dial 5 listen go to 4 b OR Dial 7 re record go to 4 c 3 b Dial 5 listen 4 b Dial messa

24i & 96i user and feature guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

24i &amp; 96i user and feature guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

24i & 96i user and feature guide